• Author / Uploaded
• Pablo Donari

• Categories
• Autodesk
• Tabulador (Gui)
• Estandarización
• Archivo de computadora
• Gráficos de computadora 3 D

Citation preview

AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010

User’s Guide

February 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. The data from DIN Standards are used by permission of DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. They conform with the current version of the DIN Standards concerned (December 1, 2007, Autodesk) The JIS symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under permission from JIS. ISA Symbols © ISA © Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin ISO 10628:1997 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO 14617-5:2002 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO 14617-6:2002 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO 3511-1:1977 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO 3511-2:1984 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO 3511-3:1984 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) DIN 2481:1979-06 Symbols © Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. (DIN) JIS Z 8204:1983 Symbols © Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS) Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Published by: Autodesk, Inc. 111 Mclnnis Parkway San Rafael, CA 94903, USA

Contents

Chapter 1

Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About AutoCAD Plant 3D Help . . . . . . . . . . . P&ID Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.) . JIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

.1 .4 .4 .4 .5 .5 .6

Create and Configure a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Overview: Create and Configure the Working Environment . . . . . . . 7 Set Up a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Configure General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Set or Change Project Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configure Drawing Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Configure Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Configure AutoCAD P&ID DWG Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Configure End Connections and Line Behavior . . . . . . . . . . 33 Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID) . . . . . . . . . 40 Set P&ID Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) . . . . 53 Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines . . . . . . . . 57 Set Up Symbol and Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

iii

Set Up Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Set Up Tag Formatting (P&ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Set Up Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Set Up Off-Page Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Configure Plant 3D DWG Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D) . . . . . . . 140 Set Plant 3D Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Set Up File Names and File Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Configure the Display of Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Configure the Display of Isometric Sloped Lines . . . . . . 160 Set Up Isometric Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Configure the Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments . . . . . . . 171 Configure Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties . . . . . . . . . . 182 Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Set Up Properties (Plant 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Set Up Tag Formatting (Plant 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Set Up Annotations for Orthographic Drawings . . . . . . 231 Point Users to the Project Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Chapter 3

Organize Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Overview: Organize Project Drawings . . . . . . Set Up the Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Include Referenced Drawings (Xrefs) . . . Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders . Organize Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . Set Drawing Properties . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 239 . 241 . 241 . 242 . 243 . 246 . 249

Work in a Project Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Overview: The Project Environment . . . Work with Project Drawings . . . . . . . . Open a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . Get Ready to Design . . . . . . . . . Add Project Data to a Drawing . . . Add Status Notes About a Drawing . Save Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Work History Tracking . . . . . . Manage Project Files Remotely . . . . . . Share Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . Audit and Compress Projects . . . . . . .

iv | Contents

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 253 . 253 . 253 . 254 . 255 . 258 . 260 . 261 . 263 . 264 . 271

Chapter 5

Understand the Drawing Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 AutoCAD Plant 3D Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with the AutoCAD Plant 3D Workspaces . Switch Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Spec Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Quick Properties . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Substitution Palettes . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Drawing Tooltips . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Plant 3D Application Menu and Toolbars . Understand the Work History Dialog Box . . . . . . . Understand the Assign Tag Dialog Box . . . . . . . . Control the Display of the Drawing Space . . . . . .

Chapter 6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 273 . 273 . 274 . 275 . 279 . 280 . 282 . 283 . 284 . 285 . 286 . 286 . 287 . 288 . 289 . 290 . 292 . 293 . 293

Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Understand P&ID Components and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Create a Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Add Components to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Add Equipment to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Add Nozzles to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Add Instruments to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Add Valves, Reducers, and Other Inline Components to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Edit the Geometry of a P&ID Component While Retaining Its Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Create and Use Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Add Schematic Lines to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Connect Schematic Lines to Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Understand Schematic Line Grouping and Linking Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Define the Directional Flow of Schematic Lines . . . . . . . . . 329 Edit Schematic Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Tag Components and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Annotate Components and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&ID Components or Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Contents | v

Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Chapter 7

Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D . . . 349 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understand the P&ID Line List . . . . . . . . Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers . . . Place Valves, Fittings, and Inline Equipment . Edit Size Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Validate the 3D Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correct Validation Errors . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 349 . 350 . 351 . 354 . 357 . 359 . 362

Create and Modify a Plant 3D Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Chapter 8

Create and Modify Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Create Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Equipment From Parametric Patterns . . . . . . . Create User-Fabricated Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D Equipment . Modify Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position and Manipulate Equipment in a Drawing . . . . . . . Reorient Equipment in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach Graphics to Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detach Graphics from Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create and Modify Equipment Reserve Space . . . . . . .

Chapter 9

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 369 . 369 . 375 . 383 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 389 . 389 . 390 . 391

Create and Modify Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Understand Structural Modeling in AutoCAD Plant 3D . Set the Structural Model Representation . . . . . . . . . Work With Structural Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Member Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Length of a Structural Member . . . . . Cut a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miter Two Structural Members Together . . . . . . Trim or Extend a Structural Member . . . . . . . . Edge Cut a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Structural Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

vi | Contents

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 393 . 393 . 395 . 397 . 398 . 400 . 401 . 403 . 404 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 412 . 413 . 413 . 417 . 420

Explode Structural Trim Objects . Work with Footings . . . . . . . . . . Work with Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Structural Objects to SDNF . . .

Chapter 10

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 424 . 425 . 427 . 428

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 431 . 433 . 437 . 444 . 455 . 456 . 461 . 465 . 466 . 466 . 471 . 474 . 478 . 479 . 480 . 482

Create and Modify Pipe Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Add Pipe Supports . . . . . . . . . Modify Pipe Support Dimensions . Edit Pipe Supports . . . . . . . . . Create Custom Supports . . . . . . Work with Sloped Piping . . . . .

Chapter 12

. . . .

Create and Modify Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Select a Pipe Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Line Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route pipe at a slope . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock Pipe Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Pipe Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Custom and Placeholder Parts . . . . . . Assign Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insulate Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with External Reference (Xref) Drawings . Copy Plant 3D objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11

. . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 485 . 489 . 490 . 491 . 493

Control the Plant 3D Model Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Control the Visual Style of the Plant 3D Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Set Visibility of Plant 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Chapter 13

Manage Data and Generate Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Work with the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom To and Scroll To Plant 3D Objects . . . . . . . Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager . . . . . . . Place Annotations in a P&ID Drawing from the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager . . . . . . . Control the Display of the Tree View . . . . . . Filter Information in the Data Table . . . . . . . Sort Records in the Data Table . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . 499 . . . . . . 504 . . . . . . 507 . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 510 . 511 . 511 . 512 . 516

Contents | vii

Control the Display of Columns in the Data Table . View Read-Only Data and Property Acquisition Data . . . Print Data from the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . Export and Import Data in the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . Export Data from the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . Export To Piping Component Format (PCF) . . . . . . . Modify Exported Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Data to the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate Reports in the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Data in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reconcile Changes To Imported Reports . . . . . . . . . View Report Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 14

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 517 . 520 . 521 . 522 . 522 . 527 . 528 . 529 . 534 . 536 . 537 . 541 . 545 . 547 . 548

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 551 . 552 . 552 . 554 . 555 . 556 . 558 . 559

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 561 . 562 . 568 . 569 . 572

Migrate Projects and Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Overview: Migrate Projects and Drawings . Verify Projects and Drawings . . . . . . . Migrate Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrate Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolve Migration Failure . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Generate Orthographic Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 Overview: Generate Orthographic Drawings . . . . Create an Orthographic Drawing . . . . . . . . . . Link or Copy Orthographic Drawings to a Project . Annotate an Orthographic Drawing . . . . . . . . . Add Dimensions to an Orthographic Drawing . . .

Chapter 16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Generate Isometric Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Understand Isometric Types . . . . . . . . . . . Create Isogen Messages and Information Items . Create an Isogen Message . . . . . . . . . Create an Isogen Information Item . . . . Generate a Quick Isometric Drawing . . . . . . Generate a Production Isometric Drawing . . . Review Isometric Results Details . . . . . . . . . Export a Piping Component File (PCF) . . . . .

Chapter 15

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 575 . 576 . 576 . 582 . 587

Validate P&ID Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Overview: Validate P&ID Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Validate Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Correct Validation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

viii | Contents

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Contents | ix

x

Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D

1

AutoCAD® Plant 3D supports a wide range of process plant and piping design tasks. You can create both P&ID drawings and 3D models for piping, equipment, and structure. Orthographic drawings can be produced from your model. You work exclusively in a project environment, so that your drafting is consistent with others working in the same project. You can also create reports for a single drawing or an entire project. If you are an administrator, you can configure a custom drafting environment that is exactly right for your organization and your designers.

About AutoCAD Plant 3D Help The AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 Help system is organized to make information easy to locate when you need it. Help is available when you press the F1 key or click the Help button in a dialog box. Once the Help system is displayed, you can locate the topics you need in several ways. Use the method or combination of methods that gets you the information to help you accomplish tasks in the program. Following are a variety of ways for making best use of the Help system.

Find Information Using the Landing Page When you open the Help system, the landing page on the right side displays information that is organized by task. Simply click a link and go directly to a Help topic for the task.

1

Find Information Using the Contents Tab You can also use the Contents tab to find information that is structured in logical groupings — just like the Table of Contents in a printed book. The Contents tab contains the following sections: ■

AutoCAD P&ID Best Practices. Provides workflow diagrams that illustrate P&ID processes and links to help you with the specific tasks involved.

■

Migrate Projects and Drawings on page 575. Migrates projects and drawings created in earlier versions of the product to ensure data integrity with the current product release.

■

Create and Configure a Project on page 7. Provides conceptual and task-based help for administrators who want to create a custom project configuration for their designers.

■

Organize Project Drawings on page 239. Provides conceptual and task-based help for CAD managers or lead drafters who need to set up projects.

■

Work in a Project Environment on page 253. Provides conceptual and task-based help for designers who may be new to working in an organized project environment.

■

Understand the Drawing Environment on page 273. Provides conceptual help for designers to familiarize them with the drawing environment and introduce new interface elements to make designing easier and more efficient.

■

Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing on page 297. Provides conceptual and task-based help for designers who primarily use symbols and schematic lines to create their P&ID drawings.

■

Validate P&ID Drawings on page 591. Provides conceptual and task-based help for drafters and designers who work with drawings and want to manage and maintain the validity of their drawings while they work.

■

Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D on page 349. Provides conceptual and task-based help for designers who want to place P&ID objects into Plant 3D models.

■

Create and Modify a Plant 3D Model on page 367. Provides conceptual and task-based help for designers who create 3D models of piping symbols.

■

Manage Data and Generate Reports on page 499. Provides conceptual and task-based help for designers about managing data and producing reports for an entire project or for individual project drawings.

2 | Chapter 1 Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D

■

Generate Orthographic Drawings on page 561. Provides conceptual and task-based help for designers who want to produce orthographic drawings from Plant 3D models.

■

Glossary on page 605. Provides a list of AutoCAD Plant 3D terms and their definitions.

■

Command and Interface Reference. Provides help on commands and system variables for those who like to use the command line; also provides detailed descriptions about the dialog boxes, windows, tool palettes, and workspaces that make up the AutoCAD Plant 3D environment.

Find Information Using the Search Tab Another way of accessing information is by using the Search tab. This option zeros in on the exact subject you are trying to find information about.

Find Information Using InfoCenter On the menu bar, InfoCenter allows you to search for information through key words (or by typing a question), display the Communication Center panel for product updates and announcements, or display the Favorites panel to access saved topics. When you enter key words or type a question for help and then press ENTER or click the Search button, you search multiple Help resources in addition to any files that have been specified in the InfoCenter Settings dialog box. The results are displayed as links on a panel. You can click any of these links to display the Help topic, article, or document. NOTE It is recommended that you use key words to search for information, as key words often produce better results. For more information about InfoCenter, see Find Information Using InfoCenterFind Information Using InfoCenter in the AutoCAD Help system.

Provide Feedback About Help We strive to make our Help system an easy and efficient way for you to find the information you need to do your P&ID tasks. We work to improve our Help system by reviewing and considering all comments that we receive from users. If you have questions about any topic in the Help system or have ideas about improving a topic, you can provide us with feedback from within the Help

About AutoCAD Plant 3D Help | 3

system. Simply click “Please send us your comment about this page” at the bottom of every help topic, and complete the feedback form. While we cannot respond to all comments we receive, we do seriously consider your comments and improve our Help system based on your feedback.

P&ID Symbols The symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under license from PIP (Process Industry Practices), ISA, ISO (International Organization for Standardization), and DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.).

PIP The PIP symbols in this Autodesk product are used with permission granted by license agreement from Process Industry Practices (PIP). Process Industry Practices (PIP) 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500) Austin, TX 78759, USA Phone: (512) 232-3042 www.pip.org

ISA The ISA symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under license from ISA. ISA 67 Alexander Drive PO Box 12277 Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, USA Phone: (919) 549-8411 Fax: (919) 549-8288 Email: [email protected] www.isa.org

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D

ISO The ISO symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under license from The International Organization for Standardization (ISO). ISO standards can be purchased from American National Standards Institute (ANSI/ISO) ISO 25 West 43rd Street New York, NY 10036 Tel: (212) 642-4900 http://webstore.ansi.org/default.aspx ISO 10628:1997 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO 14617-5:2002 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO 14617-6:2002 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO 3511-1:1977 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO 3511-2:1984 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO 3511-3:1984 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO 3511-4: 1985 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.) The data from DIN Standards are used by permission of DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. They conform with the current version of the DIN Standards concerned. DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V., Burggrafenstraße 6, 10787 Berlin,

ISO | 5

Germany DIN 2481:1979-06 Symbols © Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. (DIN)

JIS The JIS symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under permission from JIS.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D

Create and Configure a Project

2

You use the Project Setup wizard to create a project, then configure the project setup options to meet your working environment requirements or your client needs.

Overview: Create and Configure the Working Environment The working environment is set up for ease in creating and managing drawings, models, and other related files. When you start AutoCAD Plant 3D for the first time, a default project is set as the current project. You can either modify this project or create a new one, depending on your requirements. Both the default project and any new projects that you create include standard setting for paths, drawings, Data Manager configuration, and so on. These default settings are often appropriate for most tasks throughout a project cycle. However, you can configure these settings to make them specific to the needs of your organization or your client. You can configure your drawing environment in the Project Setup dialog box. NOTE It is strongly recommended that you avoid changing the project setup while others are using the project. Any changes you make will be visible only after users close and open the project again.

Set Up a New Project You can create a project and then change the project settings.

7

You can specify basic settings as you create a project with the Project Setup wizard. You need the following information to complete all pages of the wizard: Page

Information required

Page 1 of 5 Specify general settings

■

The project name

■

The project description (optional)

■

The directory where you want to store the program-generated files

NOTE The program creates default directories based on the project name. ■

The directory where you want to store related files, files such as basic AutoCAD files, spreadsheets, and wordprocessing documents.

■

The location of an existing project XML file that you want to use as a template (optional).

NOTE If you choose this option, your new project inherits the folder structure of the existing project. If Project A contains a folder named Ortho Files, Project B, which is based on Project A, also has a folder named Ortho Files. Page 2 of 5 Specify unit settings

The base unit for project drawing: either Imperial or Metric. NOTE If you choose Metric, you can choose to have nominal diameters shown in either inches or millimeters.

Page 3 of 5 Specify P&ID settings

8 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

■

The directory where you want to store P&ID drawings (required even for projects without P&ID drawings)

■

The standard (for example: PIP, ISA, ISO, DIN, JIS/ISO) for P&ID tool palette content (required even for projects

Page

Information required without P&ID drawings). The standards shown depend upon whether you chose Metric or Imperial on the previous page.

Page 4 of 5 Specify Plant 3D directory settings

Page 5 of 5 Finish

Path information for the following: ■

3D model files

■

Spec sheets

■

Orthographic drawings

Whether you want to edit additional project settings.

To set up a new project 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ New Project. 2 Complete the Project Setup wizard. 3 If you want to change the default project settings, select the check box labeled Edit Project Properties After Creating Project. 4 Click Finish. You now have a new working project. You can change the default project setup options using the Project Setup dialog box. Use the tree nodes on the left pane of the Project Setup dialog box to locate the options you want to change. Modify the information displayed on the right pane. For more information, see Configure General Settings on page 10. NOTE It is strongly recommended that you set security measures to prevent users from accessing or changing certain project folders or files. Using Microsoft security settings, you can lock the project files that you do not want users to modify. For more information about Windows security settings, see Windows Help.

Set Up a New Project | 9

To open a project 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Open Project. 2 In the Open dialog box, browse to the location of the project, and click the project.xml file. 3 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands NEWPROJECT OPENPROJECT PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box

Configure General Settings You can configure general settings, including project details, drawing properties, and reports. NOTE Your administrator can lock project files to prevent changes to project-specific settings and options.

Set or Change Project Details You can change details of the default project settings.

10 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

You can perform any of the following tasks: ■

Specify or create additional project properties.

■

Configure work history prompts.

■

Specify path and file location for project reports.

■

Specify path and file location for related files.

■

Associate a tool palette group with the project. This setting specifies the tool palette group that displays by default for all designers when the project is opened. You can set two separate tool palette group associations: one for opening the project in AutoCAD P&ID, and another for opening the project in AutoCAD Plant 3D.

■

Change the Data Manager interactive zoom factor.

To add a new property to the existing set of project details 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Project Details.

Set or Change Project Details | 11

3 On the Project Details pane, under General Properties, do any of the following: ■

In the Project Description box, add or change the project description.

■

In the Project Number box, add a project number.

NOTE The Project Name was set when the project was created. You cannot edit this name. 4 Under Custom Properties, in the Custom Categories list, click Project Data. 5 Click Add Row.

12 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

6 In the Add Row dialog box, enter a name (for example: Lead designer) and a value (for example: Rich Robins) for the new property. 7 Click OK. 8 Click OK. To add a new category of project details 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Project Details. 3 On the Project Details pane, under General Properties, do any of the following: ■

In the Project Description box, add or change the project description.

■

In the Project Number box, add a project number.

NOTE The Project Name is set when the project is created. You cannot edit this name here.

4 Under Custom Properties, click Add.

5 In the Add Category dialog box, enter a name for the new category (for example: Other Information). Click OK.

Set or Change Project Details | 13

6 Under Properties Of Selected Category, click Add Row. 7 In the Add Row dialog box, enter a name (for example: Project Manager) and a value (for example: A. Taylor) for the new property. Click OK.

8 Continue adding properties as necessary (for example: PM Phone, 415-555-1212 and Process Lead, D. Quinn). 9 To add additional categories, click Add and repeat the steps for adding a category and its properties. 10 Click OK. To configure work history prompts 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Project Details.

14 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

3 On the Project Details pane, under Work History Prompts, click one of the following options to specify when designers must enter work history information about their drawings: ■

Opening Project Drawings

■

Closing Project Drawings

■

Never

To configure general paths and file locations 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Project Details.

3 Under General Paths and File Locations, do the following: ■

In the User-defined Reports Directory box, enter the file path for the reports directory. Or click the [...] button, and in the Select Reports Directory dialog box, browse to the location where you want to place the reports directory.

■

In the Related Files Directory box, enter the file path for the related files directory. Or click the [...] button, and in the Select Related Files Directory dialog box, browse to the location where you want to place the related files directory.

4 Click OK. To configure tool palette group association 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Project Details.

Set or Change Project Details | 15

3 Under Tool Palette Group Association, in the drop-down lists, click tool palette groups to display when a project is opened. 4 Click OK. NOTE If the name of a tool palette group is displayed in red, the tool palette group exists but is not available on your system. You can make the group available by importing it. See Save and Share Tool Palettes in AutoCAD Help. For information on how to customize and share tool palette groups, see Customize Tool Palettes and Save and Share Tool Palettes in AutoCAD Help. To configure the Data Manager interactive zoom factor 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Project Details. 3 Under Interactive zoom, in the box labeled Data Manager Interactive Zoom Factor, enter a number between 0.0 and 1.0 to set the zoom factor when designers zoom to a component from the Data Manager.

16 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Project Details (General Settings Tree Node)

Configure Drawing Properties You can configure drawing properties so that each drawing added to the project has the same properties available. You can change the property value for individual P&ID or modeling drawings. To add a new category of drawing properties 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Drawing Properties.

Configure Drawing Properties | 17

3 On the Drawing Properties pane, under Custom, click Add.

4 In the Add Category dialog box, enter a name for the new category (for example: Additional Information). Click OK. 5 Click Add Row.

18 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

6 In the Add Row dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Name, enter a name for the property (for example: Project Name).

■

Under Description, enter a description (for example: The project to which this drawing belongs).

■

Click OK.

7 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Properties. In the Drawing Properties dialog box, the properties that you added are displayed. If necessary, use the scroll bar to display the properties.

8 Click OK.

Configure Drawing Properties | 19

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Drawing Properties (General Settings Tree Node)

Configure Report Settings AutoCAD Plant 3D provides several report templates for viewing, printing, exporting, and importing reports. You can export and import report data to and from Microsoft Excel spreadsheets (XLS/XLSX) or comma-separated value (CSV) files. You can create new report types based on existing report templates. The templates include: ■

Equipment List

■

Line List

■

Line Summary List

■

Instrument List

■

Valve List

■

Nozzle List

■

Control Valve List

■

Document Registry

20 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

To configure report settings, specify a report type, and then set the class, project, or drawing properties within that report type. The properties you specify are queried. The Data Manager displays the query results.

Setting Up Reports Containing Plant 3D Data The existing report templates contain P&ID classes and properties. You can create Plant 3D templates for the following report types: ■

Equipment List

■

Line Summary List

■

Nozzle List

■

Valve List

You add 3D data to these templates by following the procedure to configure a new report based on an existing report and selecting Plant 3D classes. NOTE If you modify one of these reports, the Plant 3D data is included in the report only if a corresponding P&ID object with an identical tag exists in the project. To configure a new report based on an existing report (without replacing the associated tables) 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Reports. 3 On the Project Reports pane, in the Defined Reports, click a report you want to use as the template for a new report (for example: Equipment List). Click New.

Configure Report Settings | 21

4 In the New Report dialog box, under New Report Name, enter a name (for example: New Equipment List). Click Continue.

22 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

NOTE The name you enter in the New Report Name box is displayed as the title of the subsequent dialog box.

5 In the [New Report Name] dialog box, in the Select Properties To Include tree view, expand the class definition whose properties you want to configure (for example: Equipment). NOTE If you are creating a Plant 3D report template, you can specify Plant 3D object or drawing properties and order them. 6 Click the properties you want queried in the new report. The properties you specify are displayed in the Data Manager, in the Project Reports view. 7 On the Property Order pane, in the Fields list, click a field to move. Use the Up or Down arrows to rearrange the order in which the fields are displayed in the Data Manager. The top-to-bottom order in the Fields list is displayed left-to-right in the Data Manager. 8 Repeat steps 6-7 for each of the available fields that you want reported. 9 Click OK.

Configure Report Settings | 23

To configure a new report based on an existing report (replace the associated tables) 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Project Reports. 3 On the Project Reports pane, click a report on which to base the new report (for example: Equipment List). Click New.

4 In the New Report dialog box, enter a name for the new report (for example: New Equipment List).

24 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 To replace the family tables, do the following: ■

Click Replace Table(s).

■

In the Replace dialog box, select the check box next to the tables you want to replace (for example: select the Equipment check box).

■

In the drop-down list, click a replacement class table. Click Continue.

■

On the Create Report Template dialog box, click Continue.

NOTE The name you entered in the New Report Name box on the New Report dialog box is displayed as the title of the subsequent dialog box.

Configure Report Settings | 25

6 In the [New Report Name] dialog box, in the Report Properties pane, in the Select Properties To Include tree view, expand the class definition whose fields you want to configure (for example: Equipment). NOTE If you are creating a Plant 3D report template, you can specify Plant 3D object or drawing properties and order them appropriately. The Plant 3D data is included in the report only if a corresponding P&ID object with an identical tag exists in the project. 7 Click the properties you want queried in the new report. 8 On the Priority Order pane, in the Fields list, click a field whose location you want to change. Use the Up or Down arrows to rearrange the order in which the fields are displayed in the Data Manager. The top-to-bottom order in the Fields list is displayed left-to-right in the Data Manager. 9 Repeat steps 7-8 for each of the available properties that you want reported. 10 Click OK. To modify an existing report 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Project Reports. 3 On the Project Reports pane, under Defined Reports, click the report you want to modify. Click Modify.

26 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

4 In the Modify Report dialog box, in the Select Properties To Include tree view, expand the class definition whose fields you want to configure (for example: Equipment). NOTE If you are creating a Plant 3D report template, you can specify Plant 3D object or drawing properties and order them appropriately.

Configure Report Settings | 27

5 Click the properties you want queried in the report. 6 On the Priority Order pane, in the Fields list, click a field whose location you want to change. Use the Up or Down arrows to rearrange the order in which the fields are displayed in the Data Manager. The top-to-bottom order in the Fields list is displayed left-to-right in the Data Manager. 7 Repeat steps 5-6 for each of the available fields that you want reported. 8 Click OK. To preview, sort, and filter a report 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Project Reports. 3 On the Project Reports pane, under Defined Reports, click the report you want to preview.

28 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

4 In the Report Preview data view, do any of the following: ■

To sort the data, click a column header to change the sort order.

■

To view only items with the same value as the selection, right-click a cell that contains the value by which you want to search. Click Filter By Selection.

■

To view all the selected items, right-click a cell that contains the value you want to exclude from the filtered view and click Filter Excluding Selection.

■

To filter for field values and ranges of values, right-click a cell for the property where you want to set a filter. Click the Filter For Field. In the Filter For Field box, enter a value and press ENTER. Among the conditions you can use are the following:

Configure Report Settings | 29

NOTE Surround a string entry with single quotation marks (‘). Entries are case sensitive.

■

Conditions (can be used cumulatively)

Purpose

Examples

Angle brackets (< >)

to display values not equal to your entry

■

‘700’ displays only rows with cells containing strings other than 700

■

‘’ displays rows with cell data not equal to an empty string, thus eliminating rows with empty cells

Asterisk (*)

to display any value in its place

Like ‘*SCH40* displays all fields continuing the text “SCH 40” regardless of the characters that come before or after the specified string

Equal signs (=)

to display values that match your entry

= ‘Bosch’ displays only cells containing the string Bosch

IS NULL

to display only empty cells

Displays only rows with empty cells

IS NOT NULL

to exclude empty cells

Displays only rows with data

Question marks (?)

to display any single character in its place

LIKE ‘SCH?0’ displays SCH20, SCH30, SCH40, and so on

To remove all filters, right-click a cell and click Remove Filter.

5 In the Report Preview data view, do any of the following: ■

To sort the data, click a column header to change the sort order.

30 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

■

To view only items with the same value as the selection, right-click a cell that contains the value by which you want to search. Click Filter By Selection.

■

To view all the selected items, right-click a cell that contains the value you want to exclude from the filtered view and click Filter Excluding Selection.

■

To filter for field values and ranges of values, right-click a cell for the property where you want to set a filter. Click the Filter For Field. In the Filter For Field box, enter a value and press ENTER. You can use the following conditions cumulatively: Conditions

Purpose

Examples

Angle brackets (< >)

to display values not equal to your entry

■

‘700’ displays only rows with cells containing strings other than 700

■

‘’ displays rows with cell data not equal to an empty string, thus eliminating rows with empty cells

Asterisk (*)

to display any value in its place

Like ‘*SCH40* displays all fields continuing the text “SCH 40” regardless of the characters that come before or after the specified string

Equal signs (=)

to display values that match your entry

= ‘Bosch’ displays only cells containing the string Bosch

IS NULL

to display only empty cells

Displays only rows with empty cells

IS NOT NULL

to exclude empty cells

Displays only rows with data

Configure Report Settings | 31

■

Conditions

Purpose

Examples

Question mark (?)

to display any single character in its place

LIKE ‘SCH?0’ displays SCH20, SCH30, SCH40, and so on

To remove all filters, right-click a cell and click Remove Filter.

6 Do either of the following: ■

To save the filtered or sorted view into a report template to be displayed in the Data Manager, click Save.

■

To restore the default view, click Reset.

7 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Reports (General Settings Tree Node)

Configure AutoCAD P&ID DWG Settings As part of your AutoCAD P&ID DWG setup, you can configure certain behaviors to which all designers using this project adhere.

32 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Configure End Connections and Line Behavior You can assign an end connection to a valve or an inline instrument. You can also assign an end connection after a valve or inline instrument is placed in a drawing. If the symbol for an end connection changes, the change is displayed in the drawing.

Understanding End Connections You can delete an end connection, but only if the end connection is not currently assigned to a valve or inline instrument. If an end connection is assigned to an object when it is deleted, the graphical representation of the end connection is removed from the drawing. The value assigned to the End Connection property of the valve or inline instrument is removed. NOTE The four default end connections, Flanged, Socket Welded, Unspecified, and Welded, cannot be deleted. End connections display the type of connection (flanged, socket welded, or welded) for a valve or inline instrument in an AutoCAD P&ID drawing. The type of connection is tracked as a property. End connections inherit their graphical properties (such as layer, color, and line weight) from the valve or inline instrument with which they are inserted. You can configure settings that control how lines display when they cross each other and the behavior of grips for a selected schematic line. Drawing behaviors you can configure include: ■

End connection behavior for valves and inline instruments

■

Display style of crossing lines

■

Behavior of a gap symbol and scale

■

Standoff distance between a line and a component

■

Orthogonal and implied cornering behavior of schematic lines

■

Display behavior of vertex grips

■

Connection behavior of inline components when the component moves

To define a new end connection 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup.

Configure End Connections and Line Behavior | 33

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click End Connections.

3 On the End Connections pane, click Add Block. 4 In the New End Connection dialog box, under End Connection Name, enter a name for the new end connection.

5 Click Browse.

34 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

6 In the Select Block Drawing dialog box, locate and click a drawing that contains the block you want to use for the end connection symbol. Click Open. 7 In the Select Block dialog box, in the Available Blocks list, click a block to use for the end connection. The Preview pane displays a preview image of the block you selected.

8 Click OK. 9 In the New End Connection dialog box, click OK. 10 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. To modify a block used for an end connection 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click End Connections. 3 On the End Connections pane, in the drop-down list, click an end connection to modify.

Configure End Connections and Line Behavior | 35

4 Click Edit Block. 5 In the Block Editor, edit the block representing the selected end connection. NOTE If you are not familiar with editing a block, see “Use the Block Editor” in the AutoCAD Help system. 6 When you are finished modifying the end connection block, click Close on the Block Editor. The changes you made to the block are saved in projSymbolStyle.dwg. 7 Click OK. To remove an end connection When you remove an end connection block, you also delete the end connection from the project.

36 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

NOTE You cannot remove default end connections. 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click End Connections. 3 On the End Connections pane, in the drop-down list, click an end connection to delete.

4 Click Remove Block. 5 In the Confirm Delete message, click Yes. 6 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. To assign an end connection to a valve or inline instrument 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup.

Configure End Connections and Line Behavior | 37

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you find the valve or inline instrument to which you want to assign the end connection. 4 Select a valve or inline instrument (for example: Ball Valve).

5 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, locate EndConnections. 6 In the EndConnections Default Value property, in the drop-down list, click an end connection type.

7 Click OK. To configure line behavior 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Line Settings. 3 On the Line Settings pane, under Line Crossing Style, click Gap or Loop.

38 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

4 In the Gap/Loop Width box, enter a number to represent the amount of space, in units, between two crossing lines. (Units refers to project units, such as inches for imperial or millimeters for metric.) 5 Under Manual Gap Symbol, in the Symbol drop-down list, click a gap symbol to use to represent a gap between lines. 6 Under Standoff Distance, in the Standoff X box, enter a number to set the shortest possible distance, in units, that designers can draw between a 90-degree elbow and a piece of equipment. 7 Under Schematic Line Grips, in the Grip Settings drop-down list, click a grip behavior option. 8 To control automatic cornering behavior of orthogonal lines when they connect to a component, select the check box labeled Create Ortho Schematic Lines. If this option is selected, ORTHO is temporarily turned on when the SLINE command is used, and corner points are implied. If this option is cleared, ORTHO is turned off temporarily when a designer enters the SLINE command.

Configure End Connections and Line Behavior | 39

9 To control whether inline components are moved with schematic lines, select the check box labeled Maintain Sline Connection When Moving Assets. If this option is selected, inline components move with the schematic line to which they are connected. If this option is cleared, inline components become detached when schematic lines are moved. 10 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box End Connections (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node) Line Settings (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)

Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID) Create custom settings for export and import that include any combination of AutoCAD P&ID classes. Share AutoCAD P&ID data with other applications by mapping AutoCAD Plant 3D properties to correspond with similar properties in other programs.

Understand Export and Import Settings You can export and import data using the default Displayed Data setting. This setting exports and imports data for the active node in the Data Manager tree view, with or without child node data.

40 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

In some cases, however, you want to be more selective with the data you export and import. For example, you want to export only nozzles and valves. You can use export and import settings to create custom settings that include only the classes you choose. You can also use export and import settings to move data to and from other applications. You use external data mapping to map classes and properties to the data structure in the other application. You create export and import settings at the project level in Project Setup. You use one setting for both export and import, which simplifies the process of exporting data, externally editing the data, and importing the data back. After you create an export and import setting, you can later modify or delete it.

Export to and Import from Other Programs One common reason to create a custom export and import setting is for exporting and importing data to and from other programs. For example, you want to export data to AutoCAD Electrical. Because the two programs have different data structures, you map the classes and properties in AutoCAD Plant 3D to the classes and properties in the other program.

Set up External Data Mapping You set up external data mapping in the Export and Import Settings dialog box when creating or modifying an export and import setting. You specify the classes and properties to include and enter external class and property names. You also identify each property to be used as a unique identifier (UID) for each specified class, and map property values. A one-to-one mapping between every class and property is not required. Many Plant 3D objects can be mapped to the same external object. To achieve this mapping, enter the same external object name for all Plant 3D objects that correspond to the same objects in other applications. For example, AutoCAD Electrical uses a single table called COMP for all equipment. AutoCAD Plant 3D, however, uses numerous tables and objects to classify the various categories of equipment. While interacting with AutoCAD Electrical, you map every Equipment object to an external object called COMP. You then map every equipment property to some common properties in COMP. Export and import share common property value mappings. When you export data, the mappings transform data to a format required by the external application. When you import data, the mappings transform the external data

Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID) | 41

into a format required by AutoCAD Plant 3D. Thus mappings provide a two-way mechanism for a continuous data exchange between applications. In some cases, applications can contain erroneous or duplicate data. The import and export process uses a unique identifier (UID) to identify specific records. If the imported data contains duplicate records, the most recent records overwrite the previous records. AutoCAD Plant 3D generally prohibits duplicate records. However, if AutoCAD Plant 3D encounters duplicate records, it exports them as multiple records and the importing application coordinates them. To create export and import settings 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Export and Import Settings. 3 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click New. 4 In the New Export and Import Settings dialog box, under Name, enter a name for the export and import setting (for example: Pipe Lines and Signal Lines).

42 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 Under Description, enter a description for the setting (for example: Export only pipe lines and signal lines). 6 In the P&ID Classes tree view, expand the nodes to display the P&ID Classes you want to export and import (for example: expand Engineering Items and Lines. Select all check boxes under both Pipe Line Segments and Signal Line Segments).

Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID) | 43

7 If this setting is for exporting to and importing from another program, see “To set up external data mapping.” Otherwise, click OK. To set up external data mapping You can map property values when creating export and import settings or by modifying an existing setting. 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Export and Import Settings. 3 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click an existing setting. Click Modify. 4 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Name, enter a new name (optional).

■

Under Description, enter a new description (optional).

■

In the tree view, expand the classes and select the check box for the class you want to configure for external data mapping.

44 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

■

Under External Data Mapping, in the External Class Name box, enter a name that corresponds to similar classes in the other program. For example, if the program equates Pipes with Pipe Lines, select the Pipe Lines check box in the tree view and enter Pipes in the External Class Name box. Repeat this process for each class you want to configure for external data mapping.

Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID) | 45

■

Under Properties, in the External Property column, click the external property you want to change. Enter the new name (for example: click the ModelNumber external property and enter Model). Repeat this process for each external property you want to change.

■

To make a property a unique identifier (UID), select the UID check box corresponding to the property. PnPID is a UID by default. If the other program recognizes a different identifier, you can change this setting.

■

In the Value Mapping column, click the cell corresponding to the property you want to map. Click the [...] button.

5 In the Map Property Values dialog box, do the following: ■

In the P&ID Property column, enter the P&ID property values (for example: in the P&ID Property ModelNumber column, enter P1, P2, S1, and S2).

46 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

■

In the External Property column, enter corresponding property values for the other program (for example: enter Model, Model2, Model1, and Model2).

Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID) | 47

6 Click OK. 7 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, repeat the value mapping process for each property you want to map. When you finish mapping, click OK to close the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box. NOTE When you use this Export and Import Setting for exporting data to another program, all Pipe Line ModelNumber P&ID properties correspond with the Model properties of the other program. The P1, P2, S1, and S2 P&ID values associated with the ModelNumber P&ID properties correspond with the Model1, Model2, Model1, and Model2 values associated with the Model properties in the other program, respectively. To modify an export and import setting 1 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Export and Import Settings.

48 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

2 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click an existing setting. Click Modify.

3 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, you can: ■

Edit the name of the Export and Import Settings. For example, under Name, change Pipe Lines and Signal Lines to Pipe Lines.

■

Edit the description. For example, under Description, change Export only Pipe Lines and Signal Lines to Export only Pipe Lines.

4 In the P&ID Classes tree view, modify the P&ID Classes to export and import. For example, you can clear the check boxes for Signal Line Segments and all its child classes.

Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID) | 49

5 On the External Data Mapping pane, modify the class name in the External Class Name box, if necessary. Make other changes, as needed, to the external data mapping settings. 6 Click OK.

50 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Export and Import Settings (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)

Set P&ID Paths You can change the default locations for accessing P&ID project data (such as drawings and templates). The Paths panel includes: ■

P&ID DWG directory. Sets the location of the project drawing directory.

■

Project package. Defines the P&ID classes and properties used in a project. WARNING It is strongly recommended that you do not manually change the project package file (ProcessPower.dcfx) and reload the changed file. You can edit the file and reload it, but you do so at the risk of corrupting your project.

■

Symbols and styles. Displays (read-only) the location where symbols are stored.

■

Drawing template (DWT) file. Defines the template file that is used when new drawings in a project are created.

Set P&ID Paths | 51

NOTE It is strongly recommended that you set your project library locations and paths to a shared network location and set security measures to prevent users from accessing or changing certain project folders or files. Using Microsoft security settings, you can lock the project files that you do not want users to modify. For more information about Windows security settings, see Windows Help. To set or change the project file location 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Paths.

3 On the Paths pane, do one of the following: ■

Enter location paths for the P&ID drawing directory and the drawing template file directory.

■

Click the [...] button to the right of each box to browse to the location where you want to store the directory and file.

NOTE The other paths were set when the project was created. You cannot edit those paths here. 4 Click OK.

52 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Paths (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)

Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) You can customize the way the Data Manager displays data for P&ID projects or drawings. You can create customized views for both P&ID and 3D project and drawing data. This section describes the process for P&ID data. For 3D modeling information, see Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) on page 150. You can view data in the default class hierarchy or create new views that display the data arranged in a property-based hierarchy. When you create a Data Manager view, select the class property for each level of the hierarchy. For example, arrange a tree with Manufacturer at the top level, Model Number at the second level, and Supplier at the third level. In a KKS environment, you can base a view on a Unit, SystemCode, SystemNumber, EquipmentCode, and EquipmentNumber hierarchy. NOTE For best results, select properties for customized views from the same level of the class hierarchy. For example, select manufacturer, model number, and supplier from the Engineering Items level.

Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) | 53

To create a customized view for the Data Manager 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Data Manager Configuration. 3 On the Customized Views pane, click Create View.

4 Under A New Customized View, do the following: ■

In the Name box, enter a name for your view. This name replaces the name A New Customized View.

■

To define the scope of your view, in the Scope drop-down list, click either Project Data or Drawing Data.

■

Click New Level.

54 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 In the Select Class Property dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Class tree view, expand the appropriate node and child nodes to locate and click a class for Level 1 (for example: Engineering Items).

■

In the Properties list, click a class property (for example: Manufacturer).

■

Click OK.

6 Click New Level and repeat the previous step to add the number of levels you want in the customized view. When you finish adding levels to the customized view, in the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. NOTE For best results, select properties shared by all components to be displayed in the customized view. To delete a customized view for the Data Manager 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Data Manager Configuration.

Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) | 55

3 On the Customized Views pane, click the customized view you want to delete. Click Delete View. 4 In the Delete Customized View message, click Yes. To open a customized view in the Data Manager 1 On the ribbon, click the Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, click in the drop-down list and select a customized view.

The Data Manager tree view displays the customized data view. 3 To display relevant component details on the right pane, click a node in the tree view (for example: ModelNumber-100).

56 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference New Customized View (Data Manager Configuration) Project Setup Dialog Box

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines Class definitions specify the attributes and properties of a component or line. To create most equipment, instruments, lines, inline items, and nozzles, you start with an existing component and edit its properties. Class definitions are divided into the following four families: ■

Engineering Items. Includes equipment, nozzles, instrumentation, inline assets, and lines.

■

Non Engineering Items. Includes items that cannot be purchased, or are not counted in reports (including flow arrows, gap, actuators, connectors, annotations, line breakers, and so on).

■

Pipe Line Groups. Includes pipe lines.

■

Signal Line Groups. Includes signal lines used with instruments.

You can modify existing class definitions or create your own based on existing class definitions. For example, if your company uses a pump symbol that is not provided with the program, you can create your own customized pump symbol. When you create class definitions based on a family or parent, the new definition inherits the properties and settings of the family or parent.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 57

You can modify the following properties for class definitions: ■

Symbol or line settings. The name of the symbol or line style; the name of the block controlling the geometry that is displayed in the drawing after a component is inserted; the layer, color, linetype, linetype scale, and plot style; the lineweight of a component when it is inserted; and other settings that affect the insertion of a component or how a schematic line is drawn.

■

Properties. The values assigned to a component or line class definition to determine how it looks and behaves in a drawing, and the values that are attached to a component or line (such as default value, description, substitution, supported standards, and so on).

■

Tag format. The information that comprises a unique tag for a component or line.

■

Annotation. The text and symbol settings that annotate a component or line.

You can also create and rename class definitions, and purge any that are not used in a project drawing. To create a class definition for a component or line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definition you want to use as the basis for the new class definition.

58 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

NOTE Select a class definition that most closely represents the class definition you want to create. The node you select is used as the template for the new class definition. 4 Right-click the selected class definition. Click New.

5 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a class name and a display name (if necessary) for the new class definition. NOTE Use only letters, numbers, and underscores for class names. Limit names to 31 characters. Longer class names can cause problems during export and import. Also, do not start a class name with a number. 6 Click OK. 7 In the tree view, expand the node where the new class definition is added, and click the new class definition. 8 On the Class Settings pane, make the desired changes. 9 Click OK. To modify a class definition for a component or line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you find the purchasable item whose definition you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment ➤ Blowers ➤ Centrifugal Blower).

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 59

4 On the Class Settings pane, do either of the following. ■

If you are modifying a class definition, under Symbol, add, modify, or remove the symbols for the selected class definition.

■

If you are modifying a line definition, under Line, edit the properties for the selected line style.

5 In the Properties, do the following (as needed): ■

In the Display Name column, change the value for the Display Name property. (This information is displayed in the Data Manager.)

■

In the Default Value column, change the value for the Default Value property.

■

Add or remove custom properties as needed for the class or line definition.

■

Change the values of other properties as needed (such as tagging format, annotation style, acquisition, substitution, supported standards, graphical style name, and so on).

6 Under Tag Format, add, modify, or remove tagging formats associated with the selected class or line definition. 7 Under Annotation, add, modify, or remove annotation styles associated with the selected class or line definition.

60 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

8 Click OK. To rename a class definition for a component or line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whose definitions you want to rename (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment ➤ Blowers ➤ Centrifugal Blower).

4 NOTE You can rename only those class definitions that do not have a plus sign (+) next to them under P&ID Class Definitions. For example, you cannot rename Blowers under Equipment but you can rename Centrifugal Blower under Blowers. 5 Right-click the class definition you want to rename. Click Rename.

6 Enter the new class name for the class definition. Press ENTER. NOTE It is recommended that you use class names that are not greater than 31 characters. Longer class names can cause problems during export and import.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 61

NOTE If a class definition is used in a drawing that is part of the project, a message is displayed indicating that it cannot be renamed. 7 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box P&ID Class Definitions (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)

Set Up Symbol and Line Settings Class definitions for components and lines control their graphical display in a P&ID drawing. Class definitions for components and lines contain two types of settings and properties—graphical and non-graphical. The graphical settings and properties control how the component or line is represented in a P&ID drawing. Non-graphical properties distinguish one component or line from another. ■

For a component, you can specify the symbol and settings that control the insertion behavior of a component.

■

For a line, you can specify whether flow arrows indicate the flow direction through a pipe.

You can create class definitions for both components and lines for general graphical properties such as layers, colors, schematic line types, linetypes, and lineweights.

62 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

You can also set the tagging prompt for both components and lines to one of the following options: ■

Prompt for tag during component creation

■

Automatically assign an auto-generated tag

■

Not a tagged component

The DIN standard uses multiple lines to represent oil, air, solid fuels, and so on. If your project is based on the DIN 2481 standard, and the pipe line you want to change has multiple lines, change Smart Line Type to Mline. NOTE The Mline Smart Line Type does not support conversion of arcs to multiple lines. When converting AutoCAD lines as P&ID schematic lines, arcs remain as single lines with their existing linetype. To change the tagging prompt for components and lines 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component or line whose linetype you want to change.

4 On the Class Settings pane, do one of the following: ■

If you are modifying a component, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click the symbol you want to modify. Click Edit Symbol.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 63

■

If you are modifying a line, under Line, click Edit Line.

5 In the Settings dialog box, under General Style Properties, locate and click Tagging prompt. In the drop-down list, click one of the following options: ■

Prompt for tag during component creation

■

Automatically assign an auto-generated tag

■

Not a tagged component

6 Click OK. When designers place the component in a drawing or create a schematic line, it is displayed with the linetype you defined here. To change linetypes for components and lines 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component or line whose linetype you want to change.

4 On the Class Settings pane, do one of the following: ■

If you are modifying a component, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click the symbol you want to modify. Click Edit Symbol.

64 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

■

If you are modifying a line, under Line, click Edit Line.

5 In the Settings dialog box, under General Style Properties, locate and click Linetype. In the drop-down list, click a new linetype. NOTE If your project is based on the DIN 2481 standard, and the pipe line you want to change has multiple lines, change Smart Line Type to Mline. Then click Mline style. In the drop-down list, click a new multiline style. The DIN standard uses multiple lines to represent oil, air, solid fuels, and so on. 6 Click OK. When designers place the component in a drawing or create a schematic line, it is displayed with the linetype you defined here. To change layers and colors for components and lines 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component or line whose color or layer you want to change.

4 On the Class Settings pane, do one of the following: ■

If you are modifying a component, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click the symbol you want to modify. Click Edit Symbol.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 65

■

If you are modifying a line, under Line, click Edit Line.

5 In the Settings dialog box, under General Style Properties, locate and click Layer. In the drop-down list, click a new layer. Locate and click Color. In the drop-down list, click a new color. 6 Click OK. When designers place the component in a drawing or create a schematic line, it is displayed on the layer and in the color you defined here. To change lineweights for components and lines 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component or line whose lineweight you want to change.

4 On the Class Settings pane, do one of the following: ■

If you are modifying a component, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click the symbol you want to modify. Click Edit Symbol.

■

If you are modifying a line, under Line, click Edit Line.

5 In the Settings dialog box, under General Style Properties, locate and click Line Weight. In the drop-down list, click a new lineweight.

66 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

6 Click OK. When designers place the component in a drawing or create a schematic line, it is displayed with the line weight you defined here. To change line style for a pipe line that is represented by multiple lines (DIN standard) 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component or line whose linestyle you want to change.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Line, click Edit Line 5 In the Line Settings dialog box, do the following: ■

Under General Style Properties, locate and click Smart line type. In the drop-down list, click an Mline.

■

Under General Style Properties, locate and click Mline style. In the drop-down list, click a new multiline style.

6 Click OK. When designers place the component in a drawing or create a schematic line, it is displayed with the line style you defined here.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 67

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Symbol (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node) Line (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node) Symbol Settings Dialog Box (Symbol) Line Settings Dialog Box (Line)

Configure Symbols for Components Symbols are graphical representations of components in a P&ID drawing. You use symbols to control the insertion behavior when a component is added to a P&ID drawing. If your company uses a set of standard blocks, you can use those blocks to define the symbols assigned to a component. You can create new symbols for a component or modify existing symbols. Use the Block Editor to edit a symbol block or to define settings that control how the symbol is inserted. After you define a symbol, you can specify the default symbol that a component uses. You can also remove the symbol for a class definition. Before you remove a symbol, the program checks to see if the symbol is assigned to the class definition. If the symbol is assigned, you are notified that it cannot be removed. If a symbol is assigned to a value in a symbol list or to a component in a P&ID drawing, the value can be removed from the symbol list. Also, the value can be designated as unassigned for the property. In both cases, the visual fidelity to the component in the drawing is maintained.

68 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Scale Components Most components in AutoCAD Plant 3D are at a scale of 1:1, and are either unitless or in the unit format based on the selected standard. The scale factor for inserting a component is defined as a property of the symbol that is assigned to the component class definition. When defining the scale factor for a component, you choose whether the component is scaled uniformly. Most blocks are scaled uniformly along the X and Y axis. If, however, you want to create multiple tank components with different widths while using a single block for the different-sized tank components, you can choose not to scale uniformly.

Understand Attachment Points on Components Attachment points are snap points on a component that connect multiple components and connect a schematic line to a component. Attachment points validate that when a component is placed in a drawing, it is actually connected with schematic lines. Attachment points help to define the placement and orientation for a component. When you select a component for placement on a drawing, you place it by its block origin (0,0) by default. You can switch from the origin to an attachment point before placing the component by pressing the spacebar or ENTER key. Attachment points define directional information for components that have an upstream and downstream direction associated with them (for example: check valves). Attachment points are required to specify, label, and correctly apply end connections. They are used in components such as pumps and blowers to determine that the connections in a drawing represent the available connections on the real-world items. Inline components such as valves have attachment points that provide precise control over line connections. When you place an inline component on a schematic line, its attachment points ensure that the schematic line is properly broken. Attachment points serve as the recommended connect points for a component. If you do not use attachment points, the extents of the block determine where the line is trimmed to connect to the component. It is recommended that you use attachment points in the blocks that you create. Also, do not remove or change the order of the attachment points in the blocks that are included with AutoCAD Plant 3D.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 69

Define Attachment Points You define attachment points in a block with the Block Editor and Point parameters. Each Point parameter that you want to use as an attachment point must follow a specific labeling convention, "AttachmentPoint" + [Numeric Suffix]. For example, the first attachment point for a block would be labeled AttachmentPoint1, the second attachment point would be labeled AttachmentPoint2, and so on. If you are defining an attachment point in a block for a valve or inline instrument, also define the rotation angle of the end connection by using the labeling convention "AttachmentPoint" + [Numeric Suffix] + ":EndCode" + [Rotation Angle in Degrees]. For example, a block has a Point parameter with the label AttachmentPoint1:EndCode90 for one of its attachment points. The label AttachmentPoint1:EndCode90 indicates that it is the first attachment point for the block and that the end connection at the attachment point is rotated 90 degrees. If you do not want to use end connections with a block for a valve or inline instrument, use the labeling convention "AttachmentPoint" + [Numeric Suffix]. Node points are added to all attachment points to make drawing and connecting lines easier. To snap to an attachment point on a component, you use the Node snap. The Node snap also snaps to a point object, dimension definition point, or dimension text origin contained in a block or drawing.

Orient Attachment Points Most inline components, such as those on the Fittings and Valves tabs of the PIP tool palette, are horizontally oriented by default. Their attachment points fall on the X axis, following the flow of a horizontal line either to the left or right. Some components, however, are oriented by default along the Y axis. If you place such a component (for example: a flame arrestor) on a horizontal line, it automatically rotates to align with the line direction. When you configure symbols for components, remember the following guidelines: ■

The imaginary vector drawn from Attachment Point 1 (AP1) to Attachment Point 2 (AP2) defines the direction of the component.

■

Most components are horizontally oriented, with the vector along the X axis.

■

Some components, such as Flame Arrestors, have AP1 to AP2 along the positive Y axis. These components are vertically oriented.

70 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

■

If the vector does not follow the X or Y direction, it is ignored.

Understand Join Types The Join Type property setting for a component symbol defines whether the component can be inserted into an existing line. Join type settings also define how a line breaks when a component is inserted and whether adding the component to an existing line creates a new line group. Symbol properties for join type include the following options: ■

Endline. Typically used for components that are placed at the end of a line (for example: caps or blind flanges), or placed in a drawing before connecting lines to them. Symbols with this property setting do not insert into lines.

■

Inline. Setting for components that are regularly inserted into pipe or signal lines. Components with this join type move when the line is moved, behaving as part of the line. If the line is deleted, the component is deleted along with the line.

■

Segment Breaker. Symbols with this join type can be inserted into lines. When these components are inserted, they break a line, and the line group and line number is retained for both line segments. For example, a reducer or a relief valve can break a line so that the line have different properties on either side of the component.

■

Segment Group Breaker. Components with this join type (for example: ISO pumps, compressors, and blowers) can be inserted into a line and breaks the line into two line groups with different line numbers.

■

No Join. Does not connect with lines (for example: agitators).

To add a symbol to a component class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component or line whose symbol you want to change.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 71

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click a symbol to use as the template for the new symbol. 5 Under Symbol, click Add Symbol.

6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, click Symbol Name. Enter a new name for the symbol. 7 Under Symbol Properties, click Block. Click the [...] button.

8 In the Select Block Drawing dialog box, browse to and select the drawing that contains the block you want to use. Click Open. 9 In the Select Block dialog box, click a block in the Available Blocks list. Click OK.

72 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

10 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under General Styles Properties and Other Properties, modify the properties as needed. Click OK. 11 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. To set the default symbol for a component class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component whose default symbol you want to edit.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 73

4 On the Class Settings pane, in the Property Name column, locate GraphicalStyleName. 5 In the Default Value column, in the drop-down list, click the symbol you want to use as the default symbol when inserting the component into a P&ID drawing. 6 Click OK. To edit a symbol for a component class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component whose symbol you want to edit.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click the symbol that you want to edit. 5 Click Edit Symbol. 6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, modify the properties for the symbol. 7 Click OK.

74 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

To remove a symbol for a component definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component whose symbol you want to remove.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click the symbol that you want to remove. 5 Click Remove Symbol. If the symbol is already assigned to a class definition, a message is displayed informing you that the symbol cannot be removed. 6 Click OK. To edit the block associated to a symbol 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component whose symbol you want to edit.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 75

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click the symbol that contains the block that you want to edit. 5 Under Symbol, click Edit Block. 6 In the Block Editor, edit the geometry for the block as needed. 7 Click Close Block Editor. 8 Click OK. To set the scale factor for a component 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component whose scale factor you want to change.

76 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click the symbol whose scale factor you want to change. 5 Click Edit Symbol. 6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under Other Properties, locate and click Symbol Scale. Enter a scale factor. 7 To set prompting behavior for designers to scale a component when they insert it in a drawing, click Scale on Insert. In the drop-down list, click Yes. 8 To set scaling behavior, click Scale Mode. In the drop-down list, click either of the following: ■

Uniform scaling: Sets the component to scale proportionately both vertically and horizontally.

■

XY independent scaling: Sets the component to scale independently both vertically and horizontally, depending on which direction you move the cursor.

9 Click OK to close each dialog box. When designers place this symbol in a drawing, the symbol has the scaling behavior you defined here.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 77

To create a component and add it to the tool palette NOTE Before you start this procedure, make sure the P&ID tool palette is displayed and that the active tool palette tab is the one where you want to add the new component. For example, if you are adding a pump to the tool palette, make sure that the Equipment tab is active. 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component whose properties most closely match the component you want to create.

The component that you select is used as the template for the new component definition. 4 Right-click the selected class definition. Click New.

78 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a name for the new class definition. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Project Setup tree view, expand the list until you locate where the new class definition was added. Select the new component definition. 8 On the Class Settings pane, make the desired changes to the new definition symbol settings, properties, tag format, and annotation style. 9 Under Symbol, click Add to Tool Palette. The new class definition is added to the active tool palette. The new tool can be used just like the default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D, and is included in reports. NOTE If the tool palette is not open when you click Create Tool, the component is added to the bottom of the tab last displayed. 10 Click OK. To create a component with attachment points and add it to the tool palette The following procedure illustrates how to create a pump (an endline component) and define two attachment points (where schematic lines will snap). You can create other components using the same general steps. Not all components require attachment points (for example, tanks do not require them) unless you want to define them. NOTE Before you start this procedure, make sure the P&ID tool palette is displayed in your drawing and that the active tool palette tab is the one where you want to add the new component. For example, if you are adding a pump to the tool palette, make sure that the Equipment tab is active. 1 Create a new block (for example: a horizontal centrifugal pump) and save the drawing file. If you do not know how to create a block, see “Create and Store Blocks” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 79

2 On the ribbon, click Blocks & References tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block Editor. 3 In the Block Editor dialog box, click Current Drawing. Click OK. 4 Turn off Midpoint snaps if they are on. 5 On the Parameters tab of the Block Authoring palette, click Point Parameter, and place a parameter (for example: on the inlet of the pump).

6 Right-click the parameter. Click Properties. 7 In the Properties palette, under Property Labels, click Position Label. Enter attachmentpoint1. 8 Click a blank space in the drawing, and then press ESC on the keyboard. 9 Create another parameter (for example: at the outlet of the pump), and label it attachmentpoint2.

10 Save the changes and close the Block Editor. 11 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 12 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component whose symbol you want to edit (for example: Equipment ➤ Pumps ➤ Centrifugal Sump Pump). 13 Right-click the class definition. Click New.

80 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

NOTE Instead of creating a new class definition, you can also add a new symbol to an existing class definition. To add a new symbol to an existing class definition, see “To add a symbol to a component class definition.” 14 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a name for the new class definition (for example: horizontal centrifugal pump). 15 Click OK. 16 Expand the node where the new class definition was added, and select the new class definition. 17 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, click Add Symbol. 18 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, do the following: ■

In the Symbol Name box, enter a name for the symbol that is added to the new class definition.

■

Click Block, and then click the [...] button. Browse to the drawing you created in step 1. Click that drawing and in the Select Block dialog box, click a symbol name (block) in the list. Click OK.

■

(Optional) Make other changes to the settings of the component you created.

■

Click OK.

19 On the Class Settings pane, change the properties, tag format, and annotation style for the new class definition. 20 Under Symbol, click Add to Tool Palette. The new component is added to the active tool palette. The new tool can be used like the default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D. It is also included in reports.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 81

NOTE If the tool palette is not open when you click Create Tool, the component is added to the bottom of the palette tab that was last displayed. You can move it by dragging and placing it in a new location in the palette. You can also copy or cut it and paste it to another P&ID tool palette. 21 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Symbol (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node) Line (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Configure the Appearance of Lines You can set up the arrow and flag behavior of lines. You set up whether a flow arrow is displayed when a line is added to a drawing, the type of flow arrow symbol displayed, and whether to prompt for the insertion of a flag. To set up line arrow behavior 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions.

82 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the line style whose line arrow behavior you want to set (for example: Equipment ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe Line Segments ➤ Primary Line Segment).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Line, click Edit Line. 5 In the Line Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, click Flow Arrow Style. In the drop-down list, click a symbol in the list. Click OK. 6 Click OK. To set up automatic prompting for flag insertion (DIN standard only) 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the line style whose line behavior you want to set (for example: Equipment ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe Line Segments ➤ Primary Line Segment).

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 83

4 In the Class Settings pane, under Line, click Edit Line. 5 In the Line Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, click Flag Prompt. In the drop-down list, click Automatically Prompt to Insert Flag. Click OK. 6 Click OK. To add a flow arrow symbol 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click Flow Arrow (for example: Non-Engineering Items ➤ Flow Arrow). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, click Add Symbol. 5 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, Symbol Properties, locate and click Symbol Name. Enter a new name for the symbol. 6 Under Symbol Properties, locate and click Block. Click the [...] button. 7 In the Select Block Drawing dialog box, browse to and click the drawing that contains the block you want to use. Click Open. NOTE You cannot use a drawing file as a block for the symbol. The block you want to use must be in the drawing file that you select.

84 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

8 In the Select Block dialog box, under Available Blocks, select a block. Click OK. 9 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under General Styles Properties and Other Properties, change the properties as needed. Click OK. To create a line and add it to the tool palette NOTE make sure the P&ID tool palette is displayed in your drawing and that the active tool palette tab is the one where you want to add the new line. 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you find Pipe Line Segments or Signal Line Segments (Engineering Items ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe Line Segments or Signal Line Segments). 4 Right-click either Pipe Line Segments or Signal Line Segments. Click New. 5 In the Create Class Definition dialog box, enter a name for the new line definition. NOTE You can create a line class definition under Pipe Line Segments or Signal Line Segments only. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Project Setup tree view, expand the tree until you reach the new line class definition, and click it. 8 On the Class Settings pane, change the settings, properties, tag format, and annotation style for the new line class definition. 9 Under Line, click Add to Tool Palette. The new line class definition is added to the active tool palette. It can be used just like the default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D, and is included in reports. NOTE If the tool palette is not open when you click Create Tool, the component is still added to the bottom of the last-active tool palette. 10 Click OK.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 85

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Symbol (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node) Line (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Properties Properties store information about a component or line that is in a P&ID drawing. Both components and lines have properties that control how the component and line look when placed into a P&ID drawing. Properties also store non-graphical information that can be extracted from the drawing. Properties for a component or line class definition can be defined as one of the following data types: ■

String. Permits a free-form text value for a property.

■

Numeric. Verifies that only a positive or negative number is entered for a property.

■

Boolean. Permits a choice between true and false.

■

Symbol List. (unavailable for Plant 3D objects) Defines a list of choices that control the symbol for a component in a P&ID drawing. This option is available only for P&ID objects when more than one symbol is associated with a class.

■

Selection List. Defines a list of property values. If a value is not displayed in the predefined list, it can be entered as free-form text.

86 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

■

Acquisition. Defines a rule stating that a component property acquires its value from another property. For example, a rule states that a hand valve acquires its size from the corresponding property of a line. The source can be chosen from class, project, or drawing properties. NOTE When you set up properties for a project, make sure no one else is accessing that project. If others are working in the project, your changes are not saved.

To add a property to a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definition whose property you want to add.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 87

5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property. The name cannot contain any spaces.

■

Under Display Name, enter the name you want to be displayed for the new property when using the Data Manager or Properties palette.

■

Under Choose a Type, select one of the available data types.

6 Click OK. If you selected Selection List or Symbol List, the appropriate dialog box is displayed to let you create either a selection list or symbol list. If you selected Acquisition, the Select Data Source dialog box is displayed, where you select the source from which the property value is acquired. 7 Click OK. To modify a property for a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definition whose property you want to edit.

88 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate and click the property you want to edit. Do one of the following: ■

Under Property Description, click the box and enter a new description.

■

Under Default Value, either click the box and enter a new value or, in the drop-down list, click a value. If the default value is Acquisition, in the drop-down list, click an appropriate item.

■

If the property type is List, click Edit to change the selection or symbol list that is assigned to the property.

■

Under Acquisition, click the [...] button and select Add acquisition rule. In the Select Data Source dialog box, select the source where the property value is acquired.

NOTE To change the name of the property or its type, delete the property and then add it again. 5 Click OK. To delete a property from a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definition whose property you want to delete.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 89

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate and click the property you want to delete. Click Remove. 5 In the Confirm Delete message, click Yes. 6 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Properties (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Property Acquisition (P&ID) When you select Acquisition as a property type, you set up a rule stating that the property acquires its value from another property. The acquisition source can be another class, project, or drawing property. Acquisition ensures consistency among component property values. If the source value changes, all components set to acquire that value change as well. Property acquisition is also useful for maintaining consistent tagging. When you change a source value, tag formats that are based on acquired properties update automatically throughout the project.

Understand Property Acquisition Rules You can select without restriction any drawing property or project property as the source of an acquisition rule. When you select a class property as the source, however, make sure that the acquiring class and the source class are connected.

90 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

For example, a valve can acquire a size value from a line because the two are connected in a relationship. A tank and a furnace, however, have no direct relationship to one another, so you cannot set up an acquisition rule between them. You can set up property acquisition rules when the following relationships exist: ■

Line and inline asset

■

Line and start asset

■

Line and end asset

■

Line and arrow

■

Annotated and annotation

■

Line and break

■

Line and page connector

■

Line and nozzle

■

Pipe line group and pipe line

■

Signal line group and signal line

■

Pipe line group and signal line group (if you manually associated the groups using SLGROUPEDIT). See Understand Acquisition Between Signal Line Groups and Pipe Line Groups on page 93.

■

Connector and connector

■

Asset and non-engineering (only between a control valve and its actuator)

The following properties have acquisition rules set by default. You can view them when you create a new project: Acquisition Property

Source Property

HandValves.Size

PipeLines.Size

HandValves.Spec

PipeLines.Spec

InLineInstruments.Size

PipeLines.Size

PipingSpecialtyItems.Size

PipeLines.Size

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 91

Acquisition Property

Source Property

PipingSpecialtyItems.Spec

PipeLines.Spec

PipingFittings.Size

PipeLines.Size

PipingFittings.Spec

PipeLines.Spec

Understand Acquire Mode and Override Mode A property that is set to acquire its value from another property is in Acquire mode. However, you can switch this property into Override mode and edit the value manually. Once a property is in Override mode, its value is no longer acquired from another source. In the program, an icon next to the property indicates whether the property is in Override mode or Acquire mode. The icons appear in the Properties palette, the Data Manager, and the Assign Tag dialog box. When the Override icon is displayed, you can edit the value.

■

The property is in Acquire mode.

■

The property is in Override mode

Understand Initialization Only Select Acquisition (the default) to set up a property to acquire its value from another property. You can also specify Initialization Only, which sets the acquisition to occur only once (when the component is first initialized). After initialization, the property switches to Override mode. When the property is in Override mode, you can edit the value manually because it is no longer acquired from another source.

Copy or Move Components with Acquired Properties Between Pipe Lines When you set up a component property to acquire its value from another property and then copy or move that valve onto another line, the valve acquires the property value from the new line. However, if the valve property you are moving is in Override mode, the specific value accompanies the valve.

92 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Understand Acquisition from Multiple Sources Many Acquisition relationships are simple one-to-one relationships. For example, a gate valve has a one-to-one relationship with a pipe line and acquires its size and spec from that line. However, a component can have multiple acquisition sources. If these sources have identical values or some identical values along with others that are unspecified, a value can be acquired. Only when the sources have conflicting values is the acquisition impossible. A question mark is displayed in place of the acquired value. For example, a three-way valve has a direct relationship with three different pipe line segments. In such cases, as long as the different sources either have the same spec value (for example: PVC) or the same value in combination with blank values, the valve acquires the value. If the pipe line segments have different specs, a question mark is displayed in the valve Spec field.

Understand Acquisition Between Signal Line Groups and Pipe Line Groups By associating a signal line group with a pipe line group, you can set up the signal line group to acquire any of that pipe line group properties. You manually associate the groups using SLGROUPEDIT. Although a pipe line group can be associated with many signal line groups, a signal line group can be associated with only one pipe line group. Once an association is established, the following capabilities are available: ■

The signal line group can acquire properties from the pipe line group.

■

Signal lines can then acquire these properties from their signal line group.

■

Components (such as general instruments) on the signal line can then acquire these properties from the signal lines.

NOTE Association and dissociation are manual processes. If you change a drawing that make a current association inappropriate, you can change the association. As you change, all acquired properties are updated to reflect the current association. Tags and annotations based on these properties are also updated automatically. To set up a new property acquisition rule 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 93

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definition whose property acquisition rule you want to create (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Inline Assets ➤ Hand Valves).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add.

5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Property Name, enter the property name (for example: PipelinesInsulationType).

■

Under Display Name, enter the new property name you want displayed in the Data Manager or the Properties palette (for example: PipelinesInsulationType).

■

Under Choose A Type, click Acquisition. Click OK.

94 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

6 In the Select Data Source dialog box, on the Class Properties tab, do the following: ■

Under Categories, expand Engineering Items.

■

Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Pipe Line Segments).

■

Under Properties, click a property (for example: Insulation Type). Click OK.

7 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. To add an acquisition rule for an existing property 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 95

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class containing the property whose acquisition property you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, click a property (for example: Type). 5 In the Acquisition column, click in the box, and then click the [...] button. Click Add Acquisition Rule.

6 In the Select Data Source dialog box, on the Class Properties tab, do the following: ■

Under Categories, expand Engineering Items.

■

Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe Line Segments).

■

Under Properties, click a property (for example: Insulation Type). Click OK.

96 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

7 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. To edit an acquisition rule for a property 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whose property you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate the property whose acquisition rule you want to edit. 5 In the Acquisition column, click in the box, and then click the [...] button. Select Edit Acquisition Rule.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 97

6 In the Select Data Source dialog box, on the Class Properties tab, do the following: ■

Under Categories, expand Engineering Items.

■

Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe Line Segments).

■

Under Properties, click a property (for example: Insulation Type). Click OK.

7 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. To remove an acquisition rule from a property 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whose property you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate the property whose acquisition rule you want to remove. 5 In the Acquisition column, click in the box, and then click the [...] button. Select Remove Acquisition Rule. 6 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. To override an acquisition property You can override an acquisition property using the Data Manager or the Properties palette. The following steps describe overriding an acquisition property using the Properties palette. 1 In a drawing, right-click the component whose acquisition rule you want to override. Click Properties. 2 In the Properties palette, locate the property you want to change. Click the field in the right column.

3

Click Acquire Mode. In the flyout menu, click Override Mode.

98 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

4 Enter a new value. 5 Close the Properties Palette. NOTE When you export data from the Data Manager to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, you can change the values of properties that are in Acquire mode in Excel. When you import the file into the Data Manager and accept the changes, the new values are displayed and the properties are automatically changed to Override mode. See Import Modified Acquisition Properties on page 531 . To change how an existing property acquisition rule is applied 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whose property you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Inline Assets ➤ Hand Valves).

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 99

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, locate the Size property row. In the Default Value column, click the box to display the drop-down list. Do either of the following: ■

To set the property so that it always acquires its value from PipeLines.Size, click Acquisition (the default).

■

To set the property so that its value is acquired once (when a valve is first initialized), click Initialization Only. NOTE After initialization, the property value of a valve changes to Override mode. Users can edit the property value.

In the Acquisition column, the valve size is displayed as acquired from PipeLines.Size. If PipeLines.Size has a value of 3, that value appears in the Data Manager for this valve. 5 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK.

100 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Properties (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Selection Lists and Symbol Lists Use selection lists and symbol lists to enforce standard sizes for items such as pipe specs, pipe sizes, and instrument types, or when you want designers to choose from a predefined set of options.

Understand Selection Lists AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a set of selection lists. You can add your own items or delete items that are not relevant to your drafting environment. In the Data Manager, designers can also enter their own values in the lists. As part of your project setup tasks, you can set up new selection lists or change the values of an existing list. The selection lists you configure are added to the P&ID Class Definitions tree in the Project Setup dialog box. There, you define the properties of engineering items, non-engineering items, pipe line groups, and signal line groups. Those properties are included in the component or line behavior when the component or line is placed in a drawing.

Understand Symbol Lists Symbol lists are like selection lists because you designate a value for a property. But with a symbol list, you also define the symbol to represent a component in a P&ID drawing. The symbols that you can select for a symbol list are

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 101

assigned to the selected class definition or are inherited from a class definition family. To create a selection list 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component or line class definition (for example: Engineering Items).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add.

5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following; ■

Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property (for example: Pump_Manufacturers). The name cannot contain any spaces.

■

Under Display Name, enter the name you want to be displayed for the new property (for example: Pump Manufacturers) in the Data Manager or Properties palette.

■

Under Choose a Type, select Selection List.

102 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

6 Click OK.

7 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click New Selection List.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 103

8 In the Add Selection List dialog box, enter the name for the new selection list (for example: Manufacturers). Click OK. 9 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click Add Row.

10 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value (for example: Goulds) and a description of the value, if necessary. 11 Continue adding rows until the selection list is complete. 12 Click OK. On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, the selection list is displayed for the selected class definition. The value displayed in the list is the default value for that component. To modify or delete items in a selection list 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a class definition (for example: Engineering Items).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, Property Name, select the property containing the selection list you want to modify. Click Edit.

104 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click the property whose data you want to change (for example: Manufacturers).

6 Click Add Row.

7 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value and a description of the new selection list entry (for example: Bechtel). Click OK.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 105

In the Selection List Property dialog box, under Value, the new selection list entry is added. 8 In the Selection List Property dialog box, select a value (for example: Goulds). Click Delete Row. 9 In the Confirm Delete message, click Yes. 10 Click OK to close each dialog box. To delete a selection list 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component or line class definition (for example: Engineering Items).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, select the property you want to delete. Click Edit.

5 In the Selection List Property dialog box, under Selection List, click the selection list you want to remove (for example: Manufacturers). 6 Click Delete Selection List. 7 In the Confirm Delete message, click Yes. 8 Select another selection list to assign to the current property.

106 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

9 Click OK. To create a symbol list 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component (for example: Centrifugal Blower).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add.

5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following;

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 107

■

Click Symbol List.

■

Specify a property name for the component or line (for example: Blower_Manufacturers).

■

Specify a display name for the component or line (for example: Blower Manufacturers).

■

Click OK.

NOTE To create a property that uses a symbol list, you assign more than one symbol to the component class definition. 6 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, click Add Row.

7 In the Add Row dialog box, under Property Value, enter the name of the new symbol list entry (for example: Jackson). Click OK.

108 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

8 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, under Property Value, click the new entry. Under Block Value, in the drop-down list, click a symbol to assign to the property value. 9 Continue adding rows until the symbol list is complete. 10 Click OK. To modify or delete items in a symbol list 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment ➤ Blowers ➤ Centrifugal Blower).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, select the property containing the symbol list that you want to modify. Click Edit.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 109

5 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, click Add Row. 6 In the Add Row dialog box, enter a value for the new symbol list entry (for example: Bechtel). Click OK.

The new symbol list entry is added to the selection list for the selected property. NOTE If you want to change the property value for an entry, delete the original entry and add a new entry with a new value. 7 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, select the new symbol list entry. Under Block Value, double-click and select the block style. 8 To delete an entry, select the entry (for example: Bechtel) and click Delete Row. NOTE If you delete a value that is currently assigned to a component in a drawing, the value is removed from the symbol list, and any component using that value is assigned no value. The symbol assigned to the block remains, however, to maintain visual fidelity. 9 Click OK to close each dialog box. To modify the standards that support a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions.

110 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component (for example: Centrifugal Blower).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, scroll down the list and select the SupportedStandards property name.

5 Click Edit. 6 In the Standards dialog box, select which standards support the selected class. Click OK.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 111

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Properties (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Tag Formatting (P&ID) You can set up tag formats to help designers apply tag elements consistently throughout a project cycle. Many projects require specific tag numbering formats for different components and lines. You can define different tag numbering formats for your projects. NOTE You can set the behavior of the Assign Tag dialog box for individual components and lines. To set the tagging prompt, see Set Up Symbol and Line Settings on page 62. You can set up tag formats for equipment, valves, nozzles, instrumentation, pipe lines, and pipe line groups by creating new tag formats or modifying existing formats. You select an existing format on which to base the new format. You can also create a new tag format. Tag formats structure specific information for a component or line into a tag. The information is stored in the tag as a property of a component or line. The information can be displayed in an annotation callout when a component or line is annotated. The block used for the annotation style determines what information is displayed in the callout. Even when an annotation includes a tag property and displays that property on the drawing, the result is not a tag, but an annotation. Because the terms

112 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

tag and annotation are easily confused, they are described in detail in this table. A tag is:

An annotation is:

A unique identifier for a component or line segment

Information about a component or line segment that appears on a drawing

Data

Text and (optional) shapes

Located in the data cache

Located in the drawing area

Unique

Not necessarily unique

Viewable as a property in the Data Manager

Viewable in the drawing

A single entity for each component or line segment

Not necessarily a single entity per component or a line segment. (A component or line segment can have multiple annotations.)

Not text, but data. Comprised of sub parts as defined by the tag format.

Text defined in the annotation style block definition. This text can include the tag property of a component or line segment. This text is not a tag, but an annotation

Set Up Tag Formatting for a Class Tag formats are set up for a class definition project-wide. Most of the default tag formats tag items at the class definition level (for example: a class definition type, such as equipment). You can use the property of a class, drawing, or project in the tag format. For example, a tag for a component can contain a class property such as Spec, a drawing property such as Area, or a project property such as Project Number. Tag formats are flexible. You can set them up to reflect the specific needs of your company.

Set Up Tag Formatting Using Acquiring Properties Tag formats can include properties that acquire their values from other properties. For example, if a line acquires its Unit value from a project-level property, you can use that acquiring property in the tag format. If the Unit

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 113

value at the project level changes, all tags with that property as a subpart are updated to reflect that change.

Set Up Tag Formatting for a Pipe Line Group Pipes are the only components that are automatically grouped. Although pipe line groups are not physical entities, you set up tag formatting for pipe line groups just as you would for any other component. The default tag format for a pipe line group is Line Number. You can add other properties as needed (for example: Service).

Understand Default Tag Formatting Templates AutoCAD Plant 3D provides the following tag format templates for you to use or modify to fit with your company tag formatting standards: ■

Equipment tag (Type-Number). Defined by default with a type property and a number (for example: P-100).

■

Equipment tag 2 (Area-Type-Number). Defined by default with an area property, type property, and number (for example: 25-P-1000).

■

Hand valve tag (Code-Number). Defined by default with two letters representing a valve code and a number (for example: HV-100).

■

Nozzle tag (N-Number). Defined by default with one or more letters representing a nozzle code and a number (for example: N-1).

■

Instrumentation tag (Area-Type-Number). Defined by default with an area, type, and loop number (for example: 51-PT-100).

■

Line number tag. Defined by default with a line number (for example: 100).

■

Pipeline tag (Size-Spec-Service-Line Number). Defined by default with size value, spec, service, and line number (for example: 6"-C1-P-10014).

Build Tag Formatting Expressions You can define how tag elements are expressed. For example, you can create an instrument tag of Area-Type-Loop Number_Suffix (for example: 25-FE-1002_A). You can control the formatting of the values that can be assigned when tagging a component or line through expressions. Using expressions, you can designate whether a value must be entered as text characters, numbers, or any combination of text characters and numbers (free-style value).

114 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

You can also define an expression to generate a value automatically when a designer adds a component to a drawing. You can set automatic expressions to a drawing property or project property.

Understand Tag Uniqueness In general, a tag property must be unique. Even items of different types must have unique tags. For example, if you assign the tag A-123 to a pump, you cannot assign the identical tag to a tank. Two exceptions to tag uniqueness are as follows: ■

Line segment tags can be identical. The tag properties of a line group must be unique, but the tag properties of the line segments within that line group can be the same.

■

A large component that stretches across drawings can have duplicate tags. Duplicate tags can represent different parts of the same item. For example, a line that spans drawings using an off-page connector can have the same tag in each drawing.

To create a tag format 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component (for example: Centrifugal Sump Pump). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, select the tag format type on which you want to base the new tag format (for example: Equipment Tag [Type-Number]). Click New.

5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (for example: Pump Tag).

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 115

6 In the Number of Subparts box, enter a number for how many subparts you want in the tag (for example: 3) or click the Up or Down arrow until the number is displayed. TIP Use as many properties as subparts as needed. Use delimiters only between these subparts, not within them. if you place Delimiters in the Delimiter box, they appear between the subparts in a tag. Entering a dash between items in the Field box (for example, N-N-N) can produce unexpected results.

7

In the first row of icons, click Select Class Properties.

8 In the Select Class Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Class, click... Equipment.

■

Under Property, click Type.

■

Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property.

■

Click OK.

116 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

9

In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click Select Drawing Properties.

10 In the Select Drawing Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Category, click General.

■

Under Drawing Properties, click Area.

■

Click OK.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 117

11

In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the second row, click Define Expression (the last icon in the row).

12 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Results, click No Expression (Free Style Value). Click OK.

13

In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click Define Expression (the last icon in the row).

14 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Expression, do the following: ■

Click Numbers.

■

Select the Fixed Length check box. In the Fixed Length box, enter a number or click the Up arrow until the number is displayed.

NOTE If the Expression section is disabled: under Result, clear the check box for No Expression (Free Style Value). Then follow the directions in step 14.

118 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

15 Click OK. 16 In the Tag Format dialog box, under Delimiter, enter a delimiter where appropriate. In the example below, a period (.) is used as the delimiter for General.Area[]. NOTE Do not place a delimiter in the Field box.

17 Click OK. 18 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, under Property Name, select TagFormatName.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 119

19 In the TagFormatName row, under the Default Value column, in the drop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging the component. 20 Click OK.

You created a new tag format and assigned it to a component. When you use the component in a drawing, the Assign Tag dialog box prompts you to enter tag data for the format you created. To create a tag format for pipe line groups 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the item you want to tag (for example: Pipe Line Groups).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format type on which you want to base the new tag format (for example: Line Number), and then click New.

120 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (for example: PipeLineGroup - Service).

■

In the Name of Subparts box, enter the number of subparts you want in the tag (for example: 2), or click the Up arrow until the number 2 is displayed.

■

In the bottom row of icons, click Select Class Properties (the first icon on the left).

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 121

6 In the Select Class Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Class, click Pipe Line Groups.

■

Under Property, click a property (for example: Service).

■

Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property. Click OK.

7 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click OK. 8 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, locate TagFormatName. 9 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, click the tag format you want to use (for example: select PipeLineGroup - Service). 10 Click OK. To assign a tag format to a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions.

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag format whose class definition you want to assign. 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, locate TagFormatName.

122 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in the drop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging a component or line. 6 Click OK. To modify a tag format for a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions.

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag formatting you want to change. 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format you want to modify.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 123

5 Click Modify. 6 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, make the desired changes to the tag format. Click OK.

7 Click OK. To remove a tag format from a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions.

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag formatting you want to delete. 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, select the tag format you want to delete.

124 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 Click Delete. NOTE If the selected tag format is either in a drawing that is part of the project or is currently assigned to a component, a message informs you that tag format cannot be deleted. 6 In the Confirm Delete message, click Yes. 7 Click OK. To add automatically generated drawing properties 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component or line class definition (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click New.

5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (for example: Alt_Equip_Tag).

■

In the Number of Subparts box, enter a number or click the arrows until the desired number of subparts is displayed.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 125

■

Click the Expression icon (the last icon in the row).

6 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Autogenerate, do the following: ■

Select the Autogenerate Expression.

■

Click Drawing Field.

■

Click the Drawing icon.

7 In the Select Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.

126 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

8 In the New Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Name, enter the name for the new property.

■

Under Description, enter a description for the new property.

9 Click OK until the Project Setup dialog box is displayed. In the Project Setup dialog box, under Tag Format, the new tag is added.

To add automatically generated project properties 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component or line class definition (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment).

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 127

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click New.

5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (for example: Alt_Equip_Tag).

■

In the Number of Subparts box, enter a number or click the arrows until the desired number of subparts is displayed.

■

Click the Expression icon (the last icon in the row).

128 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

6 In the Define Expression dialog box, do the following: ■

■

Under Autogenerate, select the Autogenerate Expression check box. Click Project Field.

Click the Project icon.

7 In the Select Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 129

8 In the New Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Name box, enter the name for the new property.

■

In the Description box, enter a description for the new property.

■

In the Last Used Value box, enter the value to use for the last value for the new property.

■

In the Increment Value box, enter the increment value for the new property.

9 Click OK until all open dialog boxes are closed.

130 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Tag Format (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Annotations You can use annotations to place text on a drawing to describe a component or line. AutoCAD Plant 3D provides various annotation types. You can create an annotation style that is based on an existing annotation style or a template, or create a new annotation style. To base an annotation style on a template, use AnnotationTemplates.dwg (located in the AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 directory), and select a block from the drawing. The template blocks contain dynamic block parameters. With these parameters set, an annotation sizes dynamically when placed in a drawing.

Understand Dynamic Sizing Behavior of Annotations AutoCAD Plant 3D annotations can dynamically size when you add them to a component or line. When you create dynamically sized annotations, you can use the Assign Annotation Format dialog box to assign the format string to both the attribute and to any associated dynamic block parameters. Using any other method (including the Attribute Definition dialog box), you apply the format string to the attribute only. In addition, to enable the dynamic sizing behavior, you would have to update each instance of associated dynamic block parameters. The only reason to use the Attribution Definition dialog box is to set other attribute properties, such as text style and height.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 131

If you create an annotation using a block you create, you can add dynamic sizing behavior to the block. To understand how AutoCAD dynamic blocks are created, see “Overview of Dynamic Blocks” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Understand Annotation Style Properties You can change the following styles for annotations: ■

Symbol properties. Sets the name of the annotation style and defines the block that is displayed when the style is used.

■

General style properties. Sets layer, color, linetype, linetype scale, plot style, and lineweight.

■

Other properties. Sets the scale factor used for the symbol, whether the annotation inherits the component properties, whether the annotation is linked to a class, whether the annotation is automatically inserted, and the X and Y offset distance from a component.

To create an annotation style 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component or line class definition (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, click Add Annotation. 5 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, Symbol Properties, locate and click Symbol Name. Enter a new name for the symbol. 6 Under Symbol Properties, locate and click Block. Click the [...] button. 7 In the Select Block Drawing dialog box, browse to and select the drawing that contains the block you want to use. Click Open. NOTE You cannot use a drawing file as a block for the symbol; the block you want to use must be in the drawing file that you select. 8 In the Select Block dialog box, select a block from the Available Blocks list and then click OK. 9 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, change the properties under General Styles Properties and Other Properties as needed. Click OK.

132 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

10 Click OK. To create a block and an annotation style The following procedure illustrates how to create an annotation without using an existing block as a template. 1 Create a block (for example: an insulation block).

2 Add an attribute to the block and call it UNASSIGNED. 3 (Optional) Add dynamic sizing behavior to the block attribute by adding a linear parameter to determine sizing behavior as follows: ■

To have the linear parameter automatically size to match the attribute text size, name the distance label of the linear parameter the same as the attribute definition tag. An example of this dynamic sizing behavior is the stretching of underlining in the Equipment Tag style.

■

To have the linear parameter automatically size to include the entire X or Y extents of all the evaluated attributes in the block definition, give the linear parameter the names TotalX and/or TotalY. An example of this dynamic sizing behavior is a block definition consisting of a rectangle enclosing several lines of attributes. The rectangle stretches or shrinks to accommodate the attributes regardless of their values.

4 Save the block drawing. 5 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 6 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 7 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component or line class definition (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment). 8 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, click Add Annotation. 9 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, Symbol Properties, locate and click Symbol Name. Enter new name for the annotation style. 10 Under Symbol Properties, locate and click Block. Click the [...] button.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 133

11 In the Select Block Drawing dialog box, browse to and select the drawing that contains the block you want to use. Click Open. NOTE You cannot use a drawing file as a block for the symbol. The block you use must be in the drawing file that you select.

12 In the Select Block dialog box, under Available Blocks, select a block. Click OK. 13 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under General Styles Properties and Other Properties, change the properties as needed. Click OK. 14 In the Project Setup dialog box, under Annotation, click Edit Block.

15

On the P&ID Annotation toolbar, click Assign Annotation Format. In the Block Editor window, select the attribute definition.

134 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

16 In the Assign Annotation Format dialog box, create each subpart of the format string as follows:

■

To select a class property, click Select Class Properties.

■

To select a drawing property, click Select Drawing Properties.

■

To select a project property, click Select Project Properties.

■

To define an expression, click Define Expression.

■

Enter a delimiter use between the fields. You can enter text and delimiters. For example, if you want a pump to have text reflecting the flow rate data, you could use a field value of #(TargetClass.FlowRate) and a delimiter value of GPH. To add leading text, create the format string and add the leading text using the Properties palette or the Attribute Definition dialog box. For example, to create an annotation for an Exchanger that reads TUBE [pressure] @ [temperature], use the Assign Annotation Format dialog box to create the format string #(TargetClass.TubeDesignPressure) @#(TargetClass.TubeDesignTemperature). Then add the leading text TUBE using the Properties palette or the Attribute Definition dialog box. NOTE If you manually add leading text, update any associated dynamic block parameters to match, using the Properties palette.

17 To create more subparts to the format string, in the Number of Subparts box, click the Up arrow or enter a number. 18 In the Assign Annotation Format dialog box, click OK. 19 In the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. Save the block. 20 If you want the new annotation style to appear in the component or line shortcut menu, proceed to step 21. If you want the annotation placed in the drawing along with a component or line, you can set the new annotation style as the default. A default

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 135

setting is useful when the AutoInsert property is set to something other than No Auto Insert. Do the following: ■

On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, locate AnnotationStyleName.

■

In the AnnotationStyleName row, under the Default Value column, in the drop-down list, click the annotation style.

21 Click OK to close the Project Setup dialog box and return to the drawing. 22 In the drawing, right-click the appropriate component or line to make sure that the new annotation is on its shortcut menu. To assign an annotation style to a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the annotation style you want to assign to a component or line definition. 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, locate AnnotationStyleName. 5 In the AnnotationStyleName row, under the Default Value column, in the drop-down list, click the annotation style you want. 6 Click OK. To modify an annotation style for a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the annotation style you want to modify. 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, in the drop-down list, click the annotation style you want to modify. 5 Click Edit Annotation.

136 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, make the desired changes to the annotation style. Click OK. 7 Click OK. To delete an annotation style from a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the annotation style you want to delete. 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, in the drop-down list, click the annotation style you want to delete. 5 Click Remove Annotation. NOTE If the selected annotation style is either used in a drawing that is part of the project or is currently assigned to a component, you are prompted that the annotation style cannot be deleted. 6 In the Confirm Delete message box, click Yes. 7 Click OK.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 137

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Annotation (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Off-Page Connectors Off-page connectors create a continuance of a line from one project drawing to another. You can use an existing off-page connector to create a new one. You can change the following styles for off-page connectors: ■

Symbol properties. Sets the name of the symbol and defines the block for the connector when it is inserted into a drawing.

■

General style properties. Sets layer, color, linetype, linetype scale, plot style, and lineweight.

■

Other properties. Sets the symbol scale and whether an off-page connector is scaled, rotated, and mirrored when it is inserted in a drawing.

To create an off-page connector and add it to the tool palette NOTE Make sure that the P&ID tool palette is displayed in your drawing and that the active tool palette tab is the one where you want to add the new component. 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions.

138 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the off-page connector (Non Engineering Items ➤ Connectors ➤ Off Page Connector). 4 Right-click Off Page Connector. Click New. 5 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a name for the new off-page connector. 6 Click OK. 7 Expand the Off Page Connector node, and select the new off-page connector. 8 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, click Add Symbol. 9 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, change the properties that make the new off-page connector unique (for example, you can change the color). Click OK.

10 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, locate the style you just created (in this example, OffPageConnectorStyle2).

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 139

11 Click Add to Tool Palette. The new style is added to the active tool palette. It can be used just like the default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D, and is included in reports. 12 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box

Configure Plant 3D DWG Settings As part of your Plant 3D DWG setup, you can configure certain behaviors to which all designers using this project adhere.

Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D) Create custom settings for export and import that include any combination of Plant 3D classes. Share AutoCAD Plant 3D data with other applications by mapping AutoCAD Plant 3D properties to correspond with similar properties in other programs. NOTE You can export and import Data Manager information only when the Data Manager view is configured for object type (class). You cannot export and import when the Data Manager view is based on area.

140 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Understand Export and Import Settings You can export and import data using the default Displayed Data setting. This setting exports and imports data for the active node in the Data Manager tree view, with or without child node data. In some cases, however, you want to be more selective with the data you export and import. For example, you want to export only nozzles and valves. You can use export and import settings to create custom settings that include only the classes you choose. You can also use export and import settings to move data to and from other applications. You use external data mapping to map classes and properties to the data structure in the other application. You create export and import settings at the project level in Project Setup. You use one setting for both export and import, which simplifies the process of exporting data, externally editing the data, and importing the data back. After you create an export and import setting, you can later modify or delete it.

Export to and Import from Other Programs One common reason to create a custom export and import setting is for exporting and importing data to and from other programs. For example, you want to export data to AutoCAD Electrical. Because the two programs have different data structures, you map the classes and properties in AutoCAD Plant 3D to the classes and properties in the other program.

Set up External Data Mapping You set up external data mapping in the Export and Import Settings dialog box when creating or modifying an export and import setting. You specify the classes and properties to include and enter external class and property names. You also identify each property to be used as a unique identifier (UID) for each specified class, and map property values. A one-to-one mapping between every class and property is not required. Many Plant 3D objects can be mapped to the same external object. To achieve this mapping, enter the same external object name for all Plant 3D objects that correspond to the same objects in other applications. For example, AutoCAD Electrical uses a single table called COMP for all equipment. AutoCAD Plant 3D, however, uses numerous tables and objects to classify the various categories of equipment. While interacting with AutoCAD Electrical, you map every Equipment object to an external object

Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D) | 141

called COMP. You then map every equipment property to some common properties in COMP. Export and import share common property value mappings. When you export data, the mappings transform data to a format required by the external application. When you import data, the mappings transform the external data into a format required by AutoCAD Plant 3D. Thus mappings provide a two-way mechanism for a continuous data exchange between applications. In some cases, applications can contain erroneous or duplicate data. The import and export process uses a unique identifier (UID) to identify specific records. If the imported data contains duplicate records, the most recent records overwrite the previous records. AutoCAD Plant 3D generally prohibits duplicate records. However, if AutoCAD Plant 3D encounters duplicate records, it exports them as multiple records and the importing application coordinates them. To create export and import settings 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Export and Import Settings. 3 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click New. 4 In the New Export and Import Settings dialog box, under Name, enter a name for the export and import setting (for example: All Equipment).

142 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 Under Description, enter a description for the setting (for example: Export only Equipment). 6 In the Plant 3D Classes tree view, expand the nodes to display the Plant 3D Classes you want to export and import (for example: expand Piping and Equipment. Select all items under Equipment) 7 If this setting is for exporting to and importing from another program, see “To set up external data mapping.” Otherwise, click OK. To set up external data mapping You can map property values when creating export and import settings or by modifying an existing setting. 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Export and Import Settings.

Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D) | 143

3 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click an existing setting. Click Modify. 4 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Name, enter a new name (optional).

■

Under Description, enter a new description (optional).

■

In the Plant 3D tree view, expand the classes and select the check box for the class you want to configure for external data mapping.

■

Under External Data Mapping, in the External Class Name box, enter a name that corresponds to similar classes in the other program (for example: if the program equates Column with Columns, select the Columns check box in the Plant 3D Classes tree view and enter Column in the External Class Name box). Repeat this process for each class you want to configure for external data mapping.

■

Under Properties, in the External Property column, click the external property you want to change. Enter the new name (for example: click the ModelNumber external property and enter Model).

144 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Repeat this process for each external property you want to change. ■

To make a property a unique identifier (UID), select the UID check box corresponding to the property. PnPID is a UID by default. If the other program recognizes a different identifier, you can change this setting.

■

In the Value Mapping column, click the cell corresponding to the property you want to map. Click the [...] button.

5 In the Map Property Values dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Plant 3D Property column, enter the Plant 3D property values (for example: in the Plant 3D Property ModelNumber column, enter P1, P2, S1, and S2).

■

In the External Property column, enter corresponding property values for the other program (for example: enter Model1, Model2, Model1, and Model2).

Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D) | 145

6 Click OK. 7 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, repeat the value mapping process for each property you want to map. When you finish mapping, click OK to close the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box. To modify an export and import setting 1 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Export and Import Settings. 2 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click an existing setting. Click Modify.

146 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

3 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, you can: ■

Edit the name of the Export and Import Settings as necessary.

■

Edit the description as necessary.

4 In the Plant 3D Classes tree view, modify the Plant 3D Classes to export and import. For example, you can clear one or more check boxes. 5 On the External Data Mapping pane, modify the class name in the External Class Name box, if necessary. Make other changes, as needed, to the external data mapping settings. 6 Click OK.

Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D) | 147

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Export and Import Settings (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Set Plant 3D Paths You can change the default locations where users access Plant 3D project data (such as models, spec sheets, ortho drawings, and template files). The Paths panel includes: ■

Plant 3D model DWG directory. Sets the location of the project model DWG directory.

■

Spec sheets directory. Sets the location of the specification sheets directory.

■

Orthographic output directory (DWG). Sets the location of the orthographic drawing output directory.

■

Orthographic template file (DWT). Defines the ortho template file that is used when new ortho drawings in a project are created.

■

Equipment templates directory. Sets the location of the equipment snapshots directory.

■

Drawing template file (DWT). Defines the template file that is used when new drawings in a project are created.

To define new project paths 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup.

148 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Paths.

3 On the Paths pane, do one of the following: ■

Enter the file paths for the directories you want to change.

■

Click the [...] button to the right of each box to browse to the location where you want to store the directory and file.

4 Click OK. To set up pipe spec files 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup dialog box tree view, expand 3D Piping DWG Settings. Click Paths.

3 On the Paths pane, under Spec Sheets Directory, enter the path to the location of your spec files or click the [...] button to browse to the location. 4 Click OK to close the Project Setup dialog box.

Set Plant 3D Paths | 149

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Paths (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) You can customize the way the Data Manager displays data for projects or drawings. You can arrange the tree view in the Data Manager according to your requirements. First you specify whether the top-level nodes are areas (the default) or object types (classes). Then you specify the properties you want to view at various sub-levels. For example, you can arrange a tree view with Area at the top level, Manufacturer at the second level, and Model Number at the third level. Or you can arrange a tree view with Piping Equipment at the top level, Manufacturer at the second level, and Model Number at the third level. In a KKS environment, you can base a view on a Unit, SystemCode, SystemNumber, EquipmentCode, and EquipmentNumber hierarchy. To create a customized view for the Data Manager 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Data Manager Configuration.

150 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

3 Under Default Data Manager view, do one of the following: ■

To order the tree view by area, click Area (Drawing Property).

■

To order the tree view by object type, click Object Type.

4 Under Customized Views, click Create View. 5 Under A New Customized View, in the Name box, enter a name for your view. 6 Under A New Customized View, define the scope of your view: ■

To expand the scope of your view to include all project data, click Project Data.

■

To limit the scope of your view to the current drawing data, click Drawing Data.

■

Click New Level.

7 In the Select Class Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Class, expand the appropriate node and child nodes to locate and click a class for Level 1 (for example: Piping and Equipment).

■

Under Properties, click a class property (for example: Manufacturer).

■

Click OK.

Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) | 151

8 Click New Level and repeat step 7 to add the number of levels you want in the customized view. When you finish adding levels to the customized view, in the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. NOTE For best results in creating customized views, choose properties that are shared by all Plant 3D objects. To delete a customized view for the Data Manager 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Data Manager Configuration. 3 On the Customized Views pane, click the customized view you want to delete. Click Delete View. 4 In the Delete Customized View message, click Yes. To open a customized view in the Data Manager 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, click the drop-down list and click a customized view. The Data Manager tree view displays the customized data. 3 To display relevant details on the right pane, click a node in the tree view.

152 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Data Manager Configuration (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings You can specify common project settings for isometric drawing files. The Isogen settings available for configuration include: ■

File locations for drawings and the line designation table (LDT)

■

Dimensions

■

Sloped lines

■

Labels

■

Title block

AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 uses the full Isogen application and exposes the most commonly set Isogen configuration options. All Isogen configuration files are supported.

Set Up File Names and File Paths You can change the default locations where users access Isogen data (such as title blocks and templates).

Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings | 153

You can configure the following paths for each iso type: ■

Template files directory. Contains configuration files for the specified iso type.

■

Isogen title block. Sets the location where title block data is stored for the specified iso type.

■

Quick iso output directory. Defines the location where quick isometric drawings are stored for the specified iso type.

■

Production iso output directory. Defines the location where production isometric drawings are stored for the specified iso type.

■

Line designation table (LDT). (Optional) Activates and defines a worksheet file that can be mapped to pipelines and their properties.

To set or change isometric drawing file locations 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Paths.

154 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

3 On the Iso Path and File Locations pane, under Iso Type, click the iso type you want to change drawing file locations for. 4 Do any of the following: ■

Enter location paths for the template files directory, Isogen title block, quick iso output directory, and the production iso output directory.

■

Click the [...] button to the right of each box to browse to the location where you want to store the directory and file.

5 Click OK.

Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings | 155

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Paths (Isogen Settings)

Configure the Line Designation Table You can use an optional line designation table that specifies a worksheet name, header row, and line number column to pass pipe line data to the isometric drawing. You can use a line designation table to specify data (such as design pressure, design temperature, and so on) for use as attributes in the isometric title block. Typical data in a user-defined line designation table includes: ■

Service

■

Maximum pressure and maximum temperature

■

Design pressure and design temperature

To configure a line designation table 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Paths.

156 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

3 On the Iso Path and File Locations pane, under Line Designation Table (LDT), select the Use LDT Data from XLS check box and do the following: ■

Under LDT file, click the [...] button and browse to the location where the LDT file you want to use is located. Click the LDT file and click Open.

■

Under Line Designation Table (LDT), enter the worksheet name, header row number, and line number column from the LDT file.

■

Click View LDT to display a preview of the line designation table.

4 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Paths (Isogen Settings)

Create a New Iso Type You can create an iso type based on an existing iso type. You define a unique name for the new iso type. AutoCAD Plant 3D bases the configuration settings for the new type on the existing iso type settings. After creating the iso type, you can change the configuration settings. To create a new iso type 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup.

Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings | 157

2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Paths. 3 On the Iso Path and File Locations pane, click New Type. 4 In the Create Iso Type dialog box, under Name, enter a name for the new iso type. 5 In the Base on Existing Type list, click an existing iso type on which to base the new type. 6 Click Create.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Paths (Isogen Settings) Create Iso Type Dialog Box

Configure the Display of Dimensions You can change the default dimension style, value location, and gasket dimensions displayed for any isometric type. You can include or exclude gaskets and configure overall dimensions to stop at branches or go across them. To set up dimensions 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup.

158 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Dimensions. 3 On the Dimensions pane, in the Iso Type list, select the iso type you want to set dimensions for. 4 Under Dimension Style, click String Dimensions or Composite Dimensions. 5 Under Dimension Value Location, click Inline dimension or Above Line Dimension. 6 Under Gasket dimension, click Include Gaskets or Exclude Gaskets. 7 To control whether the iso type displays overall dimensions, under Miscellaneous Options, select the Overall Dimensions check box and do the following: ■

For each item in the Valve Type column, select a Dimension Style.

■

To control whether elbows are drawn with square corners or rounded corners, under Elbows select Square or Rounded.

■

To control whether bends are drawn with square corners or rounded corners, under Bends, select Square or Rounded.

8 Click OK.

Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings | 159

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Dimensions Dialog Box (Isogen Settings)

Configure the Display of Isometric Sloped Lines You can change the default display for sloped line falls and skews for any isometric type. You can configure 2D skews and 3D skews to display as boxes or triangles, and you can specify the maximum number of degrees at which falls display. To set up sloped lines for an iso type 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Sloped Lines. 3 On the Sloped Lines pane, in the Iso Type list, select an iso type. 4 Under Falls, in the Show Falls as drop-down list, select a falls behavior option. 5 In the Show as Fall Up to list, click the up and down arrows to specify the maximum value at which falls display. 6 Under 2D Skews, click Skew Box, Skew Triangle + Normal Dimensioning, or Skew Triangle + Alternative Dimensioning. 7 Under 3D Skews, click 3D Box or 2D Triangle + Fall Indicator.

160 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

8 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Sloped Lines Dialog Box (Isogen Settings)

Set Up Isometric Labels You can change the display of annotations for the cut piece list, spool labels, pipe supports, end connection coordinates, and weld numbering. To set up labels for an iso type 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Labels. 3 On the Labels pane, in the Iso Type list, select an iso type. 4 To control whether the cut piece list is displayed, under Cut Piece List, select the Display Cut Piece List check box. Click As Numeric or As Alphabetic. 5 To control whether the spool label is displayed, under Spool Label, select the Display Spool Label check box. Click As Numeric or As Alphabetic. In the Box Enclosure Style list, click a box enclosure style to enclose the spool label.

Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings | 161

6 To control whether pipe supports are displayed, under Pipe Supports, select the Display Pipe Supports check box. Click Without Dimensions, With Overall Dimensions, or With String Dimensions. 7 Under Date, in the drop-down list, click a date format to display. To display the date in four digit year format, select the Use Four Digit Year Format check box. 8 Under End Connection Coordinates, select check boxes for the Show Coordinates For options you want. 9 To control whether weld numbering is displayed, under Weld Numbering, select the Show Weld Numbers check box. Click For All Welds, For Fabrication Welds Only, or For Erection Welds Only. In the Box Enclosure Style list, click a box enclosure style to enclose weld numbering. 10 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Labels Dialog Box (Isogen Settings)

Configure the Title Block You can define the title block for each isometric type.

162 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

You have control over the placement and display of specific output for the following items displayed in the title block: ■

Attributes (such as project data) and client information (such as company name and primary contact)

■

Bill of materials

■

Layers

■

Drawing area, including overall plot area and north arrow setup

You configure each of these items individually for each iso type. When creating custom iso types, you can base the new type on an existing iso type with configuration settings that most closely match your desired settings.

Configure Isometric Title Block Layers You can configure which layer pipes, fittings, and other components are placed on when an iso is created. You can put this information on any layer that is defined for the title block. To configure the title block layers 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Configure Title Block. 3 On the Configure Title Block pane, in the Iso Type list, click the iso type you want to configure, and click Setup Title Block.

4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click Layers Setup. 5 In the Isogen Layer Setup dialog box, in the Pipe list, enter values for the Min size and Max Size. For each row in the list, click the Layer drop-down and specify a layer. ■

To add rows to the table, click

in the Pipe list title bar.

■

To delete rows from the table, click

in the Pipe list title bar.

Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings | 163

NOTE Set the first row at min size 0, and the last row at max size max. In the Fittings Default list, enter values for Min size, Max Size, Layer, and Scale. ■

To add rows to the table, click

in the Fittings Default list title bar.

■

To delete rows from the table, click bar.

in the Fittings Default list title

NOTE Set the first row at min size 0, and the last row at max size max. 6 In the Fittings Special list, specify a layer and scale for each type. 7 In the Other Items list, specify a layer for each type. 8 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Configure Title Block Dialog Box (Isogen Settings) Isogen Layer Setup Dialog Box

Configure Isometric Title Block Attributes You can configure title block format settings such as style, justification, and text height for the attributes that make up the title block.

164 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Attributes include general properties and custom category data as defined during project setup. To configure the title block attributes 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Configure Title Block. 3 On the Configure Title Block pane, in the Iso Type list, click the iso type you want to configure and click Setup Title Block.

4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click Attributes Setup. 5 In the Insert Title Block Attributes dialog box, in the list, click an attribute category. 6 Under Attribute Names, click the attribute you want to add to the title block. 7 Under format, change the Style, Justify, and Text Height boxes as desired. 8 Click Place. 9 Click in the drawing area to place the attribute. 10 In the Insert Title Block Attributes dialog box, repeat steps 5 through 9 to insert additional attributes or click Close. NOTE You cannot edit previously placed LDT attributes in the title block. Use a text editor to open the *.atr and *.pos files in the iso title block folder and manually delete the unwanted attributes.

Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings | 165

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Configure Title Block Dialog Box (Isogen Settings) Insert Title Block Attributes Dialog Box

Configure Isometric Title Block Drawing Area You can configure the plot and drawing area of the title block and set north arrow placement. The drawing area is the region in the drawing to which the isometric graphics are constrained. To configure the title block drawing area 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Configure Title Block. 3 On the Configure Title Block pane, in the Iso Type list, click the iso type you want to configure and click Setup Title Block.

4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click Drawing Area Setup. 5 In the Set Up Drawing Area dialog box, under Set Drawing Area, click Define Overall Plot Area.

166 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

6 Click in the drawing area of the title block drawing to pick the second point of the defining rectangle. 7 In the Set Up Drawing Area dialog box, under Set Drawing Area, click Define Iso Drawing Area. 8 In the drawing area, click within the area defined in step 6 to pick the first point of the defining rectangle. Click another point in the drawing area within the area defined in step 6 to define the second point of the defining rectangle. 9 In the Set Up Drawing Area dialog box, under Set North Direction, click an arrow button to define the north arrow direction. 10 Select Show Default Arrow Symbol and Use Enclosing Box check boxes if you want to place the arrow symbol in the drawing. 11 Click Place Arrow Symbol. 12 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Configure Title Block Dialog Box (Isogen Settings) Set Up Drawing Area Dialog Box

Configure Isometric Bill of Materials You can configure specific properties for the bill of materials.

Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings | 167

You can use Type 1 Isogen bill of materials settings or define custom title block properties for the bill of materials. For custom title block configuration, you can specify the text style, sort order, and the field settings for data items. You can add custom data items to the bill of materials. Standard fields you can add include BOM part number, quantity, component code, and so on. You can also add user attributes to the list of standard fields, such as the tag or number properties for a specified class definitions. During setup, you can view a preview of configuration changes you make to the bill of materials. To configure general settings for a custom bill of materials 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Configure Title Block. 3 On the Configure Title Block pane, in the Iso Type list, click the iso type you want to configure and click Setup Title Block.

4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click BOM Setup. 5 In the Setup Isogen Bill of Materials dialog box, on the General tab, clear the Use Type 1 Bill of Materials check box. 6 Under Layer, click a layer. 7 Under font settings, do the following: ■

In the Font drop-down list, click a font.

■

Under Text Thickness, click an option.

■

Under Text Height, enter a whole or decimal value (in millimeters).

■

Under Vertical Spacing, enter a whole or decimal value (in millimeters).

8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to specify font settings for each layer. 9 (Optional) To view a preview of configuration changes you made, click Preview. 10 Click OK.

168 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

To configure sort order for a custom bill of materials 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Configure Title Block. 3 On the Configure Title Block pane, in the Iso Type list, click the iso type you want to configure and click Setup Title Block.

4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click BOM Setup. 5 In the Setup Isogen Bill of Materials dialog box, on the General tab, clear the Use Type 1 Bill of Materials check box. 6 Click the Sort Order tab. 7 Click Continuous or Split Fabrication and Erection Components and do one of the following: ■

Under Continuous BOM Settings, in the Direction drop-down list, click Up or Down. In the Maximum Rows box, enter a maximum row number. In the Start Position box, click the Pick Point button and use the pointing device to click an insertion point in the drawing area to indicate the start position.

■

Under Split BOM Settings, in the Direction drop-down list, click Up or Down. In the Maximum Rows box, enter a maximum row number. In the Start Position box, click the Pick Point button and use the pointing device to click an insertion point in the drawing area to indicate the start position.

8 (Optional) To view a preview of configuration changes you made, click Preview. 9 Click OK. To configure fields to include on a custom bill of materials 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Configure Title Block.

Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings | 169

3 On the Configure Title Block pane, in the Iso Type list, click the iso type you want to configure and click Setup Title Block.

4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click BOM Setup. 5 In the Setup Isogen Bill of Materials dialog box, on the General tab, clear the Use Type 1 Bill of Materials check box. 6 Click the Data Items tab. 7 Under Select Fields to Include, select check boxes for the fields you want to include on the BOM. 8 Under Specify Ordering and Locations, do the following: ■

In the Maximum Characters column, enter the maximum number of characters you want to display for each data item.

■

In the Column Width column, enter a column width or click the Pick Point button and use the pointing device to specify a column width in the drawing area.

9 Click the Up Arrow and Down Arrow to specify the order of data items on the list. 10 (Optional) To view a preview of configuration changes you made, click Preview. 11 Click OK. To add a user attribute to the bill of materials 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen Settings. Click Configure Title Block. 3 On the Configure Title Block pane, in the Iso Type list, click the iso type you want to configure and click Setup Title Block.

4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click BOM Setup.

170 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 In the Setup Isogen Bill of Materials dialog box, on the General tab, clear the Use Type 1 Bill of Materials check box. 6 Click the Data Items tab. 7 Under Select Fields to Include, click Add User Attribute. 8 In the Select Class Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Class, expand items in the list and click the desired class.

■

Under Property, click an item.

■

Click OK.

9 In the Setup Isogen Bill of Materials dialog box, click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Configure Title Block Dialog Box (Isogen Settings) Set Up Isogen Bill of Materials Dialog Box Select Class Property Dialog Box (Annotation Format Setup Dialog Box)

Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments You can specify an automated scheme for assigning layer and color values to pipe lines and associated inline components.

Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments | 171

Layers provide a convenient method for isolating line runs or services in a congested area. You can turn layers on or off to view the specific objects that interest you. You can create layer and color assignment schemes based on any Plant 3D object property. Pipe lines and inline components follow the scheme that is currently in effect. End of line components, such as pumps or tanks, do not follow the scheme.

Understand Automated Layer and Color Schemes Among the many automated layer and color schemes you can set up are the following: ■

Layer by line number and color by pipe size

■

Layer by line number and color by pipe spec

■

Layer by pipe spec and color by pipe size

■

Layer by service and color by pipe size

If you set up an automated scheme, pipes and pipe fittings that you place in a model follow that scheme.

Understand the Effects of Enabling or Modifying an Automated Scheme Remember the following guidelines when setting up an automated layer and color scheme: ■

You can create automated schemes based on a list of pipe properties.

■

You can add to the list of properties by which you can assign colors by creating a new selection list. For more information, see Set Up Selection Lists on page 210

■

You can change to a different automated layer and color assignment scheme through the Project Setup dialog box after initially creating a project.

■

Automated schemes affect all Plant 3d objects except end-of-line components such as pumps or tanks.

■

If you change the automated scheme, the changes appear immediately in the open model. Other project models update when you open them.

■

If you do not enable an automated scheme (if you clear the check box for Automate Layer And Color Assignments When Creating Objects), the default AutoCAD layer and color settings are in effect.

172 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

To enable or disable automated layer and color assignments 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Layer and Color Settings. 3 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, select or clear the check box labeled Automate Layer And Color Assignments When Creating Objects. 4 Click OK. NOTE When the check box labeled Automate Layer And Color Assignments When Creating Objects is cleared, default AutoCAD layer and color settings are in effect. To create an automated layer and color assignment scheme 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Layer and Color Settings. 3 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, do the following: ■

Make sure the check box labeled Automate Layer And Color Assignments When Creating Objects is selected.

■

Click New.

Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments | 173

4 In the New Automation Scheme dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Name box, enter a name for your automated scheme.

■

In the Start With list, click an existing scheme (for example: Default).

■

Click OK.

5 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, do the following: ■

In the Assign Layer By list, click a property (for example: Spec).

■

In the Assign Color By list: click a property or leave the setting unchanged (for example: Nominal Diameter).

■

In the Color column, click the color you want to change. In the AutoCAD Select Color dialog box, click a new color. Click OK.

174 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

For more information about the Select Color dialog box, see “Set the Current Color” in the AutoCAD Help system. ■

Click Save Changes.

■

To replace the default scheme with the new scheme, click Set Current.

6 Click OK. The new automated scheme is reflected in all open models. All other models in the project reflect this change when you open them. To change to a different automated layer and color assignment scheme 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Layer and Color Settings. 3 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, do the following: ■

Make sure that the check box labeled Automate Layer And Color Assignments When Creating Objects is selected.

■

Under Automation Schemes, click an automated scheme. Click Set Current.

4 Click OK. The new automated scheme is reflected in all open models. All other models in the project reflect this change when you open them. To delete an automated layer and color assignment scheme 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup.

Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments | 175

2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Layer and Color Settings. 3 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, do the following: ■

Make sure that the check box labeled Automate Layer And Color Assignments When Creating Objects is selected.

■

Under Automation Schemes, select an automated scheme. Click Delete.

NOTE You cannot delete the scheme that is set as current.

4 Click OK. To add an option to the Assign Color By list 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click Pipe Run Component. 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add. 5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following; ■

Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property (for example: SpecNew). The name cannot contain spaces.

■

Under Display Name, enter the name that you want displayed for the new property in the Data Manager or Properties palette (for example: SpecNew).

■

Under Choose a Type, click Selection List.

176 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

6 Click OK. 7 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click New Selection List. 8 In the Add Selection List dialog box, enter the name for the new selection list (for example: Spec). Click OK. 9 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click Add Row. 10 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value (for example: CS300) and a description of the value, if necessary. 11 Continue adding rows until the selection list is complete. 12 Click OK. 13 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Layer and Color Settings. 14 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, in the Assign Color By list, click the new item.

Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments | 177

15 Click OK.

178 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Layer and Color Settings (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Configure Connectors You can customize the conditions, fittings, and fasteners used to make a connection. Connectors are the components and fasteners that you use to join pipe. You can set the conditions that allow pipe to connect and identify the components and fasteners used to make a connection. In AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010, joint types are either simple, or compound. A simple joint specifies fasteners (for example: welds or bolt sets) that are used to hold pipe together. Default simple joint types, such as welded, flanged, and socketed joints, are provided for connecting pipe with matching nominal diameter. Parts that support the connection (for example: gaskets) are also specified in a simple joint. A compound joint specifies a connection component or adapter (for example: a weld-neck flange) that allows pipe to connect. Default compound joint types include AutoFlange, which adds a flange connection component when the diameter, pressure class, and facing of the pipe and fitting match. For example, if you connect pipe with a plain end to a flanged valve there is no simple joint type that can connect PL to FL end types. The AutoFlange compound joint type adds a Flange connection component to the line, which is connected at each end by two simple joint types.

Configure Connectors | 179

NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 does not support customizing the list of fasteners available in a simple joint. In AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 you cannot add to the Plant 3D class definitions. To modify a joint type 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings ➤ Connections. Click Joint Settings. 3 In the Simple Joints list, click a joint type (for example: Buttweld). 4 Click Modify. 5 In the Modify Joint dialog box, click Add Property. 6 In the Select Class Property dialog box, click a Property (for example: Port ➤ Pressure Class). 7 Click OK. 8 In the Modify Joint dialog box, click Modify. 9 In the Project Setup dialog box, Click OK. NOTE If you add pressure class match to a buttweld joint, pipe and fittings must be the same pressure class to connect. Existing buttweld joints are not modified.

To add a joint type 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings ➤ Connections. Click Joint Settings. 3 Click Add. 4 In the Add Joint dialog box, enter a joint name (for example: FlangedGroundStrap). 5 Under connection settings, select one or more End 1 connection types (for example: FL). 6 Select one or more End 2 connection types (for example: FL).

180 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

7 Select one or more Fasteners (for example: Gasket, Boltset). 8 Under Property Matches, click Add Property. 9 In the Select Class Property dialog box, under Class, select Port. 10 Under Properties, select Nominal Diameter. 11 Click OK. 12 Repeat steps 8 through 11 to add additional match properties (for example: Pressure Class, Facing). 13 Click Add. 14 In the Project Setup dialog box, Click OK.

NOTE You can use the Substitute grip to exchange compatible connector types. Press the CTRL key to select sub-objects in a compound joint.

Configure Connectors | 181

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP PLANTENDCODES

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Connections - Joint Settings (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node) Manage Endcode Dialog Box Add Endcode Dialog Box Modify Endcode Dialog Box

Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties You can customize the default mappings of P&ID and Plant 3D classes and properties to reflect your company requirements. You can also add new mappings at any time.

Understand Mapping You can place the Plant 3D equivalent of a P&ID object in a model if the two objects are mapped appropriately. The AutoCAD Plant 3D predefined mapping scheme provides a starting point for any customized mappings you require. In the following example, the P&ID class Gate Valve is mapped to the Plant 3D class Valve (gate). When you insert the Plant 3D Valve (gate), the mapped properties and their respective values become part of the model and are viewable in the Data Manager.

182 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

NOTE In this example, the value Jackson’s is not inserted in the model because the Supplier property has no mapping. P&ID Class

Plant 3D Class

Gate Valve

Valve (gate)

P&ID Property and Value

Plant 3D Property and Value

Description: A valve of the gate type

Description: A valve of the gate type

Manufacturer: Roper’s

Manufacturer: Roper’s

ModelNumber: 20303

ItemCode: 20303

Size:18”

Nominal diameter

Supplier (no mapping): Jackson’s

Supplier (no mapping)

NOTE Some Plant 3D properties are spec-based and thus unavailable for mapping. On the P&ID Mapping pane, under 3D Classes, Property Mapping, spec-based properties are marked with an asterisk (*). They are available for validation only.

View P&ID and Plant 3D Object Data in the Data Manager You can view current P&ID drawing data and the corresponding current Plant 3D drawing data in the Data Manager. Following is an example of the P&ID Line List showing drawing contents that you can place in a Plant 3D model.

Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties | 183

Following is an example of the P&ID valve information from the same drawing as shown in the Data Manager.

Following is an example of the corresponding Plant 3D valve information as shown in the Data Manager after the component has been placed in the model.

NOTE To view this type of comparison, you can set the Plant 3D Data Manager configuration to order the tree view by object type instead of area. See Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) on page 150

Map a P&ID Class to Multiple Plant 3D Classes You can map a P&ID class to more than one Plant 3D class. For example, in the default mapping scheme, the P&ID class Vessel is mapped both to the Plant 3D class Vessel and to Tank (Vessel).

184 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

To edit an existing mapping 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click P&ID Object Mapping. 3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, do the following: ■

Under P&ID Classes, expand the tree and click the desired P&ID object (for example: Gate Valve).

■

Under Plant 3D Classes, in the Plant 3D Class Mappings list, click the current mapping (for example: Valve Gate-Inline, Gate-Angle, Gate-3-Way).

■

Click Edit.

Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties | 185

4 In the Select Plant 3D Class Mapping dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Plant 3D Classes, expand the tree. Click a class (for example: Valve).

■

Select the Map To All Subtypes of This Class check box, or, under Map To One or More Specific Subtypes of This Class, select or clear appropriate check boxes.

■

Click OK.

5 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under Plant 3D Classes, in the Property Mapping table, do the following: ■

In the Plant 3D Property column, in the drop-down lists, click the appropriate values to adjust.

■

To set the validation process to check the property mappings for the mapped item, select the check box labeled Check This Item During 3D To PID Validation. To set the validation process to ignore the property mappings of this item, clear the check box. For more information on mapping and

186 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

validation, see Understand the Role of Tags During Validation on page 360. ■

Click OK.

To delete an existing mapping 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click P&ID Object Mapping. 3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, do the following: ■

Under P&ID Classes, expand the tree and click a P&ID object (for example: Gate Valve).

Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties | 187

■

Under Plant 3D Classes, in the Plant 3D Class Mappings list, click the current mapping (for example: Valve Gate-Inline, Gate-Angle, Gate-3-Way).

■

Click Delete.

■

When prompted to confirm the deletion, click Yes.

To map a new P&ID object to a Plant 3D object When a new P&ID object class is introduced during a project, you can map it to a corresponding Plant 3D object class. 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click P&ID Object Mapping.

188 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under P&ID Classes, expand the tree and click the new P&ID object (for example: New_Valve). 4 Under Plant 3D Classes, click Add.

5 In the Select Plant 3D Class Mapping dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Plant 3D Classes, expand the tree. Click a class (for example: Valve).

■

Select the Map To All Subtypes of This Class check box, or, under Map To One or More Specific Subtypes of This Class, select or clear appropriate check boxes.

■

Click OK.

Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties | 189

6 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under Plant 3D Classes, in the Property Mapping table, do the following: ■

In the Plant 3D Property column, in the drop-down list, click appropriate properties to correspond with properties in the P&ID Property column (for example: match Manufacturer to Manufacturer).

■

To set the validation process to check the property mappings for the mapped item, select the check box labeled Check This Item During 3D To PID Validation. To set the validation process to ignore the property mappings of this item, clear the check box. For more information on mapping and validation, see Understand the Role of Tags During Validation on page 360.

■

Click OK.

190 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

To create a new property mapping When a new P&ID property is added during a project, you can map it to a corresponding Plant 3D property. 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click P&ID Object Mapping. 3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under P&ID Classes, expand the tree, and click the P&ID object to which you have added a property (for example: Valve).

Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties | 191

4 Under Plant 3D Classes, in the Property Mapping table, do the following: ■

In the P&ID Property column, locate the property you have added (for example, Material).

■

In the Plant 3D Property column, in the drop-down list, click the corresponding 3D property (for example, Material).

5 Click OK.

192 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box P&ID Object Mapping (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects Class definitions specify the attributes and properties of Plant 3D objects. Class definitions are divided into the following families: ■

P3D Line Group. Includes line groups.

■

Piping and Equipment. Includes equipment, pipe run components, and fasteners.

■

Steel Structure. Includes structure members, railings, ladders, and so on.

Although you cannot add class definitions, you can modify the following properties: ■

Properties. The values assigned to a Plant 3D object class definition to determine how it looks and behaves in a 3D model, and the values that are attached to a Plant 3D object (such as default value, description, substitution, supported standards, and so on).

■

Tag format. The information that comprises a unique tag for a component or line.

■

Annotation format. The information that comprises an annotation for a Plant 3D object on an orthographic drawing.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 193

To modify a class definition for a Plant 3D object 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. 3 Continue to expand the list until you find the item (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment ➤ Heater) whose definition you want to change.

4 Under Properties, do the following: ■

Change the value for the Display Name property. (This information is displayed in the Data Manager.)

■

Change the value for the Default Value property.

■

Add or remove custom properties as needed for the class or line definition.

■

Change the values of other properties as needed (such as tagging format, annotation style, and so on).

194 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 Under Tag Format, add, modify, or remove tagging formats associated with the specified class or line definition. 6 Under Annotation, add, modify, or remove annotation styles associated with the specified class or line definition. 7 Click OK. To specify property visibility and read-only status for the Data Manager 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. 3 Continue to expand the list until you find the item whose property values you want to change (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment ➤ Heater).

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 195

4 Under Properties, do the following: ■

In the Read Only column, select the check boxes for those properties you want presented as read-only in the Data Manager.

■

In the Visible in Area View column, select the check boxes for those properties you want displayed in the Data Manager for tree views ordered by area. You can right-click and click Select All or Clear All as needed.

■

In the Visible Object View column, select the check boxes for those properties you want displayed in the Data Manager for tree views ordered by class (object type). You can right-click and click Select All or Clear All as needed.

5 Click OK.

196 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Plant 3D Class Definitions (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Set Up Properties (Plant 3D) You can set up properties, which store information about objects in a 3D drawing. Plant 3D objects contain properties that control how the objects look when placed into a Plant 3D drawing. These properties also store non-graphical information that can be extracted out of the drawing. Properties for a Plant 3D object class definition can be defined as one of the following data types: ■

String. Permits a free-form text value for a property.

■

Numeric. Verifies that only a positive or negative number is entered for a property.

■

Boolean. Permits a choice between true and false.

■

Symbol List. (unavailable for Plant 3D objects) Defines a list of choices that control the symbol for a component in a P&ID drawing. This option is available only for P&ID objects when more than one symbol is associated with a class.

■

Selection List. Defines a list of property values. If a value is not displayed in the predefined list, it can be entered as free-form text.

■

Acquisition. Defines a rule stating that a component property acquires its value from another property. For example, a rule states that a hand valve

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 197

acquires its size from the corresponding property of a line. The source can be chosen from class, project, or drawing properties. NOTE When you set up properties for a project, make sure no one else is accessing that project. If others are working in the project, your changes are not saved.

To add a property to a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definition whose property you want to add.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add.

198 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property. The name cannot contain any spaces.

■

Under Display Name, enter the name you want to be displayed for the new property when using the Data Manager or Properties palette.

■

Under Choose a Type, choose one of the available data types.

6 Click OK. If you specified Selection List or Symbol List, the appropriate dialog box is displayed to let you create either a selection list or symbol list. If you specified Acquisition, the Select Data Source dialog box is displayed, where you specify the source from which the property value is acquired. 7 Click OK. To modify a property for a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definition whose property you want to edit.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 199

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate and click the property you want to edit. Do one of the following: ■

Under Property Description, click the box and enter a new description.

■

Under Default Value, either click the box and enter a new value or, in the drop-down list, click a value. If the default value is Acquisition, in the drop-down list, click an appropriate item.

■

If the property type is List, click Edit to change the selection or symbol list that is assigned to the property.

■

Under Acquisition, click the [...] button and click Add Acquisition Rule. In the Select Data Source dialog box, specify the source where the property value is acquired.

NOTE To change the name of the property or its type, delete the property and then add it again. 5 Click OK. To delete a property from a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings.

200 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definition whose property you want to delete. 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate and click the property you want to delete. Click Remove. NOTE You can delete the property only if it is defined at the specified class level. If the property is inherited from a parent class, the Remove button is unavailable. 5 In the Confirm Delete message, click Yes. 6 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Properties (Plant 3D Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Property Acquisition When you specify Acquisition as a property type, you set up a rule stating that the property acquires its value from another property. The acquisition source can be another class, project, or drawing property. Acquisition ensures consistency among component property values. If the source value changes, all components set to acquire that value change as well. Property acquisition is also useful for maintaining consistent tagging. When you change a source value, tag formats that are based on acquired properties update automatically throughout the project.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 201

Understand Property Acquisition Rules You can choose without restriction any drawing property or project property as the source of an acquisition rule. Class properties, however, because they are specification-based, would rarely be set up to acquire values from other properties. If, however, you do specify a class property as the source, make sure that the acquiring class and the source class are connected. You can set up property acquisition rules when the following relationships exist: ■

Pipe Run Component and P3D Line Group

■

Fasteners and P3D Line Group

■

Nozzles and Equipment

The following properties have acquisition rules set by default. You can view them when you create a new project: Acquisition Property

Source Property

PipeRunComponent.InsulationThickness

P3dLineGroup.InsulationThickness

PipeRunComponent.InsulationType

P3dLineGroup.InsulationType

PipeRunCompoment.Service

P3dLineGroup.Service

Fasterners.InsulationThickness

P3dLineGroup.InsulationThickness

Fasteners.InsulationType

P3dLineGroup.InsulationType

Fasterners.Service

P3dLineGroup.Service

Equipment.Area

Drawing.General.Area

Understand Acquire Mode and Override Mode A property that is set to acquire its value from another property is in Acquire mode. However, you can switch this property into Override mode and edit the value manually. Once a property is in Override mode, its value is no longer acquired from another source.

202 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

In the program, an icon next to the property indicates whether the property is in Override mode or Acquire mode. The icons appear in the Properties palette, the Data Manager, and the Assign Tag dialog box. When the Override icon is displayed, you can edit the value.

■

The property is in Acquire mode.

■

The property is in Override mode

Understand Initialization Only Select Acquisition (the default) to set up a property to acquire its value from another property. You can also specify Initialization Only, which sets the acquisition to occur only once (when the component is first initialized). After initialization, the property switches to Override mode. When the property is in Override mode, you can edit the value manually because it is no longer acquired from another source. To set up a new property acquisition rule 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definition whose property acquisition rule you want to create (for example: Pipe Run Component ➤ Valve). 4 In the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 203

5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Property Name, enter the property name (for example: PipelineDescription).

■

Under Display Name, enter the new property name you want displayed in the Data Manager or the Properties palette (for example: PipelineDescription).

■

Under Choose A Type, click Acquisition. Click OK.

204 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

6 In the Select Data Source dialog box, on the Class Properties tab, do the following: ■

Under Categories, locate and click an item (for example: P3d Line Group).

■

Under Properties, click a property (for example: Description). Click OK.

7 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. To add an acquisition rule for an existing property 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class containing the property whose acquisition property you want to change (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment).

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 205

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, click a property (for example: Type). 5 In the Acquisition column, click in the box, and then click the [...] button. Click Add Acquisition Rule.

6 In the Select Data Source dialog box, on the Class Properties tab, do the following: ■

Under Categories, expand Piping and Equipment.

■

Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Pipe Run Component ➤ Pipe).

■

Under Properties, click a property (for example: InsulationType). Click OK.

7 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK.

206 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

To edit an acquisition rule for a property 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whose property you want to change (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Pipe Run Component ➤ Pipe). 4 On the Class Settings pane, Under Properties, locate the property whose acquisition rule you want to edit. 5 In the Acquisition column, click in the box, and then click the [...] button. Click Add Acquisition Rule.

6 In the Select Data Source dialog box, on the Class Properties tab, do the following: ■

Under Categories, expand Piping and Equipment.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 207

■

Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Pipe Run Component ➤ Pipe).

■

Under Properties, click a property (for example: InsulationType). Click OK.

7 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. To remove an acquisition rule from a property 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whose property you want to change (for example: Pipe Run Component ➤ Valve). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate the property whose acquisition rule you want to remove. 5 In the Acquisition column, click in the box, and then click the [...] button. Click Remove Acquisition Rule. 6 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK. To override an acquisition property You can override an acquisition property using the Data Manager or the Properties palette. The following steps describe overriding an acquisition property using the Properties palette. 1 In a drawing, right-click the Plant 3D object whose acquisition rule you want to override. Click Properties. 2 In the Properties palette, locate the property you want to change. Click the field in the right column.

3

Click Acquire Mode. In the flyout menu, click Override Mode.

4 Enter a new value. 5 Close the Properties Palette.

208 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

NOTE When you export data from the Data Manager to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, you can change the values of properties that are in Acquire mode in Excel. When you import the file into the Data Manager and accept the changes, the new values are displayed and the properties are automatically changed to Override mode. See Import Modified Acquisition Properties on page 531

To change how an existing property acquisition rule is applied 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D Class Definitions. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whose property you want to change (for example: Pipe Run Component Valve). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, locate the InsulationThickness property row. In the Default Value column, click the box to display the drop-down list. Do either of the following: ■

To set the property so that it always acquires its value from Pipe3dLineGroup.InsulationThickness, click Acquisition (the default).

■

To set the property so that its value is acquired once (when a valve is first initialized), click Initialization Only. NOTE After initialization, a valve's property value changes to Override mode. Users can edit the property value.

In the Acquisition column, the valve size is displayed as acquired from Pipe3dLineGroup.InsulationThicknessness. If Pipe3dLineGroup.InsulationThickness has a value of 3”, that value appears in the Data Manager for this valve. 5 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 209

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Properties (Plant 3D Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Selection Lists Use selection lists to enforce standard sizes for items such as piping specs, piping sizes, and instrument types, or when you want designers to choose from a predefined set of options.

Understand Selection Lists AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a set of selection lists. You can add your own items or delete items that are not relevant to your drafting environment. In the Data Manager, designers can also enter their own values in the lists. As part of your project setup tasks, you can set up new selection lists or change the values of an existing list. To create a selection list 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a Plant 3D object class definition (for example: Piping and Equipment). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add.

210 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following; ■

Under Type, click Selection List.

■

Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property (for example: Pump_Manufacturers). The name cannot contain any spaces.

■

Under Display Name, enter the name you want to be displayed for the new property (for example: Pump Manufacturers) in the Data Manager or Properties palette.

6 Click OK. 7 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click New Selection List.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 211

8 In the Add Selection List dialog box, enter the name for the new selection list (for example: Manufacturers). Click OK. 9 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click Add Row.

10 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value (for example: Goulds) and a description of the value, if necessary. 11 Continue adding rows until the selection list is complete. 12 Click OK. On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, the selection list is displayed for the selected class definition. The value displayed in the list is the default value for that Plant 3D object.

212 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

To modify or delete items in a selection list 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a class definition (for example: Piping and Equipment). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, click the property containing the selection list you want to modify. Click Edit. 5 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click the property whose data you want to change (for example: Manufacturers). 6 Click Add Row.

7 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value and a description of the new selection list entry (for example: Bechtel). Click OK. In the Selection List Property dialog box, under Value, the new selection list entry is added. 8 In the Selection List Property dialog box, select a value (for example: Goulds). Click Delete Row. 9 In the Confirm Delete message, click Yes. 10 Click OK to close each dialog box.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 213

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Selection List Property Dialog Box (Properties)

Set Up Tag Formatting (Plant 3D) You can set up tag formats to help designers apply tag elements consistently throughout a project cycle. Many projects require specific tag numbering formats for different Plant 3D object. You can define different tag numbering formats for your projects. You can set up tag formats for equipment, valves, nozzles, instrumentation, pipe lines, and pipe line groups by creating new tag formats or modifying existing formats. You select an existing format on which to base the new format. You can also create a new tag format.

Set Up Tag Formatting for a Class Tag formats are set up for a class definition project-wide. Most of the default tag formats tag items at the class definition level (for example: a class definition type, such as equipment). You can use the property of a class, drawing, or project in the tag format. For example, a tag for a component can contain a class property such as Spec, a drawing property such as Area, or a project property such as Project Number. Tag formats are flexible. You can set them up to reflect the specific needs of your company.

214 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Set Up Tag Formatting Using Acquiring Properties Tag formats can include properties that acquire their values from other properties. For example, if a line acquires its Unit value from a project-level property, you can use that acquiring property in the tag format. If the Unit value at the project level changes, all tags with that property as a subpart are updated to reflect that change.

Set Up Tag Formatting for a Pipe Line Group Pipes are the only components that are automatically grouped. Although pipe line groups are not physical entities, you set up tag formatting for pipe line groups just as you would for any other component. The default tag format for a pipe line group is Line Number. You can add other properties as needed (for example: Service).

Understand Default Tag Formatting Templates AutoCAD Plant 3D provides the following tag format templates for you to use or modify to fit with your company tag formatting standards: ■

Equipment tag (Type-Number). Defined by default with a type property and a number (for example: P-100).

■

Equipment tag 2 (Area-Type-Number). Defined by default with an area property, type property, and number (for example: 25-P-1000).

■

Hand valve tag (Code-Number). Defined by default with two letters representing a valve code and a number (for example: HV-100).

■

Nozzle tag (N-Number). Defined by default with one or more letters representing a nozzle code and a number (for example: N-1).

■

Instrumentation tag (Area-Type-Number). Defined by default with an area, type, and loop number (for example: 51-PT-100).

■

Line number tag. Defined by default with a line number (for example: 100).

■

Pipeline tag (Size-Spec-Service-Line Number). Defined by default with size value, spec, service, and line number (for example: 6"-C1-P-10014).

Build Tag Formatting Expressions You can define how tag elements are expressed. For example, you can create an instrument tag of Area-Type-Loop Number_Suffix (for example:

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 215

25-FE-1002_A). You can control the formatting of the values that can be assigned when tagging a component or line through expressions. Using expressions, you can designate whether a value must be entered as text characters, numbers, or any combination of text characters and numbers (free-style value). You can also define an expression to generate a value automatically when a designer adds a component to a drawing. You can set automatic expressions to a drawing property or project property.

Understand Tag Uniqueness In general, a tag property must be unique. Even items of different types must have unique tags. For example, if you assign the tag A-123 to a pump, you cannot assign the identical tag to a tank. Two exceptions to tag uniqueness are as follows: ■

Line segment tags can be identical. The tag properties of a line group must be unique, but the tag properties of the line segments within that line group can be the same.

■

A large component that stretches across drawings can have duplicate tags. Duplicate tags can represent different parts of the same item. For example, a line that spans drawings using an off-page connector can have the same tag in each drawing.

To create a tag format 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings.

216 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a Plant 3D object (for example: Compressor). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format type on which you want to base the new tag format (for example: Equipment Tag [Type-Number]). Click New.

5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (for example: Equipment Tag [type-number] New).

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 217

6 In the Number of Subparts box, enter a number for how many subparts you want in the tag (for example: 3) or click the Up or Down arrow until the number is displayed. TIP Use as many properties as subparts as needed. Use delimiters only between these subparts, not within them. Delimiters appear between the subparts in a tag if you place them in the Delimiter box. Entering a dash between items in the Field box (for example, N-N-N) can produce unexpected results.

7

In the first row of icons, click Select Class Properties (the first icon on the left).

8 In the Select Class Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Class, click Equipment.

■

Under Property, click Type.

■

Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property.

■

Click OK.

218 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

9

In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the second row of icons, click Select Drawing Properties.

10 In the Select Drawing Property dialog box, do the following:

11

■

Under Category, click General.

■

Under Drawing Properties, click Drawing Area.

■

Click OK.

In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the second row of icons, click Define Expression (the last icon in the row).

12 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Results, click No Expression (Free Style Value). Click OK.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 219

13

In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the third row of icons, click Define Expression.

14 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Expression, do the following: ■

Click Numbers.

■

Select the Fixed Length check box. In the Fixed Length box, enter a number or click the Up arrow until the number is displayed.

NOTE If the Expression section is disabled: under Result, clear the check box for No Expression (Free Style Value). Then follow the directions in step 14.

220 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

15 Click OK. 16 In the Tag Format dialog box, under Delimiter, enter a delimiter where appropriate. In the example below, a period (.) is used as the delimiter for General.Area[]. NOTE Do not place a delimiter in the Field box.

17 Click OK. 18 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, click TagFormatName. 19 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in the drop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging the Plant 3D object.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 221

20 Click OK. You created a new tag format and assigned it to a Plant 3D object. When you use the Plant 3D object in a drawing, the Assign Tag dialog box prompts you to enter tag data for the tag format you created in this procedure. To create a tag format for pipe line groups 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the item you want to tag (for example: P3d Line Groups). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format type on which you want to base the new tag format (for example: Line Number), and then click New. 5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (for example: P3d Line Groups - Service).

■

In the Name of Subparts box, enter the number of subparts you want in the tag (for example: 2), or click the Up arrow until the number 2 is displayed.

■

In the bottom row of icons, click Select Class Properties (the first icon on the left).

6 In the Select Class Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Class, click Pipe Line Groups.

■

Under Property, click a property (for example: Service).

■

Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property. Click OK.

7 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click OK. 8 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, locate TagFormatName.

222 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

9 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in the drop-don list, click the tag format you want to use (for example: select P3d Line Groups - Service). 10 Click OK. To assign a tag format to a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings.

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag format whose class definition you want to assign. 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, locate TagFormatName. 5 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in the drop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging a Plant 3D object. 6 Click OK. To modify a tag format for a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 223

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings.

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag formatting you want to change. 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format you want to modify.

5 Click Modify. 6 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, make the desired changes to the tag format. Click OK.

7 Click OK.

224 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

To remove a tag format from a class definition 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings.

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag formatting you want to delete. 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format you want to delete.

5 Click Delete. NOTE If the selected tag format is either in a drawing that is part of the project or is currently assigned to a Plant 3D object, a message is displayed, informing you that this tag format cannot be deleted. 6 In the Confirm Delete message, click Yes. 7 Click OK.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 225

To add automatically generated drawing properties 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a Plant 3D object class definition (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click New.

5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (for example: Alt_Equip_Tag).

■

In the Number of Subparts box, enter a number or click the arrows until the desired number of subparts is displayed.

■

Click the Expression icon (the last icon in the row).

■

6 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Autogenerate, do the following: ■

Select the Autogenerate Expression check box.

226 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

■

■

Click Drawing Field.

Click the Drawing icon.

7 In the Select Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.

8 In the New Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Name, enter the name for the new property.

■

Under Description, enter a description for the new property.

9 Click OK until the Project Setup dialog box is displayed. In the Project Setup dialog box, under Tag Format, the new tag is added.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 227

To add automatically generated project properties 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a Plant 3D object class definition (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click New.

228 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (for example: Alt_Equip_Tag).

■

In the Number of Subparts box, enter a number or click the arrows until the desired number of subparts is displayed.

■

Click the Expression icon (the last icon in the row).

6 In the Define Expression dialog box, do the following: ■

■

Under Autogenerate, select the Autogenerate Expression check box. Click Project Field.

Click the Project icon.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 229

7 In the Select Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.

8 In the New Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Name box, enter the name for the new property.

■

In the Description box, enter a description for the new property.

■

In the Last Used Value box, enter the value to use for the last value for the new property.

■

In the Increment Value box, enter the increment value for the new property.

9 Click OK until all open dialog boxes are closed.

230 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Tag Format (Plant 3D Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Annotations for Orthographic Drawings You can place formatted annotation text on an orthographic drawing. You can create an annotation format that is based on an existing annotation format or create a new annotation format. NOTE Annotations are available for Equipment, Pipe Run Components, and P3D Line Group classes only. To create an annotation format 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Project Setup. 2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. 3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a Plant 3D object (for example: Valve). 4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, click the annotation format on which you want to base the new format. Click New.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 231

5 In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, in the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (for example: New Hand Valve Annotation).

6 In the Number of Subparts box, enter a number for how many subparts you want in the tag (for example: 3) or click the Up or Down arrow until the number is displayed.

7

In the first row of icons, click Select Class Properties.

8 In the Select Class Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Class, click Valve.

■

Under Property, click Material.

■

Click OK.

232 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

9

In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, for the second row of icons, click Select Drawing Properties (the second icon).

10 In the Select Drawing Property dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Category, click General.

■

Under Drawing Properties, click a property (for example: Drawing Area).

■

Click OK.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 233

11

In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, for the second row of icons, click Define Expression.

12 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Results, select the check box for No Expression (Free Style Value). Click OK.

234 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

13

In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, for the third row of icons, click Define Expression.

14 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Expression, do the following: ■

Click Numbers.

■

Select the Fixed Length check box. In the Fixed Length box, enter a number or click the Up arrow until the number is displayed.

NOTE If the Expression section is disabled: under Result, clear the check box for No Expression (Free Style Value). Then follow the directions in step 14.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 235

15 Click OK. 16 In the Annotation Format dialog box, under Delimiter, enter a delimiter where appropriate. In the example below, a period (.) is used as the delimiter for General.Area[]. NOTE Do not place a delimiter in the Field box.

17 Click OK. 18 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name column, click AnnotationFormatName. 19 In the AnnotationFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in the drop-down list, click the annotation format you want to use.

236 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

20 Click OK.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 237

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager Project Setup Dialog Box Annotation Format for Orthographic Drawings (Plant 3D Class Definitions Tree Node)

Point Users to the Project Location When you have completed the project configuration, you are ready to point users to the project location to start their designing. To point users to the project location The simplest way to notify your users about how to access the project directory is to send email instructions. At a minimum, the instructions should include the location of the project and instructions about changing the project file locations. Provide users with the following procedure. 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤ Open Project. 2 In the Open dialog box, browse to the location of the project, and select the project.xml file. 3 Click OK.

238 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Organize Project Drawings

3

After you have set up the project environment, you can use the Project Manager to assemble and organize project drawings.

Overview: Organize Project Drawings You can use the Project Manager to open a project, organize project files, and ensure that all project team members have a consistent working environment.

Understand the Project Manager Using the Project Manager, you can assemble all project drawings and documents in a centralized storage area. You can copy files into project folders or link them to the project. Linked files can exist elsewhere on the server or on a local file system. Either method ensures that all project files are available to project members. You can also publish project drawings from the Project Manager.

239

The Project Manager has three tabs, each with a predefined structure that keeps various types of files segregated and easy to access. You can create folders or subfolders within the existing structure. The Source Files tab includes the following default folders: ■

P&ID Drawings. Contains schematic drawings

■

Plant 3D Drawings. Contains Plant 3D models

■

Related Files. Contains supplemental reference files, including documents, spreadsheets, or generic AutoCAD drawings.

The Orthographic DWG and Isometric tabs provide access to your orthographic and isometric drawings. Organize the project using these steps: ■

Open a new or existing project.

■

Assemble the files that belong to a project by linking or copying them to the project. Add or include referenced files, as needed. The resulting project tree is an organizational tool that helps you find related drawings

240 | Chapter 3 Organize Project Drawings

no matter where they reside physically. When you select a parent drawing, xrefs appear as child nodes. ■

If necessary, create new folders and subfolders to organize files in logical groupings. By grouping related files in a folder, you can quickly select all files for specific tasks.

■

Set properties for drawings. You can set up a drawing number, title, area, author, and description, and any other properties set up by your project administrator.

Set Up the Project Files Start a new project by choosing a template, assembling the project drawings, and organizing the drawings into logical groups.

Create a Project Start a project by duplicating an existing project or creating a project from a standard template.

Create a Project Based on an Existing Project In most cases, project templates are set up by a CAD manager or another person in your company who is responsible for defining drawing standards. The templates are existing projects whose configuration settings meet company standards. When you start a new project, you can designate another project as the template, and then set the name and location for your new project. The new project inherits the settings from the project used as a template. As you start a project, you can also update the properties that are defined for these templates. Before updating these properties, make sure that you check with your CAD manager to find out about your company requirements.

Create a Project When you create a project, you specify the name, description, and location of the various project files. If you are creating a P&ID project, you can choose the appropriate standard (for example, PIP, ISA, ISO, DIN, and JIS/ISO). To create a new project, see Set Up a New Project on page 7. For information about specifying these settings, see Create and Configure a Project on page 7.

Set Up the Project Files | 241

Include Referenced Drawings (Xrefs) You can attach a drawing to the current drawing as a referenced drawing (xref).

Understand Referencing Drawings Attached xrefs are linked to a drawing rather than being inserted into it. For example, you can create a project drawing that contains little, if any, piping content but has references to many other piping drawings. This drawing is a “master” drawing that shows several individual piping drawings in appropriate relationship to one another. You can reference files using two basic methods: ■

Reference a drawing to an existing project drawing.

■

Add a drawing to a project that has xrefs already associated with it.

When you click the drawing to which a referenced drawing is associated, the xref appears as a child node. (If the xref is a drawing that exists in the project, it does not appear as a child node.) When you attach an xref, follow these guidelines: ■

Make sure that the xref belongs to the project to which it is attached.

■

Attach basic AutoCAD drawings only to P&ID drawings.

■

Make sure referenced drawings share a schema with the host drawing. For example, attach an xref to a P&ID drawing only from a P&ID drawing. Attach an xref to a Plant 3D drawing only from a Plant 3D drawing.

■

Attach all xrefs at a 0,0,0 origin for Plant 3D drawings.

■

Do not use the AutoCAD command refedit with plant objects (pipes, fittings, and so on).

■

Attaching a drawing as an xref does not create additional data cache rows. The xref is a reference only.

■

Use the AutoCAD command xref-bind to copy a referenced drawing into a Plant 3D drawing. This action does create new rows in the data cache. NOTE Only drawings that adhere to these guidelines can be opened or added to a Plant 3D project.

242 | Chapter 3 Organize Project Drawings

If you do not know how to reference a drawing, see “Reference Other Drawing Files” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders As you assemble your project files, you can link or copy the files to their respective folders on the Source Files tab of the Project Manager. You can also reference other drawings as xrefs.

Link or Copy Files You can either link or copy files to a project or use a combination of copying and linking, depending on your requirements. When you link a file: ■

The linked file remains in its original location with a reference to it in the project.

■

If you are referencing many drawings rather than creating new ones, you can save disk space.

■

The file can be referenced to one project only.

When you copy a file: ■

The copied file is physically placed in the project root folder.

■

It is a separate file, not connected to the original, and can thus belong to more than one project.

Link or Copy Files With External References (xrefs) You can either link or copy files with xrefs to a project, but linking is the recommended method. When you link a file with xrefs: ■

The linked file remains in its original location with a reference to it in the project.

■

If you are referencing many drawings rather than creating new ones, you can save disk space.

■

The file can be referenced to one project only.

Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders | 243

■

The process takes a relatively short time.

When you copy a file with xrefs: ■

All xrefs and nested xrefs are copied to the project 3D drawings folder.

■

The host drawing xref links are removed as the drawing now exists in the same folder as the xrefs.

■

The process takes longer than the linking process.

To link or copy existing drawings to the project 1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a destination folder (for example, P&ID Drawings). 2 Click either Link To Drawing or Copy Drawing To Project. 3 In the Select Files dialog box, locate and click the drawing you want to copy or link to the project. Click Open. NOTE If you click a drawing with a read-only status, change that status to read-write before opening the file. 4 Repeat these steps until you have copied or linked all project drawings. To resolve issues that prevent opening read-only files You cannot add a drawing that has a read-only status. Before you open the drawing, make sure no one else has opened it, or turn off the Read-Only attribute in Windows Explorer. 1 Attempt to link or copy an existing drawing to a project. If the drawing has a read-only status, the Read-Only DWG Error dialog box is displayed. Read-only status results from one of the following conditions: ■

Another designer has the drawing open. Click OK. Request that the designer close the drawing and go to step 3.

■

The Read-Only attribute has been set for the drawing. Click OK and go to step 2.

2 To change the read-only status of the drawing, in Windows Explorer, right-click the file. Click Properties.

244 | Chapter 3 Organize Project Drawings

3 In the Properties dialog box (Windows), in the Attributes section, clear the Read-Only check box. Click OK. To start a new drawing from within a project 1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a destination folder (for example, P&ID Drawings). 2 Click New Drawing. 3 In the New DWG dialog box, under Drawing Properties, do the following: ■

In the DWG Number box, enter the number of the drawing.

■

In the DWG Title box, enter the title of the drawing. NOTE The DWG Number and Title you enter is duplicated in the File Name box.

■

To use a different file name, enter it in the File Name box.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Project Manager tree view, locate and right-click the drawing you created. Click Properties. 6 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Area box, enter the plant area documented in this drawing.

■

In the Description box, enter a description of the drawing.

7 Click OK. To remove a drawing from a project 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing you want to remove. Click Remove Drawing. 2 To confirm the removal, in the Remove Drawings From Project message, click OK. The drawing is removed from the project tree, but it is not removed from your computer. NOTE If you intend to reuse this drawing later, make sure that you save the drawing before you remove the drawing from the project.

Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders | 245

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Organize Project Files Arrange files in the Project Manager to provide easy access to the drawings in your project.

Use Folders to Organize Drawings Grouping related drawings into folders within the Project Manager helps you catalog them for easier reference. The folders you create in the Project manager are virtual folders, defined for your project in the .xml file. NOTE The default folders cannot be changed or removed, but you can create additional nested folders under them. The default folders on the Source Files tab are labeled P&ID Drawings, Plant 3D Drawings, and Related Files.

Understand Absolute Paths and Relative Paths in the Project Manager How you set up the folder structure depends on how you plan to work. If you are in a multi-user environment where everyone accesses the same network locations, you can set up absolute paths, which define specific folder locations. NOTE If you define a folder path on a virtual drive, make sure that all project members map the network location to the same drive letter. If you plan to transmit project files to someone without access to your network, set up a relative path. A relative path retains the project folder hierarchy when it is copied to another system.

246 | Chapter 3 Organize Project Drawings

To create a folder 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click an existing folder. Click New Folder.

2 In the Project Folder Properties dialog box, enter the folder name. 3 To specify the type of folder path, do one of the following: ■

To specify a relative path, select the check box labeled Create Folders Relative to Parent Folder Storage Location. The folder paths retain the same folder hierarchy, even when the project files are moved to another computer.

■

To specify an absolute path, clear the check box labeled Create Folders Relative to Parent Folder Storage Location. Under Store New Project DWG Files In, click [...]. In the Browse For Folder dialog box, find and click a folder. Click Open.

4 To specify how default templates are assigned for drawings in the folder, do one of the following: ■

To set a specific template for each folder, clear the Prompt For Template check box. Under DWG Creation Template For Folder, click [...]. In the Browse For Folder dialog box, find and click a folder. Click Open.

■

To prompt for a template for each new drawing, select the Prompt for Template check box. Use this option if you use different project templates for different projects.

5 Click OK.

Organize Project Files | 247

To rename a folder 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a folder. Click Rename Folder. 2 In the Project Folder Properties dialog box, under Folder Name, enter a new name for the folder. 3 Click OK. To remove an empty folder ■

In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the folder you want to remove. Click Remove Folder.

NOTE This option is not available for default folders or folders that contain content or other nested folders. To change the order of drawings or folders in a project ■

In the Project Manager tree view, click a folder or drawing and drag it to the new location in the tree hierarchy. A long bar bounded on either end by arrows indicates the insertion location.

To insert a drawing in a folder or create nested folders 1 In the Project Manager tree view, click the folder or drawing that you want to move and drag it directly over another folder. A single arrow on the right end of the name of the folder or file indicates the parent node for the node you are moving. 2 Release the button to place the drawing or folder.

248 | Chapter 3 Organize Project Drawings

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Set Drawing Properties You can update drawing properties, such as title and author.

Set Drawing Properties You can set properties, which include the drawing title, the drawing number, the author, the project area, and a short description of the drawing. The drawing title you enter in the Drawing Properties dialog box is displayed in the Project Manager. If you change the title, you do not change the file name. TIP You can automate the insertion of drawing properties into title blocks. For more information, see Add Project Data to a Drawing on page 255.

Set Values for Automatic Numbering of Components (P&ID drawings only) The components you add to your drawing can be sequentially numbered. Using an advanced feature of the program (in the Project Setup dialog box), the system administrator can set which components are subject to numbering. However, as you assemble drawings for the project, you can also assign the following values in the Drawing Autogen Properties dialog box: ■

A starting ID number for components added to the selected drawing

■

The amount by which each newly signed ID number is increased when a component is added to the drawing

Set Drawing Properties | 249

For example, within a project, you can set up batches of numbers. In on project drawing, for example, valve numbering starts at 100 and increases by 5 each time a valve is added. Another drawing starts at 200, and so on. To set drawing properties 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Properties. 2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, enter the following information: ■

DWG Title. Displays the name of the selected drawing file as it appears in the project tree (Project Manager).

■

DWG Number. Sets a value corresponding to the number typically placed on the title block for the drawing.

■

Author. Specifies the name of the person who created the drawing.

■

Description. Specifies information about the contents of the drawing.

■

Drawing Area. Specifies the plant area documented in this drawing.

3 Click OK. To add a drawing number to a drawing 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Properties. 2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, in the DWG Number box, enter a drawing number. 3 Click OK.

250 | Chapter 3 Organize Project Drawings

To set values for automatic component numbering (P&ID drawings only) 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a P&ID drawing. Click Drawing Autogen Properties. 2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, enter the following information for each component listed: ■

Last Used Value. Number that represents the starting point for the number of that component in the selected drawing.

■

Increment. The amount by which the ID number increases whenever a new component is added.

3 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Set Drawing Properties | 251

252

Work in a Project Environment

4

You can create drawings from within a project environment. The project environment ensures that you and other designers are working with the same drawing files, data, and templates.

Overview: The Project Environment The work you do to create and share drawings is initiated from within the Project Manager.

Work with Project Drawings Before you open a drawing, you can preview it, refresh the status to see who else is working on it, and add notes and status information.

Open a Project The Project Manager displays the last project you opened. You can start work immediately, switch to a recent project, or search for another project. NOTE If you attempt to open a project that was created in a previous version, migrate the project first. For more information, see Migrate Projects and Drawings on page 575.

253

To open a project ■

In the Project Manager, open the drop-down list and click the file name of the project you want to open.

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager drop-down menu ➤ Open Project Command entry: OPENPROJECT

Quick Reference Commands OPENPROJECT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Get Ready to Design As you get ready to design, review the project to make sure that the drawings are ready for editing. ■

Preview the drawing. Make sure that you are opening the correct drawing by clicking the Preview button in the bottom toolbar.

■

Refresh drawing status. Quickly display the editing status of the drawings in the project by clicking the Refresh DWG Status button on the Project toolbar. The drawing icon in the Project Manager represents the drawing status. The drawing status is displayed as follows: ■

Available.

■

Locked. it.

The drawing can be opened for editing. The drawing is already open and you cannot open or edit

254 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

■

Missing.

The drawing has been moved or removed.

To open a project drawing ■

In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Open.

To view a project drawing in read-only mode ■

In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Open Read-Only.

To preview drawings in the Project Manager 1 In the Project Manager tree view, click the drawing you want to preview. 2 In the Project Manager, on the bottom toolbar, click Preview.

Quick Reference Commands OPENPROJECT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Add Project Data to a Drawing You can use fields to add and update project data. Each drawing in your project possesses properties that you can add to your drawing title block or other areas of your drawing. Use the FIELD command to add properties.

Add Project Data to a Drawing | 255

When a field or block containing a field is inserted into a drawing, the field automatically contains data obtained from the properties stored with the drawing. To add a drawing status field into to a drawing 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Open. 2 On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Field. 3 In the Field dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Field Category list, click Project.

■

Under Field Names, click CurrentDwgStatus.

■

Under Format, click Title Case.

■

Click OK.

4 Click in the drawing area where you want to display the drawing status. NOTE The drawing status is displayed as until you assign a status to the drawing in the Work History dialog box.

To update the drawing status field in a drawing 1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a drawing that already contains an inserted field. 2 In the Project Manager, on the bottom toolbar, click Work History.

3 Under Status, in the drop-down list, click a status (for example: In Progress, For Review, Revision 1, Revision 2, and so on). 4 Save the drawing.

256 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

NOTE If you change the status during a drawing session, save the drawing to update the status field.

To set drawing or project data in a title block 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing that you want to use as the basis for your title block. Click Open. 2 On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Field. 3 In the Field dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Field Category drop-down list, click Project.

■

Under Field Names, click CurrentDwgTitle.

■

Under Format, click the desired display format.

■

Click OK.

4 Click the area of the title block reserved for the drawing title to position the field. 5 Repeat steps 2-4 to place fields for other drawing data (such as the drawing number or the project name). 6 Save the drawing. To use a title block containing field information 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Open. 2 At the Command prompt, enter insert. 3 In the Insert dialog box, click Browse. 4 In the Select Drawing File dialog box, locate and click a drawing to use as the title block. Click Open. 5 In the Insert dialog box, under Insertion Point, make sure the Specify On-Screen check box is selected. Click OK. 6 Place the title block in your current drawing. To update fields stored in a title block 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing that contains the title block you want to update. Click Properties.

Add Project Data to a Drawing | 257

2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, change the drawing properties as needed. Click OK. 3 At the Command prompt, enter regen.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Add Status Notes About a Drawing You can add status notes when you open or close a drawing, depending on how the Work History settings are configured. The Work History dialog box tracks your comments. It is not a mechanism for storing, retrieving, or controlling versions of a drawing. NOTE If the Work History dialog box is not displayed when you open or close a drawing, the project was configured with work history prompting turned off. For more information, see Configure General Settings on page 10. Your project administrator can configure the Work History dialog box to be displayed when you open or close a drawing, or not at all.

258 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

To add status and notes to the Work History 1 Under Status, in the drop-down list, select a status. 2 In the Notes box, enter a description of the changes you made or are planning to make to the drawing. 3 Click OK. NOTE If the Work History dialog box is not displayed when you open or close a drawing, the project was configured with work history prompting turned off. For more information, see Configure General Settings on page 10

To view Work History status for a drawing 1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a drawing. 2 In the Project Manager, on the bottom toolbar, click Work History.

Add Status Notes About a Drawing | 259

3 Under Status, view the drawing status. To refresh drawing status ■

In the Project Manager, on the Project toolbar, click Refresh DWG Status.

The drawing status icons are updated to indicate their current editing status: ■

Locked.

The file cannot be opened; another designer is editing it.

■

Missing.

The drawing has been moved or removed.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Save Project Drawings You can save a drawing or the entire project.

260 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

Information about the content and organization of project files is stored in a project.xml file in the location that was designated when the project was created. Any changes you make to project settings are incorporated into this file. To save a single project drawing ■

In the Project Manager tree view, click a drawing. Click Application menu ➤ Save or press CTRL+S.

To save all drawings in a project ■

In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a project and click Resave All Project Drawings.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Manage Work History Tracking Use the work history to record who has worked on a drawing, modifications made, and the current review status. Your administrator sets the timing for the work history status and comments. This setting determines whether work history is updated when the drawing is opened, when it is closed, or not at all. To manage work history status 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Open.

Manage Work History Tracking | 261

NOTE If the Work History dialog box is not displayed when you open or close a drawing, the project was configured with work history prompting turned off. For more information, see Configure General Settings on page 10 2 In the Work History dialog box, in the Status list, click Manage. 3 In the Project Status Manager dialog box, do one of the following. ■

To add a new status, click New. In the New Status dialog box, in the Name box, enter a new status name. Click Ok.

■

To rename an existing status, under Refined Statuses, click a status name. Click Rename.

■

To delete an existing status, under Refined Statuses, click the status name and click Delete. Click Close.

4 Click OK. To display and sort the work history for a drawing 1 In the Project Manager tree view, click the drawing whose work history status you want to view. 2 In the Project Manager, on the bottom toolbar, click Work History. 3 To sort the list alphabetically by user or chronologically by date, click the appropriate column heading. (You cannot sort the status list.)

262 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Manage Project Files Remotely You can edit a project drawing outside of the project environment and synchronize it when you return it to the environment. When you work on drawings at home or at a client location, you do not have access to the project network environment. You can use the Project Manager to remove the file, edit the file remotely, and use the Project Manager again to return it. You can also copy files using Microsoft Windows Explorer. When you open a file that has been copied using Explorer and edited remotely, you may encounter a message asking you to resolve discrepancies. To remove a file from the project environment using the Project Manager ■

In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing you want to remove. Click Remove Drawing.

To return a file to the project environment using the Project Manager ■

In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the project where you want the file. Click Copy Drawing to Project or Link to Drawing. For more information about linking or copying, see Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders on page 243.

Manage Project Files Remotely | 263

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Share Project Drawings Share your project drawings by sending them over the Internet, printing them, or publishing DWF or DWFx files.

Package and Transmit a Project You can package a project so you can send it digitally or include all supporting documents in an archive. When creating a transmittal, you designate drawings and related files, such as external references (xrefs) and fonts, to include in the transmittal. You can also specify file formats, folder structures, and instructions to the recipient. You create the transmittal package outside of the project environment. For more information, see “Package a set of Files for Transmission” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Print a Project Drawing Project drawings can be plotted individually or published outside the Project Manager environment. However, these operations do not recognize the folder structure set up in the Project Manager. For more information, see “Plot and Publish Drawings” in the AutoCAD Help system. To transmit drawings 1 In the Project Manager tree view right-click a drawing from the project you want to share. 2 Click Application menu ➤ Send ➤ eTransmit.

264 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

3 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, on the Files Tree tab, click Add File. 4 In the Add File To Transmittal dialog box, locate and click the files you want to transmit. To transmit a complete package, include the following: ■

All drawing files

■

All files in the project file location, including ProcessPower.dcfx, Project.xml, and projSymbolStyle.dwg

■

Fonts

5 Click Open. 6 Repeat steps 3-5 until you have added all the project files you want to transmit. 7 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, click OK. 8 In the Specify Zip File dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Save In list, specify the location for the zip file.

■

In the File Name box, enter a name for the zip file.

9 Click Save. To set up a transmittal package 1 In the Project Manager tree view right-click a drawing. 2 Click Application menu ➤ Send ➤ eTransmit. 3 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, click Transmittal Setups. 4 In the Transmittal Setups dialog box, do one of the following: ■

To create a setup, click New.

■

To rename a setup, click Rename. Enter the new name. Click Close.

■

To update an existing setup, select the setup and click Modify.

■

To remove a setup, click the setup and click Delete. In the AutoCAD message, to confirm the setup deletion, click OK.

5 Click Close.

Share Project Drawings | 265

To unpack a self-extracting executable transmittal package 1 Locate and open the transmittal package file (for example: PIP-01-101.dwf). 2 In the eTransmit dialog box, click Browse to specify the folder where you want to unpack the transmittal files. 3 If the transmittal package is password-protected, you are prompted to enter the password. 4 Click OK to close each dialog box. To publish a DWF or DWFx file 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the project. Click Publish. 2 In the Publish dialog box, in the Publish To list, click DWF. 3 Under Sheet Name, press the CTRL key and click the drawings to publish. 4 Click Publish. To set DWF or DWFx output settings The DWF Output settings you make are in effect the next time you publish a DWF or dWFx file. 1 In the Project Manager, open the drop-down list and click the file name of the project you want to open. NOTE DWF output settings can be made only when a project is open. 2 At the Command prompt, enter dwfoutputsettings. NOTE If you are publishing a Plant 3D model, enter dwfoutputsettings3d. The Plant 3D dialog box is like the P&ID version. You can follow the steps outlined here for both types of drawings.

266 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

3 In the Output Settings dialog box, on the Object Properties tab, select the check box labeled Show Classes With Items Only. The tree view displays the Plant 3D objects that are used in the current project. 4 In the tree view, click a component (for example: Equipment). On the Properties pane, in the DWF Output column, clear the check box for any property you do not want to publish (for example: Weight).

Share Project Drawings | 267

5 Click OK. To set DWF publishing options 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the project. Click Publish. 2 In the Publish dialog box, under Publish Options Information, click Publish Options.

268 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

3 In the Project Publish Options dialog box, under P&ID DWF Options, click the options setting box to display the drop-down list and change the following settings. ■

P&ID Information. Specifies whether P&ID related information gets included with the published DWF file output. Specify Include or Don’t Include. You can also click this box, click the [...] button, to open the P&ID DWF Output Settings dialog box.

■

Filtering Null Values. Controls the publishing of object or sheet properties that do not have specified values. Specify On or Off.

■

Granular Pipeline Output. Sets how segment lines behave when you view them in the DWF Viewer. If you leave the Granular Pipeline Output set to Off (the default), the entire segment line is red when

Share Project Drawings | 269

the cursor is placed over it. If you set the Granular Pipeline Output to On, each section of the segment line is highlighted as the cursor moves over it. Specify On or Off. 4 In the Project Publish Options dialog box, under Plant 3D DWF Options, click the options setting box (on the right) to display the drop-down list and change the following settings. ■

Piping Information. Specifies whether piping-related information is included with the published DWF file output. Specify Include or Don’t Include. You can also click this box, click the [...] button, to open the Plant 3D DWF Output Settings dialog box.

■

Filtering Null Values. Controls the publishing of object or sheet properties that do not have specified values. Specify On or Off.

5 When you are finished setting DWF publishing options, click OK to close the Project Publish Options dialog box. 6 In the Publish dialog box, click Publish. 7 If the Specify DWF File dialog box is displayed, do the following: ■

In the Save In list, specify a location to save the DWF or DWFx file.

■

In the File Name box, enter an output file name.

■

Click Select.

270 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Audit and Compress Projects Using auditing tools, administrators can perform periodic project maintenance.

Audit Projects Audit a project to search for errors, such as links between non-existent properties or discrepancies in the tag registry. To audit a project, open the project in the Project Manager. Warning messages are displayed if a project is not currently open or if an open project is locked by another designer. A log file describing problems and the actions taken to resolve them is added to the project directory that contains the data cache.

Compress Projects Periodically compress a project to optimize performance and efficiency of the project. Compressing a project defragments the drawing data cache, repairs any inconsistencies, and prevents corruption of the cache. Warning messages are displayed if a project is not currently open or if an open project is locked by another designer. To audit a project ■

In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a project. Click Audit Project.

Audit and Compress Projects | 271

To compress a project ■

In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a project. Click Compress Database.

NOTE The duration of the compression process depends on the size of the project.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

272 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

Understand the Drawing Environment

5

Before you work in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010, it is important that you understand how the drawing environment is organized and learn some tips for working in this environment.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Workspaces A workspace is a set of menus, toolbars, palettes, and ribbon control panels that are grouped and organized so that you can work in a custom, task-oriented drawing environment. You maximize the screen area available for those interface elements that you want to display. When you use a workspace, only those menus, toolbars, palettes, and ribbons that are relevant to a task are displayed.

Work with the AutoCAD Plant 3D Workspaces When you create 3D piping models, you can use the 3D Piping workspace, which contains only 3D-related toolbars, menus, and palettes. Interface items that you do not need for 3D pipe modeling are hidden, which maximizes the screen area available for your work. NOTE If you attempt to use a command that is not compatible with the current drawing, you are prompted to switch to the workspace that supports the command.

273

3D Piping Workspace The 3D Piping workspace includes the tools required to create a 3D plant model. The drawing area displays the 3D piping ribbon and the 3D drawing area.

P&ID Workspaces P&ID workspaces include P&ID PIP, P&ID ISO, P&ID ISA, P&ID DIN, and P&ID JIS/ISO. Each of these workspaces is based on a P&ID industry standard used for your project. The tool palettes for each workspace contain the symbols based on the industry standard for that workspace.

AutoCAD Workspaces AutoCAD workspaces include 2D Drafting & Annotation, 3D Modeling, and AutoCAD Classic. For more information about these workspaces, see “Create Task-Based Workspaces” in the AutoCAD Help system. When you make changes to your drawing display (such as moving, hiding, or displaying a toolbar or a tool palette group) and you want to preserve the display settings for future use, you can save the current settings to a workspace.

Switch Workspaces You can switch to another workspace whenever you need to work on a different task. You can easily switch between workspaces when you want to access tools or commands that are not accessible in the current workspace. Opening an existing project of any standard causes AutoCAD Plant 3D to switch to the workspace for that standard if it differs from the current workspace. Also, creating a new project switches the workspace to the standard you specify in project settings if that standard differs from the current workspace. To switch workspaces 1 On the status bar, click Workspace Switching.

2 In the list of workspaces, click a workspace.

274 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

A check mark indicates the current workspace.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Ribbon The ribbon contains the commands that you need to create and modify a piping model. The ribbon is composed of a series of panels that are organized into tabs labeled by task. Ribbon panels contain many of the same tools and controls available in toolbars and dialog boxes. By default, the ribbon is displayed horizontally at the top of the drawing window when you create or open a drawing. If you drag a panel from a ribbon tab and into the drawing area or onto another monitor, that panel remains where you placed it. The panel remains open until you return it to the ribbon, even if you switch ribbon tabs. For more information about using ribbons, see “The Ribbon” in the AutoCAD Help system.

3D Piping Home Tab The 3D Piping Home tab contains panels with the commands that you need to create and modify a piping model. This tab includes the following panels: ■

Project panel

AutoCAD Plant 3D Ribbon | 275

■

Part Insertion panel

■

Compass panel

■

Elevation & Routing panel

■

Slope panel

■

Pipe Supports panel

■

Equipment panel

■

Visibility panel

■

View panel

■

Layers panel

The 3D Piping Home tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.

For more information about 3D piping, see Create and Modify Piping on page 431.

Orthos Tab The Orthos tab displays options for working with orthographic drawings. The tab includes the following panels: ■

Ortho Tools panel

■

Dimensions panel

■

Annotation panel

■

Viewports panel

The Orthos tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.

276 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

For more information about orthographic drawings, see Generate Orthographic Drawings on page 561.

Isos Tab The Isos tab displays options for working with isometrics. This tab includes the following panels: ■

Create Iso panel

■

Isogen panel

■

Export panel

The Isos tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.

For more information about isometrics, see Generate Isometric Drawings on page 551.

Structure Tab The Structure tab displays options for working with structures. This tab includes the following panels: ■

Parts panel

■

Modify panel

■

Cutting panel

■

Visibility panel

■

Export panel

■

Views panel

■

Layers panel

The Structure tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Ribbon | 277

For more information about creating structure, see Create and Modify Structure on page 393.

P&ID Home Tab The P&ID Home tab displays options for working with P&ID drawings. This tab includes the following panels: ■

Project panel

■

P&ID panel

■

Schematic Line panel

■

Line Group panel

■

Validate panel

■

Layers panel

■

Block panel

■

Annotation panel

■

Properties panel

■

View panel

■

Utilities panel

The P&ID Home tab is part of the P&ID PIP, P&ID ISO, P&ID ISA, P&ID DIN, and P&ID JIS/ISO workspaces.

For more information about creating P&IDs, see Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing on page 297.

278 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

AutoCAD Tabs When you switch from an AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 workspace to an AutoCAD workspace, additional AutoCAD ribbons are displayed. Following is an example of the 3D ribbon that is displayed when the AutoCAD 3D Modeling workspace is selected. The AutoCAD tabs are part of the AutoCAD workspaces, including 2D Drafting & Annotation, 3D Modeling, and AutoCAD Classic.

The Model and Render tabs from AutoCAD are also included as part of the 3D Piping workspace. For more information about using AutoCAD ribbons, see “The Ribbon” in the AutoCAD Help system.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Project Manager The Project Manager provides an organized project environment in which to work. You can open, add, and create drawings using the Project Manager. You also perform other tasks such as exporting and importing data, creating project reports, including referenced drawings (xrefs), and linking or copying files to the project folders.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Project Manager | 279

The Project Manager contains three tabs; the Source Files tab, the Orthographic DWG tab, and the Isometric DWG tab. For more information about these tabs and other details about the Project Manager, see Overview: Organize Project Drawings on page 239. The Project Manager also provides access to the Data Manager and the Project Setup dialog box. For more information about the Data Manager, see Manage Data and Generate Reports on page 499. For more information about setting up a project, see your system administrator.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties Palette The AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties palette provides quick access to component and line data.

280 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

In the Properties palette, you can change the data of an object (such as a pipe specification, an insulation type or thickness, and so on). The Properties palette also allows access to the Assign Tag dialog box, where you can alter tag information. Some of the ways you can access the Properties palette include: ■

Double-clicking an object in a drawing NOTE When you double-click an annotation, the Edit Annotations dialog box is displayed instead of the Properties palette.

■

Selecting an item in the drawing and pressing CTRL+1

■

Right-clicking an item in the drawing and clicking Properties

■

At the Command prompt, entering PROPERTIES

AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties Palette | 281

For more information about the Properties palette, see “Display and Change the Properties of Objects” in the AutoCAD Help system.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Data Manager You can view, modify, import, and export drawing and project data, and generate various reports using the Data Manager. Using the Data Manager, you can export data for drawings and projects, modify the data externally, and import it back into the Data Manager. You use a hierarchical tree in the Data Manager to filter and view data, and to generate reports.

282 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

You can export data and reports that contain P&ID and Plant 3D data, and export to Microsoft® Excel®, comma-separated value (CSV), or PCF (Piping Component Format) files. You can zoom directly to a Plant 3D object from its record in the Data Manager data table. In P&ID drawings, you can drag annotations from the Data Manager data table into the drawing area.

For more information about the Data Manager, see Manage Data and Generate Reports on page 499.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Spec Viewer You can add pipe or pipe fittings to a model using the Spec Viewer. The Spec Viewer uses spec files to control part size, selection, and routing priorities. After opening a spec file in AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can view spec sheets, add items to a 3D model, and customize tool palettes. You can insert a sized part or an unsized part. If you use an object snap to connect to an open port, the size of the port is used. You can set AutoCAD Plant 3D to update a 3D model when changes are made to the spec file. For more information about using the Spec Viewer, see Use a Spec in a Plant 3D Model.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Spec Viewer | 283

AutoCAD Plant 3D Tool Palettes The AutoCAD Plant 3D tool palettes display standard and custom component and line symbols that you place to create your drawings. The standard you choose when you create a project dictates which tool palette is displayed when you start the program. For example, if you create a project using the ISA standard, the initial tool palette displayed is the P&ID ISA palette.

You can switch to another tool palette by right-clicking the tool palette title bar and selecting a tool palette. However, not all P&ID symbols that are available in one standard are the same in other standards. For example, you have created a project using the PIP standard and have begun adding lines and components from the P&ID PIP tool palette. If you change to the P&ID ISA tool palette and attempt to add a 4-way valve, you receive a warning in the status bar stating that the ISA 4-way valve symbol cannot be

284 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

found in the current palette. To add a 4-way valve, return to the P&ID PIP tool palette and select the 4-way valve from that set of symbols. NOTE If you are working in a project using the ISA standard, you can add lines and components from the PIP standard. Also, if you are working in a project using the DIN standard, you can add lines and components from the ISO standard. In both cases, you might receive a warning for specific lines or components, but you can use most symbols without restriction. You can also create your own custom tool palette by right-clicking the title bar of the tool palette and clicking New Palette. You can then add tools to the palette. For more information about creating a tool palette, see “Customize Tool Palettes” in the AutoCAD Help system. You can add individual items from a spec sheet to a custom tool palette. For more information, see Use a Spec in a Plant 3D Model. NOTE If you do not see the P&ID workspace interface elements in your drawing area, it is likely that you are not displaying a P&ID workspace. Verify that you are using a P&ID workspace by clicking Workspaces on the status bar and clicking a P&ID workspace.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Quick Properties Quick Properties provide access to commonly used properties for an object or a set of objects. Quick Properties are enabled by default. When you select an object, you can view and modify a list of properties for the selected object.

For more information about using or disabling Quick Properties, see “Work with Object Properties” in the AutoCAD Help system. You can easily customize the Quick Properties for any object in the Customize User Interface (CUI) editor. To customize the display of Quick Properties, see “Customize User Interface Elements” in the AutoCAD Help system.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Quick Properties | 285

AutoCAD Plant 3D Shortcut Menus With shortcut menus (also called right-click or context menus), you can perform tasks that are related to the selected component or line. For example, when you right-click a schematic line, a shortcut menu is displayed for quick access to relevant schematic line editing tasks.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Substitution Palettes You use substitution palettes to substitute one component or line for another in a drawing. The palettes are displayed after you place certain components or lines. You can switch to a similar component or line by clicking the Substitution arrow and selecting an item from the palette. All the components grouped under the same class are available for substitution on the substitution palette. NOTE You cannot successfully substitute all components under the same class for each other. If two components of the same class have attachment points at different orientations compared to their placement on a line, they do not substitute correctly.

286 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

AutoCAD Plant 3D Grips You use grips to perform actions on objects in a drawing. Grips are displayed at strategic points on objects when you select them. You can click these grips to perform the actions described in the following table. Grip Name

Grip Symbol

Description

Continuation grip

Starts or continues routing pipe.

Elevation grip

Moves a pipe line up or down to set an elevation.

Rotation grip

Displays the compass and allows a component to be rotated.

Stretch grip

Appears at the midpoints of schematic line segments; it moves a line orthogonally.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Grips | 287

Grip Name

Grip Symbol

Description

Endline grip

Lengthens or shortens a schematic line.

Connection grip

Connects a schematic line or pipe line to a component, pipe line, or another schematic line.

Gap grip

Breaks a schematic line between the gap symbols.

Flip grip

Flips a component in the opposite direction.

Substitution grip

Displays a palette with similar components that you can substitute for the one you originally placed.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Tooltips Tooltips are descriptive messages that are displayed near the cursor when it hovers over a ribbon, toolbar, panel button, or menu item. Tooltips provide pop-up information for the commands associated with interface elements. Initially, a basic tooltip is displayed. If you allow the cursor to hover over the interface element, the tooltip may expand to display a second level of descriptive information for the command.

288 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

You can customize the display and content of a tooltip. For more information about customizing the display of tooltips, see “Display Tab (Options Dialog Box)” in the AutoCAD Help system.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Drawing Tooltips After you add a component or line segment to a drawing or 3D model, you can perform a quick query of component or line segment data by moving the crosshairs over it. When you position the crosshairs over a component, the values stored in the Class Name and Tag fields for the component are displayed in a tooltip. If you position the crosshairs over a line segment, the Pipe Line Type, Tag, and To and From data are displayed in a tooltip.

Objects in 3D models that have data assigned to them or the capability to have data assigned to them display a tooltip with whatever data is currently assigned. If there is no data assigned to an object, the tooltip displays only the object name.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Drawing Tooltips | 289

AutoCAD Plant 3D Application Menu and Toolbars The Application menu and toolbars provide access to many frequently used commands.

Using the Application Menu The Application menu, located in the top-left corner of the program, replaces the traditional menu structure you might be familiar with in previous releases of AutoCAD Plant 3D. Instead of a horizontal menu display across the top of the program, the application menu presents the menus in a vertical list. You click the Application button to display the menus within.

290 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

For more information about using menus, see “The Application Menu” in the AutoCAD Help system.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Application Menu and Toolbars | 291

Using Toolbars You can use buttons on toolbars to start commands, display flyout toolbars, and display tooltips. You can display or hide, dock, and resize toolbars. There are no AutoCAD Plant 3D-specific toolbars, but you can access AutoCAD toolbars from the Quick Access Toolbar Tools menu. For more information about toolbars and other AutoCAD tools such as the status bar and the classic menu bar, see “Other Tool Locations” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Understand the Work History Dialog Box If your administrator activates the Work History option, the Work History dialog box is displayed either when you open a drawing from the Project Manager or when you close the drawing. You are prompted to provide details about the drawing file that you or another designer can refer to at a later date (such as revision information, review status, and so on).

For more information about the Work History dialog box, see Manage Work History Tracking on page 261.

292 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

Understand the Assign Tag Dialog Box If your administrator has set up tag formatting, the Assign Tag dialog box displays when you add a component or line that requires a tag. You add components and lines to a drawing or model from a ribbon or tool palette. If you do not know the tagging data at the time you insert a component or line, you can add the data to a 3D model later by clicking Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Assign Tag and clicking the component or line.

For more information about assigning tags to components and lines, see Tag Components and Lines on page 335.

Control the Display of the Drawing Space By controlling the display of dockable windows and toolbars, locking the position of toolbars and dockable windows, and using two monitors, you can optimize your drawing environment.

Control the Display of Dockable Windows Many windows, such as the Project Manager, the tool palettes, and the Data Manager, are dockable. Each window can be docked, anchored, or floating. Commands for changing the display of dockable windows are available on a shortcut menu. You can change the following options for dockable windows: ■

Size. You can change the size of a window and resize the panes.

Understand the Assign Tag Dialog Box | 293

■

Allow Docking. Dock or anchor a dockable window. A docked window adheres to one side of the application window, causing the drawing area to be resized.

■

Anchor. Attach, or anchor, a dockable window or palette to the left or right side of the drawing area. An anchored window rolls open and closed as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored window is open, its content overlaps the drawing area. An anchored window cannot be set to stay open. The Allow Docking option must be selected before you can anchor a window.

■

Auto-hide. Display a floating window that opens and closes as the cursor moves across it. When this option is cleared, the window stays open.

■

Transparency. Display a window as transparent so that it does not obscure objects under it. This option is not available for all windows or when hardware acceleration is turned on.

Control the Display of Toolbars You can display or hide toolbars and control whether they are docked or floating in the drawing area. A docked toolbar is attached to any edge of the drawing area. You can resize, and reposition undocked toolbars.

Lock the Position of Toolbars and Dockable Windows After you have arranged toolbars and windows the way you want to display them, you can lock their positions. Locked toolbars and windows can still be opened and closed, and items can be added and deleted.

Use Keytips to Access Common Tools You can use the keyboard to access the Application Menu, Quick Access tool bar, and ribbon. Press the ALT key to display shortcut keys for common tools in the application window. When you select a keytip, more keytips are displayed for that tool.

Use Dual Monitors to Optimize the Drawing Area To create a larger drawing space, you can use two monitors. For example, you can use one monitor to display the drawing area, while the other monitor

294 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

displays the tools for working in the drawing area such as the tool palette, Project Manager, Data Manager, and so on. For more information about setting up dual monitors, see the instructions provided with your monitors.

Control the Display of the Drawing Space | 295

296

Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

6

With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can easily create and edit P&ID drawings by placing dynamic lines and components.

Understand P&ID Components and Lines By combining various types of components (such as pumps, tanks, and valves) and lines (such as pipe lines and signal lines), you create a dynamic P&ID drawing, from which you can produce and edit data reports. Each P&ID component and line has an assigned layer name, color, scaling factor, tagging behavior, and other properties that are set up as part of your project so that you are not required to assign properties each time you place a component or line in a drawing.

Understand P&ID Component and Line Symbols AutoCAD Plant 3D includes a set of component and line symbols that are based on P&ID industry standards. The symbols are available for you to place, connect, move, stretch, and tag. You can also create reports on the symbols. Symbols used for AutoCAD Plant 3D components and lines are based on the PIP (Process Industry Practices), ISA (Instrument Society of America), ISO (International Organization for Standardization), and DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.) standards. P&ID components include: ■

Equipment (such as pumps, tanks, and vessels)

■

Nozzles (such as flanged or flow)

297

■

Instruments (such as control valves, flow meters, and instrument bubbles)

■

Inline components (such as valves and reducers)

■

Non-engineering items (such as connectors, flow arrows, and other items that are placed on a drawing but do not contain any reportable data)

P&ID schematic lines include: ■

Pipe lines (such as primary line segments, secondary line segments, and jacketed pipe segments)

■

Signal lines (such as electrical, hydraulic, and pneumatic)

The P&ID tool palette provides a visual library of the symbols, or components and lines, that you use to create and document your P&ID drawings. You simply click a symbol on the tool palette and click in the drawing area where you want to place the symbol. NOTE You can also drag a symbol from the tool palette and drop it in a drawing, but you may not be able to place the symbol as precisely as clicking the symbol on the tool palette and then clicking in the drawing.

298 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

Understand Component and Line Creation If you use components and lines that are not part of the symbol libraries provided with the program, it is likely that your administrator created those symbols and added them to the tool palette while setting up your project. Rather than creating your own components and lines, you should use either the default symbols or those symbols provided by your administrator. Otherwise, you cannot be sure that the symbols comply with your company standards or are included in your tool palette and in reports. If you must use an AutoCAD object in your P&ID drawing, you can convert the AutoCAD object to a P&ID component or line. For more information about converting, see Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&ID Components or Lines on page 342.

Understand P&ID Components and Lines | 299

Place, Tag, and Annotate Components and Lines Typically, you place a component or line, tag it, and then annotate it. Not all components and lines require tagging and annotation, but in general you want to make sure all three tasks are completed as you build your P&ID drawings. ■

Place a component or line. The P&ID tool palettes provide a simple way to view and place all available components and lines. You click an item on the tool palette, and click again in the drawing area to place it.

■

Assign a Tag to a component or line. For some components and lines, you are prompted to enter tag information when you place the item in a drawing. You can enter tag information and annotations when prompted or at a later time. For more information, see Tag Components and Lines on page 335.

■

Annotate a component or line. For some components (such as relief valves and instruments), you are prompted to annotate them when you place them in a drawing. For other items (such as pumps and tanks), you choose whether to annotate them. You can annotate most components and lines by right-clicking the item and clicking Annotate on the shortcut menu.

Create a Drawing File When you start drafting in AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can add a drawing file to your project and add a drawing number, a title, and the name of the designer to that drawing. To create a drawing file and add drawing properties 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager. 2 If the correct project is not already open, open it now.

300 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

3 Click New Drawing.

4 In the New DWG dialog box, do the following: ■

Under DWG Number, enter a drawing number (for example, PIP-1001).

■

Under Author, enter the designer’s name.

■

Under DWG Title, enter a title for the drawing. (for example, Drawing1).

As you enter the DWG Number and DWG Title, the File Name field is automatically populated. 5 Click OK.

Create a Drawing File | 301

Add Components to a P&ID Drawing Component is a general term that includes all P&ID symbols except schematic lines.

P&ID components include: ■

Equipment (such as pumps, tanks, and vessels)

■

Nozzles (such as flanged and flow)

■

Instruments (such as control valves, flow meters, and instrument bubbles)

■

Inline components (such as valves and reducers)

■

Non-engineering items (such as connectors, flow arrows, and other items that are placed on a drawing but do not contain any reportable data)

Add Equipment to a P&ID Drawing P&ID equipment includes pumps, compressors, blowers, heat exchangers, tanks, vessels, furnaces, mechanical drivers, mixing equipment, and other miscellaneous pieces of equipment. Some types of equipment are placed on a drawing before lines and inline instruments. Other types of equipment are added to existing lines on a drawing. Equipment such as tanks and heat exchangers are typically placed at the end of a line. After these items are placed on a drawing, lines are added to connect the equipment, and then valves and inline equipment are placed on the lines.

302 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

Some types of equipment are regularly inserted into pipe or signal line and are often moved along the line. When their join types are set to break segment groups, ISO and DIN symbols for pumps, compressors, and blowers can be added directly to existing lines in AutoCAD Plant 3D. When inserted onto a line, inline components break the line into two line groups with different line numbers. If you remove a piece of inline equipment from a line, you can join the segments to form a single segment or leave the segments as they are with different data. If you join the line segments, you can choose to retain the line data of either the original line segment or the new line segment. For more information about line segments and line groups see Understand Schematic Line Grouping and Linking Behavior on page 328. Equipment symbols are displayed on the Equipment tab of the tool palette. To add equipment to a drawing 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Equipment tab. Click the component you want to place. 3 Click the location in the drawing area where you want to place the component. 4 If you are prompted to specify a scale factor (for example, when you place a tank), do one of the following: ■

Press ENTER to accept the default scale.

■

Move the cursor vertically to increase or decrease the component height.

■

Move the cursor horizontally to increase or decrease the component width.

5 If the Assign Tag dialog box is displayed, do one of the following: ■

If you know the tag data you want to enter, add the information, and then click Assign.

■

If you do not know the tag data you want to enter, click Cancel. You can add tag information at another time by clicking the Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.

Add Equipment to a P&ID Drawing | 303

To add equipment to a pipe line 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Equipment tab. Click the component you want to place. 3 Click a line in the drawing area to specify a location for the component. 4 If the Assign Tag dialog box is displayed, do one of the following: ■

If you know the tag data you want to enter, add the information, and then click Assign.

■

If you do not know the tag data you want to enter, click Cancel. You can add tag information at another time by clicking the Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.

NOTE Only equipment with join type set to segment group breaker can be added to pipe lines. Equipment with endline join type will overlap with the line.

To reapply a graphical style to a component 1 Open the drawing file containing the component whose graphical style you want to apply. 2 Double-click the component (for example: a pump). 3 In the Properties palette, change the properties (for example: in the Layer list, change the layer from Equipment to Instrument). 4 In the drawing area, right-click the component. Click Reapply Graphical Style.

Add Nozzles to a P&ID Drawing You use nozzles to connect pipes. When you move a piece of equipment, the nozzle moves with it.

304 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

Nozzles are added to a drawing in one of two ways: you add them manually by placing them in the drawing from the Fittings tab of the tool palette or they are automatically created when you connect a line segment to an equipment item (such as a tank). You can assign tag numbers to nozzles, just like other items in a P&ID drawing, but the tag number assigned to a nozzle must be unique per equipment item. Different pieces of equipment in a P&ID drawing can have nozzles with the same nozzle tag. For example, each equipment item can have a nozzle tagged N-1. As your schematic drawing changes, you can copy and move nozzles from one item to another within the drawing. Based on where the nozzle is copied or moved, the tag of the nozzle will be affected in different ways. You can choose from the following types of nozzles: ■

Flanged

■

Single line

■

Double line

■

Assumed nozzle

■

Front facing

Add Nozzles to a P&ID Drawing | 305

To add a nozzle to a component 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Fittings tab. 3 On the Fittings tab, under Nozzles, click a nozzle. 4 Click the component on which you want to attach the nozzle. 5 On the component, specify an insertion point. 6 Specify a rotation angle, or press ENTER to indicate no rotation.

Add Instruments to a P&ID Drawing Instruments are assigned and associated with a specific layer and color, as well as tag or data information. AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a basic set of instrument symbols, which include: ■

Control valves

■

Relief valves (such as pressure and vacuum relief valves)

■

Inline instruments (such as a flow nozzle, rotameter, or weir)

■

General instruments (bubbles)

You can substitute the control valve or topworks after adding an instrument to a drawing. You can view the list of instruments in your drawing by accessing the Data Manager. For more information about using the Data Manager, see Manage Data and Generate Reports on page 499. Instruments are displayed on the Instruments tab of the tool palette. To add a control valve to a drawing 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Valves tab. 3 On the Valves tab, under Control Valves, click a control valve.

306 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

4 Do one of the following: ■

If you are adding a control valve to a project for the first time, the Control Valve Browser dialog box is displayed. Select a control valve body and an actuator and click OK. In the drawing area, click to place the control valve. When prompted, click again in the drawing to place the annotation.

■

If a preview of the currently active control valve body and actuator is displayed, change the body type or actuator. Right-click and select Change Body or Actuator. Click in the drawing area to place the control valve. When prompted, click again in the drawing area to place the control valve annotation.

5 If the Assign Tag dialog box is displayed, do one of the following: ■

If you know the tag data you want to enter, enter the information you want displayed in the tag annotation. Click Assign.

■

If you do not know the tag data you want to enter, click Cancel. You can add tag information at another time by clicking the Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.

6 To include an annotation, double-click inside the instrument bubble. 7 In the Edit Annotation dialog box, in the Type drop-down list, select an instrument type. Under LoopNumber, enter a loop number. To convert a hand valve to a control valve 1 In the drawing area, right-click the hand valve you want to convert. Click Convert to Control Valve. 2 In the Actuator Browser dialog box, under Classes, click an actuator type. Click OK. The actuator (topworks) is added to the valve, converting the hand valve to a control valve. 3 If the Assign Tag dialog box is displayed, do one of the following: ■

If you know the tag data you want to enter, enter the information you want displayed in the tag annotation. Click Assign.

■

If you do not know the tag data you want to enter, click Cancel. You can add tag information at another time by clicking the Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.

Add Instruments to a P&ID Drawing | 307

4 When prompted to select an annotation location, click to place the annotation. To add a relief valve instrument to a drawing 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Instruments tab. 3 On the Instruments tab, under Relief Valves, click a relief valve. 4 When you move your cursor to the drawing area, you are prompted to specify an insertion point. In the drawing area, click where you want to place the valve. 5 If the Assign Tag dialog box is displayed, do one of the following: ■

If you know the tag data you want enter, enter the information you want displayed in the tag annotation. Click Assign.

■

If you do not know the tag data you want to enter, click Cancel. You can add tag information at another time by clicking the Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.

6 You are prompted to select an annotation position. Move your cursor to position the annotation, and click where you want to place it. To add an instrument bubble to a drawing 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Instruments tab. 3 On the Instruments tab, click an instrument bubble. 4 When you move your cursor to the drawing area, you are prompted to specify an insertion point. In the drawing area, click where you want to place the valve. 5 If the Assign Tag dialog box is displayed, do one of the following: ■

If you know the tag data you want to enter, enter the information you want displayed in the tag annotation. Click Assign.

308 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

■

If you do not know the tag data you want to enter, click Cancel. You can add tag information at another time by clicking the Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.

To substitute a control valve or topworks in a drawing 1 In the drawing area, click the control valve whose type you want to change.

Two substitution grips are displayed: one for the control valve and one for the topworks. 2 Do either of the following: ■

To change the control valve type, click the lower substitution grip, and in the substitution palette, click an item.

■

To change the topworks type, click the upper substitution grip, and in the substitution palette, click an item.

The substituted items are now displayed in the drawing area.

Add Valves, Reducers, and Other Inline Components to a P&ID Drawing Inline components such as gate valves, globe valves, check valves, and reducers are placed on pipe lines.

Add Valves, Reducers, and Other Inline Components to a P&ID Drawing | 309

Place inline components from the tool palette, using either the Valves tab or the Fittings tab. To expedite your design, use attachment points to help you place inline components precisely on the lines. To adjust the placement of an inline component, reposition the component using grips. Inline components move when you move lines to which they are connected. If you change the size of a pipe line that is attached to a reducer, the reducer automatically reorients to display with its larger size attached to the line with the larger diameter, and its smaller size attached to the line with the smaller diameter. Action A reducer is placed on a schematic line 4 inches in diameter. The line now has two segments, each 4 inches in diameter.

310 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

Graphic Display

Action

Graphic Display

The diameter of the line segment to the right of the reducer is changed to 3 inches. The small size of the reducer is oriented to the right.

The diameter of the line segment to the left of the reducer is changed to 3 inches, and the diameter of the line segment to the right is changed to 4 inches. The small size of the reducer is automatically oriented to the left.

For inline components (such as valves and inline instruments), you may need to show the type of end connection or its open or closed state. You can set the end connection or the open or closed state from the Data Manager, the shortcut menu, or the Properties palette of a selected valve. When end connections are set, the symbol automatically displays the change in the end connection. Set end connection states as follows. End connection states

Graphic display

Flanged

Socket Welded

Welded

Unspecified (default)

If the tool palette contains a symbol for an open or closed state, the symbol automatically updates as changes are made. Otherwise, the open or closed

Add Valves, Reducers, and Other Inline Components to a P&ID Drawing | 311

state is reflected in the Properties palette. You can set the open or closed states as follows. Open or closed states

Property palette setting

Normally Open (default). Fluid can flow through without someone having to manually open a valve. A normally open state can always be set to closed. Normally Closed. Fluid cannot flow through. A normally closed state can always be set to open, but it must be set manually. Lock Open

Lock Closed

Car Sealed Open Car Sealed Closed

If either state is set, and you need to substitute the valve (for example, if you need to change a flanged gate valve to a flanged ball valve), the substituting valve maintains the end connection and the open or closed state of the previous valve. To place a valve on a line 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Valves tab. Click a valve. 3 Click a line in the drawing area to place the valve on the line.

312 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

To set the end connection or the open and closed state of a valve 1 Open a drawing that contains a valve. 2 Right-click a valve in the drawing area. Click Set End Connections, and select an end connection type (for example: Flanged).

3 Right-click the valve. Click Set Open/Closed State, and select a state (for example: Car Sealed Open).

Add Valves, Reducers, and Other Inline Components to a P&ID Drawing | 313

You can also set end connections and open or closed states from the Property palette or the Data Manager. To place a reducer on a line 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Fittings tab. 3 On the Fittings tab, under Piping Fittings, click a reducer. 4 Click a line in the drawing area to place the reducer on the line.

Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing Items that are placed on a drawing but do not contain any reportable data are called non-engineering items. Non-engineering items include off-page connectors, pins, flags, flow arrows, gaps, actuators, annotations, spec breaks, and so on. All non-engineering items are displayed on the Non-Engineering tab of the tool palette.

Understand Connectors Connectors maintain continuity of lines that span across drawings. Off-page connectors are used in pairs: in the originating drawing and in the connecting drawing. A line leaving a drawing requires a To connector. The same line in the second drawing requires a From connector. The same connector symbol is used for both the To and From connectors. To connectors are placed pointing outward in the drawing:

314 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

From connectors are placed pointing inward:

Both connectors should have the same connector number to visually identify the continuity between drawings. It is recommended that you number the From connector before you connect it to a To connector. If a pair of connected connectors do not have a connector number, it is recommended that you assign the same number to the two connectors. Connectors can also show the drawing numbers (for easy tracking), and tag data. The following table describes how you display data for an off-page connector (using the From connector example in the previous illustration). Item in “From Connector” example

Represents

Where data is entered

CC

Pipe line group service

In the drawing, click the line to which the connector is attached. Right-click and click Assign Tag. In the Service drop-down menu, click CC.

50011

Connector number

Double-click the connector, and in the Properties palette, Connector Number field, enter 50011.

From Tank T-201

Origin or destination

Double-click the connector, and in the Properties palette, Origin or Destination field, enter the name of the component that the connector originates from, in this case, From Tank T-201.

Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing | 315

Item in “From Connector” example

Represents

Where data is entered

PID-111

Drawing number of the connected drawing

In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing the connector comes from, and click Properties. In the DWG Number field, add PID-111.

Understand the Rules for Adding Off-page Connectors Between Drawings Keep the following rules in mind when you use off-page connectors: ■

If one line already has a line number defined, the second line inherits the number.

■

If both lines have their line numbers defined, a line connection cannot be made, or the line numbers must be reconciled.

■

If neither line has a line number defined, the lines are grouped and the connectors are added. A line number can be added later.

■

If an off-page connector is connected to a pipe line, and you are creating a connection between drawings, you can filter drawings that do not contain pipe lines that belong to the same line group as the connected line.

■

You can connect two off-page connectors that are in the same drawing, as long as you connect a To connector to a From connector.

Understand Pins On the Non-engineering tab of the P&ID DIN tool palette are two pin-shaped symbols that you use to identify a segment break. In the KKS tagging standard, pins can identify a change in Unit Number or System Code. A pin can either be open (no-fill) or closed (black fill):

■

Open pins. Open pins mark the boundaries of a group with a common property. For example, between open pins, a pipe line has the same Unit

316 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

Number. However, simply placing the pins on a line does not change the properties. You must manually change the properties of the lines beyond the open-pin boundary. ■

Closed pins. Closed pins identifies a break in piping sub-systems or branches in a pipe line. For example, a Unit Number might change at this break. The insertion of the closed pin does not automatically change the Unit Number in this example; you must change it manually.

Pins act like segment breakers. When you insert a pin into a straight schematic line, the pin breaks the line into two segments. However, if you insert an open pin at the end of the line, it does not break the line.

Understand Flow Direction Flags A flag symbol, like an arrow symbol, indicates the direction of the flow. The flag symbol contains the line number annotation. In your drawings, you can use arrow symbols, flag symbols, or both.

Follow these guidelines when using flags: ■

If you change the direction of flow of a line, the flag symbol adjusts to indicate the new direction of flow. The text adjusts to read from left-to-right or from bottom-to-top. Changing the flag direction does not alter the flow direction of the pipe line.

■

In a KKS environment, the tag number for the pipe line appears on two levels in the flag symbol. On the first level, within the flag, are the Unit, System Code, and System Number properties. On the second level, between the flag and the pipe line, are the Function Key Code and Component Number. Regardless of the orientation and position of the flag on the line, the component identification code and component number always appear closest to the pipe line.

To create a line connection between two drawings 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes.

Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing | 317

2 In the P&ID tool palette, Non-Engineering tab, under Connectors, click Off-Page Connector. 3 In the drawing area of the first drawing, click near the end of a line to select a location for the first of two off-page connectors. The off-page connector snaps to the end of the line. 4 Click the off-page connector. At the pointed end of the connector, click the connector grip. Click Connect To. 5 In the Create Connection dialog box, click the drawing that contains the line you want to continue, and do the following: ■

To create a new connection in the second drawing, in the Off-page Connectors section, click Create New Connection in Selected Drawing. Click OK. In the drawing area of the second drawing, click the beginning of the line to place the connector.

■

To override an existing connection in the second drawing, in the Off-page Connectors section, click Connect to Existing Off-page Connector. Click OK. In the drawing area of the second drawing, click the connector on a line to place the new connector data. At the The off-page connector you selected is already connected to another connector. Overwrite the existing connection? prompt, select Yes.

6 To display only those drawings that contain pipe lines belonging to the same line group as the connected line, select Only Show Drawings That Contain Line Segments in Line Group n. 7 Click OK. To view an existing line connection between two drawings ■

In the drawing area, click the off-page connector whose connection you want to view. At the pointed end of the connector, hover over the connector grip, and click Go to Connector. In the drawing where the line connection is established, the display is zoomed in on the off-page connector.

To add a miscellaneous symbol, connector, or trim symbol to a drawing 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Non-Engineering tab. 3 On the Non-Engineering tab, click an item.

318 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

4 Click in the drawing area to specify the location for the non-engineering item. NOTE If the symbol you are inserting is a pin, remember that, although it breaks the line, you must update the properties appropriately.

Quick Reference Commands OFFPAGECONNECT

System Variables No entries

Edit the Geometry of a P&ID Component While Retaining Its Data Edit an existing P&ID component by changing the geometry of the component and then saving the new geometry. You might find a component in the tool palette that almost matches a component that you use in your drawings. Rather than creating a new component, you can change a single instance of a component by editing its geometry in the block editor. Only the geometry is edited. Annotations and other component data is preserved. For example, if the P&ID tool palette contains a tank that is similar to one you want to use but is not as tall as you need it to be, you can edit the component and stretch the lines to create a new instance. To edit the geometry of a P&ID component while retaining its data 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the tab that contains the component you want to edit. Click the component. 3 Click in the drawing to place the component. 4 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ P&ID Edit Block.

Edit the Geometry of a P&ID Component While Retaining Its Data | 319

5 Select the component to open it in the block editor. Modify the geometry as needed. 6 In the Edit P&ID Object’s toolbar, save changes and exit the block editor.

Quick Reference Commands PIDEDITBLOCK

System Variables No entries

Create and Use Assemblies Assemblies are combinations of connected components that are placed in a drawing at the same time. Assemblies can include P&ID components and lines. For example, a level gauge assembly might contain an instrument and five valves, including two ball valves. When you place an assembly created in a P&ID drawing, the data and connection behavior is retained for the components and lines that make up the assembly. For example, if you added a manufacturer and model number to a valve before you made the valve part of the assembly, that data is retained in the assembly. Tagging information is also retained. A question mark is added to the end of the tag, indicating that the tag must be adjusted to avoid duplication. After you insert the assembly parts, you can change the tags and assign unique values where necessary. To create an assembly and place it in a P&ID drawing 1 In a P&ID drawing, place components and lines to create an assembly. 2 At the Command prompt, enter wblock. 3 In the Write Block dialog box, select Objects. 4 Click Select Objects.

320 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

5 In the drawing, select the objects that make up the assembly. Press ENTER to complete object selection. 6 In the Write Block dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Base Point, click Pick Point to specify a point in the drawing, or enter the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the point.

■

Under Destination, enter a file name and path for the new drawing, or click the [...] button to browse to a location.

■

Click OK.

7 On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Insert. 8 In the Insert dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Name list, click the assembly you just created, or click Browse to locate the drawing.

■

In the lower-left corner, select Explode.

■

Click OK.

9 When you move your cursor to the drawing, you are prompted to specify an insertion point. In the drawing, click where you want to place the assembly. 10 Change the tagging information for individual components and lines as needed.

Add Schematic Lines to a P&ID Drawing Schematic lines are dynamic lines that represent pipes lines or instrument lines. They connect to components, and contain valves and other items. They are similar to AutoCAD lines, but they contain additional information such as flow direction, tag information, and line size.

Add Schematic Lines to a P&ID Drawing | 321

The two types of schematic line groups in AutoCAD Plant 3D are pipe lines and instrument lines. Each line type has its own set of properties (such as layer, linetype, thickness, linestyle, color, and tag information). At the end of each line segment, the arrow indicates the flow direction. The flow direction is determined by the direction you move the line as you create it. You can change the direction of flow, using the shortcut menu. For more information about changing the flow direction of a line, see Define the Directional Flow of Schematic Lines on page 329

Understand Line Groups, Line Segments, and Linked Line Segments Schematic lines are represented in the program in two ways: as line groups, which are conceptual representations (or types) of lines (such as sewage lines or hot water pipes), and as line segments, which are actual purchasable pipes. You can link a line segment to another line segment. When a line is linked, it assumes the tag information of the line to which it is linked. If you link a line belonging to one group to a line in another group, the line leaves its original group and joins the new group. NOTE You can link lines only within a drawing. To link lines across drawings, use an off-page connector. For more information, see Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing on page 314. Each time you add a line to a drawing, you are prompted to continue the line group, start a new line group, or link the line to another line segment.

322 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

The following chart explains the important differences between the three choices. See also SLINE. Prompt

Action

Result and Tag

Data Manager

Continue sline group

You are prompted to select an existing line group to which the new line segment will be added

The new line segment assumes the tag of the selected line group

■

No change to the pipe line group

■

A new row is created for the new pipe line segment

The new line segment becomes part of a newly created group

A new group is created, and the new line segment tag is empty

■

A new row is created for the new pipe line group

■

A new row is created for the new pipe line segment

You are prompted to select an existing line segment to which the new line segment will be linked

The new line segment:

■

No change to the pipe line group

■

assumes the tag of the selected line segment

■

■

is added to selected segment’s group

No new row; the new segment is represented by the same row as the segment to which it is linked

■

assumes the tag of the line group

New sline group

Link sline segment

Segments in a group inherit properties from that group. By default, a pipe line segment tag gets its service and line number from its pipe line group. The uniqueness of pipe line segments and groups is controlled by the pipe line group tag.

Understand To and From Line Information To and From line information is automatically created and stored for the pipe lines represented in your P&ID drawings. You can’t manually change the information stored in the To or From fields for a line segment. The From field

Add Schematic Lines to a P&ID Drawing | 323

indicates where the line segment originates, and the To field indicates a line segment’s destination. As you make changes to a P&ID drawing by moving line segments or adding components, the To and From information is constantly being updated. The following list explains the different situations in which information is reported for the From field on a line segment: ■

If the line segment originates from an equipment item, the Equipment tag is reported.

■

If the line segment originates on another pipe segment, that line segment’s tag is reported.

■

If the line segment originates from multiple pipe segments, the multiple tags are separated by commas and are reported.

■

If the line segment originates on a tagged inline item (such as a control valve), the tag from the inline item is reported. This happens only if the inline item is being used as the endline item.

■

If the segment originates on a reducer or other segment breaker (Spec Break), the pipe line segment tag on the other side of the reducer/breaker is reported.

■

If the segment originates on a non-tagged item (such as a pipe cap), the component’s description is reported.

■

If the segment does not originate on a component, inline tagged item, or non-tagged item, no value is reported; the field is blank.

The information for the To field on a line segment is reported the same way it is for the From field. NOTE Off-page connectors are not used to determine the values for the To and From fields for a line segment. When a line segment is attached to an off-page connector, the To or From field is reported based on what the terminating component, inline tagged item, or non-tagged item is on the other drawing. To add a line to an existing line group The following procedures are valid for both pipe lines and signal lines. 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Lines tab. Click a line.

324 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

3 Click in the drawing area to specify the location for the first point of the line. 4 Click in the drawing area to specify the second point of the line. 5 To specify any additional points of the line, continue clicking in the drawing area. NOTE All lines drawn from the start point to end point (when you press Enter) form one segment and have one data record. 6 Press the Down arrow on the keyboard, and when prompted, select Continue Sline Group. 7 When prompted, click the group you want the new line to join. 8 Press ENTER to end the series of line segments and join the specified group. To add a line to a new line group 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Lines tab. Click a line. 3 Click in the drawing area to specify the location for the first point of the pipe line. 4 Click in the drawing area to specify the second point of the line. 5 To specify any additional points of the line, continue clicking in the drawing area. NOTE All lines drawn from the start point to end point (when you press Enter) form one segment and have one data record. 6 Press the Down arrow on the keyboard, and when prompted, select New Sline Group. 7 Press ENTER to end the series of line segments and place the new line segment in a new line group.

Add Schematic Lines to a P&ID Drawing | 325

To add a line and link it to an existing line 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Lines tab. Click a line. 3 Click in the drawing area to specify the location for the first point of the line. 4 Click in the drawing area to specify the second point of the line. 5 To specify any additional points of the line, continue clicking in the drawing. NOTE All lines drawn from the start point to end point (when you press Enter) form one segment and have one data record. 6 Press the Down arrow on the keyboard, and when prompted, select Link Sline Segment. 7 When prompted, click the line to which you want the new line to link. 8 Press ENTER to end the series of line segments and link the line.

Quick Reference Commands SLINE

System Variables SLINEORTHO

Interface Reference No entries

Connect Schematic Lines to Components Schematic lines are primarily used to connect components, although they can also connect to other schematic lines.

326 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

When a P&ID schematic line is connected to a component or other schematic line, it displays a connection grip at the end of the line when the line is selected.

When a schematic line is not attached to a component, an endline grip is displayed at the end of the line when the line is selected.

For more information about grips and other AutoCAD Plant 3D interface elements, see Understand the Drawing Environment on page 273. To connect a schematic line to a component 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Lines tab. Click a line. 3 In the drawing area, move the cursor near the outside of the component where you want the line to connect. When an attachment point is displayed, click to connect the line and component. 4 To create more line segments, continue clicking in the drawing area. 5 Do one of the following: ■

Press ENTER to end the schematic line.

■

Move the cursor to another component’s edge, and click when the attachment points are displayed.

Connect Schematic Lines to Components | 327

NOTE If you move the schematic line, the component you added to it moves with the line. To connect a component to a schematic line 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Lines tab. Click a line. 3 Click in the drawing area to specify the first point of the line. 4 Click in the drawing area to specify the second point of the line. 5 To create more line segments, continue clicking in the drawing area. 6 In the P&ID tool palette, click the tab that contains the component you want to add. Click the component. 7 In the drawing area, click the end of the schematic line where an attachment point is displayed, and if prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to place the component. NOTE If you move the schematic line, the component you added to it moves with the line.

Understand Schematic Line Grouping and Linking Behavior When you add a schematic line to a drawing and choose to either continue the line group, create a new line group, or link the line, you can see the groups and line segments through visual cues. You can also examine how the groups and lines are represented in the Data Manager. To view a schematic line group ■

In the drawing area, hover the mouse over the schematic line whose grouping you want to view. The line segment is displayed with dashed lines and is highlighted. The entire line group is displayed with dashed lines.

To select a schematic line segment ■

In the drawing area, click a schematic line to select the active line segment.

328 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

To select all schematic linked line segments ■

In the drawing area, press CTRL+~ (tilde) while selecting the linked segments.

To select a schematic line group 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Schematic Line panel ➤ Sline Group Select. 2 Click a schematic line in the drawing area. Command entry: SLGROUPSELECT Shortcut menu: Select Group

Define the Directional Flow of Schematic Lines Schematic lines use flow arrows to display the flow direction. Most signal lines do not have flow arrows because the flow direction is not relevant to the P&ID drawing. Flow arrows are located at the end of each schematic line segment. You can easily change the direction of the flow arrows. To change the flow direction of a schematic line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Sline Edit. 2 In the drawing area, click the schematic line whose directional flow you want to change. 3 In the Schematic Line Edit list, click Reverseflow. To delete or move a flow arrow 1 In the drawing area, click the schematic line arrow that you want to delete or move. 2 Click the Flow Arrow grip and delete it or move it to another location on the schematic line.

Define the Directional Flow of Schematic Lines | 329

Quick Reference Commands SLEDIT

System Variables No entries

Edit Schematic Lines After you have placed a schematic line in a drawing, you can perform a number of editing tasks on the line. You can also use grips to edit a line. The Schematic Line Edit list includes the following options: ■

Attach. Programatically attaches a line to a component, although the line and component may not be attached visually. Use this option when space on the P&ID drawing is limited.

■

Detach. Programatically detaches an attached line from a component.

■

Gap. Adds a gap and gap symbols where a line crosses a component. A line with a gap in it is still a single line. The gap is visual only.

■

uNgap. Removes a gap and the gap symbols from a line, and automatically mends the line.

■

Straighten. Straightens a non-orthogonal line to a selected anchor point on the line. Straightens a curved sline to a straight line.

■

Corner. Adds a corner segment to a line. The direction and length of the corner segment are determined by points you specify. When this operation is performed on a curved sline, the corresponding portion of the arc is removed to create the corner.

■

Reverseflow. Reverses the flow of the line, and flips the arrows to the new direction.

■

Join. Joins two separate lines on the same or different axis to form a single line.

■

Break. Creates two separate lines from one line.

■

Link. Links two separate lines.

■

Unlink. Unlinks two lines that were previously linked.

330 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

■

eXit. Closes the Schematic Line Edit list.

You can perform other editing tasks on lines, including: ■

Trimming a line when it extends over other lines or components (use the TRIM command).

■

Extending a line to connect it to other lines or components (use the EXTEND command).

■

Continuing or shortening a line (use the Endline grip on the line).

■

Stretching a line to move assemblies connected to the line and nozzles on attached tanks (use the STRETCH command).

To attach a schematic line to a component 1 In a drawing, right-click a schematic line and click Schematic Line Edit ➤ Attach to Component. 2 Select the schematic line that you want to attach. 3 Select the component to which you want to attach. 4 Press ENTER. To detach a schematic line from a component 1 In a drawing, right-click a schematic line and click Schematic Line Edit ➤ Detach from Component. 2 Select the schematic line that you want to detach. 3 Select the endpoint closest to the component from which you want to detach. 4 Press ENTER. To add a gap on a schematic line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Sline Edit. 2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line where you want to add the gap 3 At Schematic Line Edit list prompt, click Gap. 4 Click a point in the schematic line where you want to add a gap.

Edit Schematic Lines | 331

5 Click the second point to create the gap. 6 Press ENTER. To remove a gap on a schematic line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Sline Edit. 2 In the drawing area, click a point on the schematic line where you want to remove the gap. 3 At the Schematic Line Edit list prompt, click uNgap. 4 Press ENTER. To straighten a schematic line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Sline Edit. 2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and at the Schematic Line Edit list prompt, click Straighten. 3 Click an endpoint to use as the point of alignment. To add a corner to a schematic line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Sline Edit. 2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and at the Schematic Line Edit list prompt, click Corner. 3 Click another point for the corner segment. 4 Click another point where you want to add the corner. To join schematic lines 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Sline Edit. 2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and at the Schematic line Edit list prompt, click Join. 3 Click in the drawing area to specify the second point. 4 Click the next point or press ENTER to end the series of schematic line segments.

332 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

To break a schematic line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Sline Edit. 2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and in the Schematic line Edit list, click Break. 3 Click the point where you want to break the schematic line. 4 Click another break point or press ENTER to exit. To link a schematic line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Sline Edit. 2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and in the Schematic Line Edit list, click Link. 3 Click the line segment to which you want the line linked. 4 At the warning prompt, press the Down arrow to select Yes and link the line. To unlink a schematic line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Sline Edit. 2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and in the Schematic line Edit list, click Unlink. 3 At the warning prompt, press the Down arrow to select Yes and unlink the line. To trim a schematic line 1 At the command line, enter trim. 2 Click the schematic line segments you want to use as the cutting edges. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Click the part of the line you want to trim. To extend a schematic line 1 At the command line, enter extend.

Edit Schematic Lines | 333

2 Click the schematic line segments you want to use for the bounding edges. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Click the part of the line you want to extend. To shorten a schematic line 1 Click the schematic line you want to shorten. 2 Select the Endline grip on the line segment where you want to shorten the line, and move the cursor to decrease the line’s length. 3 Click to set the new line length. To continue a schematic line 1 Click the schematic line you want to continue. 2 Select the Endline grip on the line segment where you want to extend the line, and move the cursor to increase the line’s length. 3 Click to set the new line length. To stretch a schematic line 1 At the command line, enter stretch. 2 Click the schematic line segments you want to use for the bounding edges. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Click the part of the line you want to stretch.

334 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

Quick Reference Commands SLEDIT

System Variables No entries

Tag Components and Lines You can assign tags to your components and lines.

Understand the Difference Between a Tag and an Annotation A tag is data and never appears on a drawing. An annotation, however, often includes a tag property and displays that property on a drawing. The result is an annotation, not a tag. Because the terms tag and annotation are easily confused, they are described in detail in this table. A tag is:

An annotation is:

A unique identifier for a component or line segment

Information about a component or line segment that appears on a drawing

Data

Text and (optional) shapes

Located in the data cache

Located on the drawing pane

Unique

Not necessarily unique

Viewable as a property in the data manager

Viewable in the drawing

A single entity for each component or line segment

Not necessarily a single entity per component or line segment. (A component or line segment can have multiple annotations.)

Comprised of subparts as defined by the Tag Format

Text defined in the Annotation Style's block definition Text that can include the tag property of a component or line segment. This text is not a tag, but an annotation.

Tag Components and Lines | 335

Add and Modify Tags You can tag components and lines to identify them as unique items in a project. Depending on how your administrator set up your project, you may be prompted to assign tag information as you place components or lines. However, if you do not know all of the tagging data at that time, you can dismiss the prompt and tag a component or line whenever you have the data available. You can assign or modify tag information to a component or line by using the ribbon, the Properties palette, the shortcut menu, or the Data Manager. For more information about the Data Manager, see Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager on page 507. NOTE Do not use Find and Replace to modify tag information. Components such as equipment, nozzles, valves, instruments, and pipe lines have the following default tag formatting: ■

Equipment tag (Type-Number). Defined by default with a type property and a number (for example: P-100).

■

Equipment tag 2 (Area-Type-Number). Defined by default with an area property, type property, and number (for example: 25-P-1000).

■

Hand valve tag (Code-Number). Defined by default with two letters representing a valve code and a number (for example: HV-100).

■

Nozzle tag (N-Number). Defined by default with one or more letters representing a nozzle code and a number (for example: N-1).

■

Instrumentation tag (Area-Type-Number). Defined by default with an area, type, and loop number (for example: 51-PT-100).

■

Line number tag. Defined by default with a line number (for example: 100).

■

Pipeline tag (Size-Spec-Service-Line Number). Defined by default with size value, spec, service, and line number (for example: 6"-C1-P-10014).

If your tag formats are different than those listed above, your administrator may have changed the formatting. For more information about the tag formats that are set up for your company, see your administrator.

336 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

When you copy a component or line, or create a new line by inserting equipment into an existing line, the new item is assigned a temporary tag that contains a question mark to differentiate it from the original tag. For example, if the original tag for a component is P-100, the temporary tag might be P-100?.

Check for Existing Tags As you assign tags to components and lines in a P&ID drawing, you can check to see which tags are already used in the drawing. When you are tagging a nozzle, only the equipment item attached to the nozzle to is scanned for existing tagged nozzles. The entire project is not scanned. You can use the listed tag references to either find the next available tag or to copy the values of a tagged item to the tag fields of the item you are tagging. Once you copy a tag, you make the necessary changes to it to make sure it is unique within the drawing.

Understand Temporary Tags When you copy a component or line, or create a new line by inserting equipment into an existing line, the new item is assigned a temporary tag that contains a question mark to differentiate it from the original tag. For example, if the original tag for a piece of equipment is P-100, the temporary tag might be P-100?. To tag a component or line when placing it in a drawing 1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes panel ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the component you want to place. Click in the drawing area to place the component. 3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, enter the required data. 4 Click Assign. To add a tag after a component or line is placed in a drawing 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag. 2 In the drawing area, click the component whose tagging data you want to add or modify. 3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, change the required data.

Tag Components and Lines | 337

4 Click Assign. To add a tag to a nozzle 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag. 2 In the drawing area, click the nozzle whose tagging data you want to add or modify. 3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, change the required data. 4 (Optional) To the right of Existing Nozzles, click the arrow, and in the expanded list below, do either of the following: ■

To ensure that a unique tag is used, view all the nozzles that are currently attached to the equipment item of the nozzle you selected.

■

To populate the tagging fields for the nozzle, double-click one of the listed nozzles. Use the existing data as a basis for the new tag.

5 Click Assign. To add a tag to an instrument 1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click the instrument whose tagging data you want to add or modify. 2 Click Assign Tag. 3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, change the required data. 4 (Optional) To the right of Existing, click the arrow, and in the expanded list below, do either of the following: ■

To ensure that a unique tag is used, view all the inline instruments that are currently in the project.

■

Double-click one of the listed inline instruments to populate the tagging fields for the inline instrument. Use the existing data as a basis for the new tag.

5 Click Assign. To add or edit a tag using the Data Manager 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Show Selected Items.

338 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

3 In the drawing area, click the item you want to tag. In the Data Manager, the item is selected. 4 Scroll to locate the Tag field, and double-click the field. 5 In the Assign Tag dialog box, add or change the required tag data. Click Assign. 6 Repeat steps 4-6 for other items you want to tag, or close the Data Manager. To add or edit a tag using the Properties palette 1 In the drawing, double-click the item you want to tag. 2 In the Properties palette, P&ID section, to the right of Tag, click [...]. 3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, add or change the required tag data. Click Assign.

Quick Reference Commands PIDTAG

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Assign Tag Dialog Box

Annotate Components and Lines You can annotate components and lines at any time.

Add Annotations Annotation is text placed in a drawing to describe a component or line. It displays the properties or tag data of a component or line.

Annotate Components and Lines | 339

You can annotate a component or line using any of the following methods: ■

On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ P&ID Annotate.

■

Right-click a component or line, and click Annotate.

■

At the Command prompt, enter pidannotate.

■

In the Data Manager, you can annotate components and lines from the properties displayed in the Data Manager.

For more information about the Data Manager, see Place Annotations in a P&ID Drawing from the Data Manager on page 510. Following is an example of a horizontal centrifugal pump annotated with a pump tag and a pump InfoTag:

Annotations are linked to the properties, or data, of the component or line. If the data changes, the annotation updates accordingly. However, not all annotations are linked visually to the component or line. You can add freestanding annotations, which do not move in the drawing when you move a component or line, or linked annotations, which move with the item. Linked annotations might include an instrument bubble or an equipment InfoTag. Some annotations (such as valve size) are displayed automatically, and some require that you place them in a drawing. Components and lines are not required to have tag data before you annotate them. For example, you can annotate an item with its size, manufacturer, and so on.

340 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

To annotate a component or line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ P&ID Annotate. 2 In the drawing area, click the component or line you want to annotate. 3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, enter the tagging data. Click OK. 4 Select an annotation type. The annotation choices displayed depend on the component or line you select. 5 If prompted, click in the drawing to place the annotation. To convert a linked annotation into a freestanding annotation 1 In the drawing, right-click the linked annotation. 2 Clear the Moves with Parent check box to turn off the linking behavior. To convert a freestanding annotation into a linked annotation 1 In the drawing, right-click the freestanding annotation. 2 Click Moves with Parent. To move an annotation from its parent component or line 1 In the drawing, right-click the annotation you want to move. 2 Click Place from Parent. 3 Move and place the annotation in the drawing. To edit an annotation 1 In the drawing, right-click the annotation you want to edit, and click Edit. 2 In the Edit Annotation dialog box, modify the annotation data, and click OK.

Annotate Components and Lines | 341

Quick Reference Commands PIDANNOTATE

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Assign Tag Dialog Box

Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&ID Components or Lines You can identify AutoCAD objects as AutoCAD Plant 3D components or lines by converting the objects. You can also add the converted object to the tool palette for use in the current project.

Convert an AutoCAD Object to a P&ID Component An AutoCAD block or a group of AutoCAD lines is converted to a specific class definition in the P&ID schema. For example, you can convert a group of AutoCAD lines to a component of the “vessel” class definition. This group of lines is converted into a single AutoCAD Plant 3D component. It contains the same data and graphical properties as an original AutoCAD Plant 3D component. The vessel is referenced in the Data Manager and in relevant reports (such as an Equipment List report). In addition, the converted object has the same grip behavior and dynamic behavior as AutoCAD Plant 3D components.

Convert an AutoCAD Object as a P&ID Schematic Line You can convert AutoCAD lines and polylines (including splines or polylines with arcs) into line class definitions that are recognized as P&ID data. Converting an AutoCAD line adds a record for that line in the Data Manager, and includes it in reports. You can specify P&ID line properties such as size, service, and spec.

342 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

NOTE An AutoCAD line that is converted to an AutoCAD Plant 3D line does not have the same dynamic behaviors of P&ID schematic lines. For example, a converted line does not automatically break when inline components are inserted in the line. It does not have flow direction properties.

Add a Converted Object to the Tool Palette Once you convert objects to P&ID components or lines, you can add the converted objects to a P&ID tool palette. The object becomes a tool on the tool palette, and can be placed in project drawings like any other P&ID tool. You should understand the following when using converted objects as tools on the tool palette: ■

The drawing file that contains the converted object must be saved to the current project.

■

The converted object is available for all drawings in the current project, but only on the workstation where it was created.

■

Converted objects that become part of your tool palette are not added to the project components and lines.

To convert a component 1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click an AutoCAD object and click Convert to P&ID Object. 2 In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, click a component (for example, a Centrifugal Pump) in the tree view. 3 Click OK. 4 In the drawing, if prompted, specify an insertion base point. To convert a line 1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click an AutoCAD line and click Convert to P&ID Object. 2 In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, click a line type in the tree view. 3 Click OK.

Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&ID Components or Lines | 343

To add a converted object to the tool palette 1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click an AutoCAD object and click Convert to P&ID Object. 2 In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, click a line or component type in the tree view. 3 Click OK. 4 Save the drawing file. 5 On the tool palette, click the tab where you want to place the new tool. 6 Click and hold the converted object, and drag it to the tool palette.

Quick Reference Commands PIDCONVERT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Convert to P&ID Object Dialog Box

Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCAD Export a P&ID drawing file to an AutoCAD drawing file format without losing the visual fidelity of the P&ID drawing. The exported drawing retains all P&ID components and annotations as AutoCAD blocks. All P&ID schematic lines are retained as AutoCAD lines. You can then use AutoCAD to open, view, edit, and plot the exported P&ID DWG files.

Avoid Proxy Graphics You can use AutoCAD and AutoCAD P&ID to open and view drawing files in the DWG file format. However, you cannot use AutoCAD to edit custom objects created in P&ID, such as pipe lines, nozzles, and other equipment.

344 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

AutoCAD treats such custom objects as proxy graphics. You cannot edit or modify proxy graphics using AutoCAD. To open a P&ID drawing in AutoCAD, first export the drawing file to AutoCAD. Exporting the drawing ensures that the AutoCAD drawing looks identical to the P&ID drawing. Moreover, the custom objects in P&ID are converted to AutoCAD blocks and lines instead of proxy graphics. You can then edit these blocks and lines in AutoCAD. For more information about proxy graphics, see “Work With Custom and Proxy Graphics” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Maintain Visual Fidelity In an exported drawing, components (equipment, nozzles, instruments, inline components, and non-engineering items) look exactly like those in the original P&ID drawing. All the information that is displayed in the drawing (such as color, position, and size) is retained in the exported drawing. For schematic lines, all visual information (such as color, linetype, line weight, and so on) is retained in the AutoCAD lines. Annotations placed on components and lines are exported as AutoCAD blocks. They retain their position, size, and orientation in the drawing.

Save, View, Edit, Plot as AutoCAD Files To export a P&ID drawing file, save it in one of the following AutoCAD file formats: ■

AutoCAD 2010 Drawing (*.dwg)

■

AutoCAD 2007/LT 2007 Drawing (*.dwg)

After exporting the P&ID drawing to AutoCAD, you can view, edit, and plot the drawing as you would any AutoCAD drawing. All the layers in a P&ID drawing are retained in the AutoCAD file format. Similarly, all model space, paper spaces, and any user-created layouts are available in the AutoCAD file format. NOTE It is recommended that you use the EXPORTTOAUTOCAD command to export layouts correctly. Using an AutoCAD command, such as EXPORTLAYOUT, does not export all P&ID layers correctly and might result in lost data or exploded objects.

Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCAD | 345

To export a P&ID drawing to AutoCAD 1 If the Project Manager is not already open, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager. 2 If the correct project is not already open, open it now.

3 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing you want to export to AutoCAD. Click Open. 4 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing. Click Export to AutoCAD. If the drawing is not saved, you are prompted to save it. NOTE You cannot edit read-only drawings. AutoCAD P&ID does not prompt you to save a read-only drawing when you try to export it. 5 In the Unsaved Drawing dialog box, click Yes to save the drawing and continue with the export process. NOTE You cannot export a P&ID drawing when it is not open. 6 In the Export to AutoCAD dialog box, browse to the location where you want to save the drawing. In the File Name box, specify a file name.

346 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

NOTE If a drawing file with the same name already exists in the specified location, an error message is displayed. You can overwrite the existing file or use a unique file name. If the existing drawing file is a P&ID project drawing, you cannot overwrite it. You must specify a unique name for the drawing file. 7 In the Files of Type box, specify one of the following file formats for the drawing: ■

AutoCAD 2010 Drawing (*.dwg)

■

AutoCAD 2007/LT 2007 Drawing (*.dwg)

8 Click Save.

Quick Reference Commands EXPORTTOAUTOCAD

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Export To AutoCAD Dialog Box

Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCAD | 347

348

Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D

7

You can place Plant 3D equivalents of P&ID objects in your 3D model to minimize data entry. You can validate the model to make sure that it is synchronized with the P&ID drawing.

Overview P&ID drawings and Plant 3D models represent many of the same objects in different forms. Piping and inline equipment such as fittings and valves, whether they are represented schematically or in 3D, are closely related. If you have created AutoCAD P&ID drawings for a project, you can use these drawings to minimize data entry when creating a 3D model. With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can take advantage of the relationship between the two drawing types to perform the following tasks: ■

Create a project that contains both P&ID drawings and Plant 3D models. For more information about the Project Manager, see Work with Project Drawings on page 253.

■

Use data from P&ID objects to assist in creating Plant 3D objects.

■

View P&ID and Plant 3D data in the Data Manager.

349

Understand the Mapping of Classes and Properties P&ID classes and properties are mapped to corresponding Plant 3D classes and properties by default. Your administrator makes sure that P&ID objects are mapped to their 3D counterparts appropriately. For more information about the mapping process, see Understand Mapping on page 182.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPIDLINELIST PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference P&ID Line List Project Setup Dialog Box

Understand the P&ID Line List You can use the P&ID Line List to view the lines and components available in a P&ID drawing. The P&ID Line List window displays all line segments and associated fittings, valves, and inline components in a P&ID drawing. Pipe line group number determines the order of lines. You can select any available P&ID object and place its mapped Plant 3D counterpart in the Plant 3D model. When you place a Plant 3D object in a model, the property values of the P&ID object are copied to the Plant 3D model as well. NOTE A P&ID object must be mapped to a Plant 3D object before you can place an equivalent Plant 3D object in the model. In the list, unmapped items are unavailable for placement. When you place the mouse over the various tree nodes, the tooltip displays the item name and its mapping.

350 | Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D

To open the P&ID Line List 1 Open a Plant 3D model. 2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ P&ID Line List. 3 In the P&ID Line List window, in the drop-down list, click the P&ID drawing you want to open.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPIDLINELIST PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference P&ID Line List Project Setup Dialog Box

Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers You can click a line segment in the P&ID Line List to place its mapped counterpart in the model.

Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers | 351

The P&ID Line List presents the line segments and related components that appear in a specified P&ID drawing. You can click any available line segment and place its Plant 3D counterpart in the 3D model. To place a line in a Plant 3D model 1 Open a Plant 3D model. 2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ P&ID Line List. 3 In the P&ID Line List window, do the following: ■

In drop-down list, click the P&ID drawing whose lines and components you want to view.

■

In the tree view, expand the Pipe Line Group. Click a line segment.

■

Click Place.

4 Do one of the following: ■

If the size and spec match, go to step 5.

■

If the size or spec do not match, in the Select Size and Spec dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Spec, click a spec (for example: CS150).

■

Under Size, click a size (for example: 4”).

■

If you are sure that your choice is accurate for all situations, select the check box labeled Always Substitute the Selected Size For [size]. (The spec is not saved along with the size.)

352 | Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D

■

Click Select. NOTE If the size you want is not available, you can specify a substitute that you can correct later. Unless you are sure that your choice is accurate, do not select the check box labeled Always Substitute the Selected Size For [size]. See Edit Size Mappings on page 357

5 In the drawing area, click the location for the start point of the pipe. 6 Click the next point of the pipe. 7 Continue clicking additional points of the pipe. 8 Press ENTER.

Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers | 353

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPIDLINELIST PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference P&ID Line List Project Setup Dialog Box Select 3D Class Dialog Box

Place Valves, Fittings, and Inline Equipment You can choose valves, fittings, and inline equipment from the P&ID Line List and place mapped Plant 3D counterparts in the model. Valves, fittings, and inline equipment are listed under each line segment. You can click any available component and place it in the Plant 3D model. Only those P&ID objects that have been mapped to corresponding Plant 3D objects are available for placement. Mapping ensures that the Plant 3D model has the same property values as the corresponding P&ID object. If a P&ID object is mapped to more than one Plant 3D object, you can specify the Plant object when you place it in your drawing. To place valves, fittings, or inline equipment based on P&ID data in the 3D model 1 Open a Plant 3D model. 2 On the ribbon, click Home ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ P&ID Line List. 3 In the P&ID Line List window, do the following: ■

In the drop-down list, click the P&ID drawing whose lines and components you want to view.

■

In the tree view, expand the Pipe Line Group. Click an item (for example: Gate Valve).

354 | Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D

■

Click Place.

4 Do one of the following: ■

If the size and spec match, go to step 5.

■

If the size or spec do not match, in the Select Size and Spec dialog box, do the following: ■

Under Spec, click a spec (for example: CS150).

■

Under Size, click a size (for example: 4”).

■

If you are sure that your choice is accurate for all situations, select the check box labeled Always Substitute the Selected Size For [size]. (The spec is not saved along with the size.)

■

If the size you want is not available, click Edit Size Mappings to edit the default mapping file. For more information, see Edit Size Mappings on page 357.

■

Click Select.

Place Valves, Fittings, and Inline Equipment | 355

5 Do one of the following: ■

If the P&ID object class is mapped to a single Plant 3D class, go step 6.

■

If the P&ID object class is mapped to multiple Plant 3D classes, in the Select Plant 3D Class dialog box, in the 3D Classes list, click a Plant 3D class. Click Place.

6 In the drawing area, click a point on a pipe to specify the location for the inline equipment. 7 Press ENTER. For more information, see Place Valves on page 471

356 | Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPIDLINELIST PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference P&ID Line List Project Setup Dialog Box

Edit Size Mappings If the sizes in a P&ID drawing do not match the sizes available for a Plant 3D model, you can edit the default mapping file.

Understand Size Mapping If the size (or spec) information of the P&ID object is not found in the corresponding Plant 3D information, you can supply this information. For example, if a P&ID valve specifies a size that does not exist for any Plant 3D valve, you are prompted to supply the correct size. If you specify, for example, 4”, you are offered the opportunity of saving that size as a match. You can also edit the default mapping files to modify or add sizes. Consult your system administrator if you have size-mapping questions. To edit size mappings 1 Open a Plant 3D model. 2 Do one of the following:

Edit Size Mappings | 357

3 ■ If you have attempted to place an object and the Select Size and Spec dialog box is displayed, click Edit Size Mappings. ■

If you want to edit size mappings but the Select Size and Spec dialog box is not displayed, at the Command prompt, enter plantpidsizemapping.

4 In the Size Mapping dialog box, click Imperial or Metric, depending on your needs. In the P&ID Size column, click a size (for example: 3/8”).In the 3D Size column, in the drop-down list, click an appropriate matching size (for example: 3/8 inch”).Continue mapping sizes as needed. To add a new mapping, click Add Row.Click OK.

358 | Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPIDLINELIST PROJECTSETUP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference P&ID Line List Project Setup Dialog Box

Validate the 3D Model You can validate a model and step through the Validation Summary to correct or flag detected discrepancies.

Understand Validation Settings Plant 3D objects based on P&ID data are not linked to their P&ID counterparts. Therefore, changes made to the P&ID drawing are not reflected in the model. However, you can validate the model against a P&ID drawing at any time to find any mismatches that exist between the two and correct them. For more information, see Understand the Role of Tags During Validation on page 360. You can configure validation settings to check for specific discrepancies. For example, you can check for the following mismatches between a Plant 3D model and a P&ID drawing: ■

Tagged inline items that exist in one and not the other

■

Items with the same tag that are different types

■

Properties that have different values

■

Inline items that are on different pipe lines

■

Equipment that has more (or fewer) nozzles

Validate the 3D Model | 359

Understand the Role of Tags During Validation Using mapping, you can place Plant 3D objects in your model with all P&ID property value information intact. If the mapped properties are not part of a tag format, the match is straightforward. If, however, the mapped properties are included in the P&ID tag, these properties must also be included in the Plant 3D tag.

Equivalent Tags During validation, if a P&ID object and a Plant 3D object have the same tag values, the objects are considered equivalent. If the tag values are not the same, the objects cannot be evaluated during a validation check. If the tags match, other comparison tests can take place (matching type, matching line, and so on). Here is an example of tag equivalence: ■

The P&ID property paint code is mapped to the Plant 3D property color.

■

The tag format for the P&ID object includes paint code (p-paint code).

■

An equivalent tag format for the Plant 3D object includes color (p-color).

Mismatched Tags Make sure to map every property that you use as a subpart of a P&ID tag format. Otherwise, the value is not copied when you place the Plant 3D object in the model. For example, if you have a P&ID object with a tag format that includes manufacturer, color, and supplier, but supplier is unmapped, only the values for manufacturer and color are included in the model. A question mark appears in the Plant 3D tag. Thus, the tags do not match and the objects are not compared during validation. NOTE If you change a default mapping or set up a new mapping, make sure that associated tag formats match.

Understand the Validation Process For best results when validating a Plant 3D model against a P&ID drawing, adhere to the following guidelines: ■

Make sure that the P&ID drawing is the most recent version.

■

Do not validate a model if P&ID information is unavailable.

360 | Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D

■

Do not validate a model if you are using placeholder parts. Placeholder parts are ignored.

For more information about the validation process, see Validate Project Drawings on page 591. To specify error types to flag 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the P&ID Drawings folder. Click Validate Config. 2 In the P&ID Validations Settings dialog box, in the Error Reporting tree view, expand 3D Model to P&ID Checks. Select the check boxes for the error types you want examined during validation.

3 Click OK. To validate a 3D model against a P&ID drawing 1 In the Project Manager, right-click the project node. Click Validate Project.

Validate the 3D Model | 361

2 When the Validation Progress dialog box is closed, do one of the following: ■

If none of the drawings have validation errors, the Validation Complete message is displayed. Click OK.

■

If there are errors in one or more drawings, the Validation Summary Window is displayed. Go to the next step.

3 To view information about each error, in the Validation Summary tree, click an error node. The drawing zooms to the problem object. 4 Perform the error action displayed in the Details pane.

Quick Reference Commands VALIDATE VALIDATECONFIG VALIDATESUMMARY

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Validation Progress Dialog Box P&ID Validation Settings Dialog Box Validation Summary Window

Correct Validation Errors You can correct errors identified during validation. After you validate the drawings, a list of flagged errors is displayed in the Validation Summary window. The following symbol identifies errors:

362 | Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D

To zoom to specific errors, click the name of the error. Error and status information is displayed in the Details area. You can ignore the error or fix it manually. Errors flagged as Ignored can be hidden by changing the setting in the Validation Summary window.

Error Validation Reference When you validate a model, you can flag and correct the following errors.

Inline Component Missing from P&ID Drawing or from Model Example:

Possible reasons for a mismatch include the following: ■

Both items are correctly modeled, but one is mis-tagged.

■

One of the items is missing from the P&ID drawing.

■

One of the items is missing from the Plant 3D model.

Description:

Either the tag assigned in the P&ID drawing is not found in the Plant 3D model or the reverse is true.

To Correct:

■

Make the necessary adjustments so that the tags match or add the missing part.

■

Ignore the error.

Correct Validation Errors | 363

Mismatch Between Class Types Example:

The P&ID class is Valve; the Plant 3D class is pump.

Description:

The tags in the P&ID drawing and the Plant 3D model match, but their class types differ from the types that were mapped.

To Correct:

■

Research and correct the mapping. Or substitute the part with another type that matches.

■

Ignore the error.

Property Mismatch Example:

The P&ID property for valve manufacturer is Gordon and the Plant 3D valve manufacturer is Hopkins Manufacturing.

Description:

The tags for the paired items match, but the properties values do not.

To Correct:

■

Change the property values to match.

■

Ignore the error.

Tagged Inline Equipment on a Different Line in 3D Model Example:

A P&ID valve is on different lines in the P&ID drawing and the Plant 3D model.

Description:

Inline equipment is not on the same line in the model as its counterpart in the P&ID drawing.

To Correct:

■

Move the equipment to the correct line.

■

Ignore the error.

Nozzle Mismatch Example:

A tank in the P&ID drawing has two nozzles and in the Plant 3D model, the same tank has three nozzles.

364 | Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D

Description:

The model has a component with an extra nozzle or a missing nozzle when compared to its corresponding component in the P&ID drawing.

To Correct:

■

Add or remove the nozzle in question.

■

Ignore the error.

Quick Reference Commands VALIDATE VALIDATECONFIG VALIDATESUMMARY

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Validation Progress Dialog Box P&ID Validation Settings Dialog Box Validation Summary Window

Correct Validation Errors | 365

366

Create and Modify a Plant 3D Model

With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create a 3D model of piping systems. You can add pipe, equipment, structural components, and pipe supports to the model. When you route pipe in a 3D model, fittings are automatically added when you change routing direction or pipe size. 3D pipe objects connect to adjacent objects on the same pipeline. You can modify these objects as a group. You use a pipe spec when routing to provide information about the pipe and available fittings. The pipe spec also determines which parts to use by default for a branch connection. You can add equipment from a library of items including pumps, tanks, vessels, heat exchangers, and so on. When pipe is connected to a nozzle fittings and fasteners (for example: bolts and gaskets) are added automatically. You can add pipe supports such as shoes, trunnions, trapeze bars, or dummy legs from a library. If you create an isometric drawing from the model it includes pipe supports. You can create structural elements, such as AISC steel members, structural trim, stairs, and railing. You can cut and arrange beams into structures such as a pipe rack.

367

368

Create and Modify Equipment

8

In AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create and modify 3D models of plant equipment such as tanks, pumps, boilers, and filters. When modeling equipment, you define its physical dimensions, location, orientation, and other details. You can also create templates from equipment and add nozzles to connect pipes to equipment.

Create Equipment In AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create equipment from parametric patterns or user-fabricated models, or add custom equipment to a drawing by converting a 3D DWG model from another program. When you create an equipment model, you define its geometric information, location, orientation, and non-geometric information (such as an equipment tag or description).

Create Equipment From Parametric Patterns AutoCAD Plant 3D includes patterns for some equipment types. You can use these patterns as a starting point for your own equipment. Using equipment patterns, you can create your own piece of equipment simply by changing the dimensions, placement parameters, and placement location in the drawing area. For example, you can create a centrifugal pump from an existing pattern with a modification to one of the values. In the illustration on the left, the position for the nozzle discharge (PF1C) of the centrifugal pump is offset to the right by

369

4 inches. The illustration on the right shows the nozzle discharge set to 0", or centered on the pump.

The following parametric equipment patterns are provided with the program (you can also create new equipment for any of the following items): ■

Heaters. Includes Box Type Heater, Cylindrical Heater.

■

Heat Exchangers. Includes Breech Lock Heat Exchanger, Plate Frame Heat Exchanger, Reboiler, Vertical Down Heat Exchanger, and Vertical Up Heat Exchanger.

■

Pumps. Includes Sump Pump, Hose Pump, Horizontal Splitcase Pump, Horizontal Splitcase Turbine Pump, Vertical Inline Pump, Vertical Inline Pump (dual arm), Centrifugal Pump, and Turbine Centrifugal Pump. The shapes for pumps are fixed.

■

Strainer Equipment. Includes Strainers. The shapes for strainers are fixed.

■

Tanks. Includes Horizontal Tank and Vertical Tank.

■

Vessels. Includes Horizontal Vessel and Vertical Vessel.

You can also create a pattern by stacking individual shapes onto each other and changing the default dimensions and placement parameters of each shape. For more information, see Create User-Fabricated Equipment on page 375. To create equipment from an existing pattern 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Create.

370 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

2 In the Create Equipment drop-down list, click an equipment class (for example: Vessel). In the flyout menu, click an existing equipment type (for example: Horizontal Vessel). 3 (For all equipment types except pumps and strainers) Under Shapes, click Add to add available shapes for this equipment type, or click Remove to delete an existing shape. Use the Up and Down arrows to change the stacking order of the shapes. NOTE In the Shapes list, for vertical equipment, the top-most shape is listed first, and the bottom-most shape is listed last. For horizontal equipment, the front is listed first and the end is listed last. 4 Under General, do the following: ■

(Optional) To assign a tag to the equipment, click in the Tag box. In the Assign Tag dialog box, in the Type box, enter a type (for example: V for Vessel). In the Number box, enter a unique numeric identifier. Click Assign.

■

To assign a description for this piece of equipment, in the Long Description box, enter a description (for example: Vessel-Custom).

■

To assign an elevation (the vertical distance from the insertion point to the bottom of the first shape), in the Elevation box, enter a value.

Create Equipment From Parametric Patterns | 371

5 Under Shapes, click a shape. Under Dimensions, enter dimension values. Repeat this step for each shape dimension you want to change. NOTE When you click a shape to change its dimension, the shape and its dimension values are displayed in the preview image. 6 To add a nozzle to or modify an existing nozzle on the equipment shape you defined, under Shapes, click the shape. On the Nozzles tab, do the following: ■

To the right of the equipment image, select an existing nozzle or click Add to add a nozzle to the selected equipment shape. NOTE Nozzles are based on the DIN or ISO nozzle catalogs that are included in the program. For example, Nozzle 1 (ASME B36.10) for a Vertical Vessel contains the following default values: Nominal value = 4, Nominal unit = inches, Pressure Class = 300, End Type = LFL, and Facing = RF.

■

Under Part Properties, in the Part box, click the part. In the Select Part dialog box, add relevant information (nozzle type, end type, and nominal size). Under Description, click a nozzle. Click Select. NOTE If no nozzles are displayed under Description, the combination of nozzle type, end type, and nominal size you defined is not in the parts catalog. Try again.

■

Under Parameters, to the right of Location, select the nozzle location (Top, Bottom, or Radial). To the right of L, add a number to represent the nozzle length (the program defaults to inches). Add other parameter information (R = radius, A = angle, L = length, P = perpendicular, I = inclination, N = rotation, O = offset, H = height, and T = twist) as necessary.

372 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

NOTE When you click a nozzle type, the position of the nozzle is displayed in the preview image. 7 On the Data tab, add relevant data for items (such as Manufacturer, Material, Size, and so on).

Create Equipment From Parametric Patterns | 373

8 (Optional) To use this piece of equipment and its data as a template for other equipment pieces, do the following: ■

Click Templates.

■

In the drop-down list, click Save Current Settings as Template.

■

In the Save Template As dialog box, navigate to the location where you want to save this template. In the File Name box, enter a template name. Click Save.

NOTE The file extension for an equipment template is .peqs. 9 In the Create Equipment dialog box, click Create. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the equipment model or enter coordinates at the desired insertion point. 11 To orient the equipment model, do one of the following: ■

To orient the model to the desired position, enter rotation values or use the compass tool. Press Enter.

■

Press Enter to accept the default position. You can use AutoCAD commands such as move, rotate, or 3drotate to further position the equipment.

374 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

Quick Reference Commands PLANTEQUIPMENTCREATE

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Create Equipment Dialog Box

Create User-Fabricated Equipment For less common pieces of equipment (such as turbine compressors), you can build your own equipment by selecting and assembling shapes along a vertical or horizontal axis. You define the stacking order of the shapes along the axis, and specify the dimensions and placement parameters for the equipment. Depending on the shapes, you can also define the number, location, and dimensions of nozzles. NOTE The shapes for pumps and strainers are fixed. You cannot add, delete, or change the shape of these equipment types. However, you can change their dimensions. As the following illustration shows, you can create a vertical column by placing a large cylinder at the bottom, a cone stacked above it, a narrow cylinder on top of the cone, and a dish head on the top. You specify the height, dimensions, and other parameters as you add each shape.

Create User-Fabricated Equipment | 375

For vertical equipment, shapes are stacked along a vertical axis, from top to bottom. For horizontal equipment, shapes are stacked along a horizontal axis, from left to right. The following table lists the shapes that are available for creating user-fabricated equipment. Shape

Preview Image

Description

Dimensions

2:1 Torispheric Head

A dished, spherical head with a flange.

Diameter (D)

Torispheric Head

A dished, spherical head with no flange.

Diameter (D)

376 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

Shape

Preview Image

Description

Dimensions

Round-to-Rectangle

Orientation Depth (D1) Width (W) Height (H) Diameter (D2) Eccentricity (E) Rotation (A)

Pyramid

Orientation Bottom Depth (D1) Top Depth (D2) Width (W) Height (H)

Halfsphere

A head that is one-half of a sphere. The depth is equal to half the diameter. Used for high-pressure vessels due to its inherent strength. Expensive to manufacture because of the higher surface area, so it is only used when necessary.

Diameter (D)

2:1 Elliptical Head

A head that is in the shape of an ellipse, such that the long axis is twice the length of the short axis. The head depth is onequarter the diameter. Has a flange.

Diameter (D) Straight Flange Height (SF)

Create User-Fabricated Equipment | 377

Shape Elliptical Head

Preview Image

Description

Dimensions

A head that is in the shape of an ellipse, such that the long axis is twice the length of the short axis. The head depth is onequarter the diameter. Does not have a flange.

Diameter (D)

Cylinder

Diameter (D) Height (H)

Cone

Orientation Bottom Diameter (D1) Top Diameter (D2) Height (H) Eccentricity (E) Rotation (A)

Cube

Depth (D) Width (W) Height (H)

To create fabricated equipment 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Create.

378 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

2 In the Create Equipment drop-down list, click an equipment class (for example: Vessel). In the flyout, click New (for example: New Vertical Vessel). NOTE For most equipment types, you create a piece of equipment that builds on a vertical or horizontal axis. 3 Click Add to add available shapes for this equipment type. Use the Up and Down arrows to change the position of the shapes. 4 Under General, do the following: ■

(Optional) To assign a tag to the equipment, click in the Tag box. In the Assign Tag dialog box, in the Type box, enter a type (for example: V for Vessel). In the Number box, enter a unique numeric identifier. Click Assign.

■

To assign a description for this piece of equipment, in the Long Description box, enter a description (for example: Vessel-Custom).

■

To assign an elevation (the vertical distance from the insertion point to the bottom of the first shape), in the Elevation box, enter a value.

5 Under Shapes, click a shape. Under Dimensions, enter dimension values. Repeat this step for each shape dimension you want to change.

Create User-Fabricated Equipment | 379

NOTE When you click a shape to change its dimension, the shape and its dimension values are displayed in the preview image. 6 To add a nozzle to an equipment shape you defined, under Shapes, click the shape. On the Nozzles tab, do the following: ■

To the right of the equipment image, click Add to add a nozzle to the selected equipment shape. NOTE Nozzles are based on the DIN or ISO nozzle catalogs, which are included in the program. For example, Nozzle 1 (ASME B36.10) for a Vertical Vessel contains the following default values: Nominal value = 4, Nominal unit = inches, Pressure Class = 300, End Type = LFL, and Facing = RF.

■

Under Part Properties, in the Part box, click the part. In the Select Part dialog box, add relevant information (nozzle type, end type, and nominal size). Under Description, click a nozzle. Click Select. NOTE If no nozzles are displayed under Description, the combination of nozzle type, end type, and nominal size you defined is not in the parts catalog. Try again.

■

Under Parameters, to the right of Location, select the location where you want to place the nozzle (Top, Bottom, Radial, or Line). To the right of L, add a number to represent the nozzle length (the program defaults to inches). Add other parameter information (R = radius, A = angle, L = length, P = perpendicular, I = inclination, N = rotation, O = offset, H = height, and T = twist) as necessary.

380 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

NOTE When you click a nozzle type, the position of the nozzle is displayed in the preview image. 7 On the Data tab, add relevant data for items (such as Manufacturer, Material, Size, and so on).

Create User-Fabricated Equipment | 381

8 (Optional) To use this piece of equipment and its data as a template for other equipment pieces, do the following: ■

Click Templates.

■

In the drop-down list, click Save Current Settings as Template.

■

In the Save Template As dialog box, navigate to the location where you want to save this template. In the File Name box, enter a template name. Click Save.

NOTE The file extension for an equipment template is .peqs. 9 In the Create Equipment dialog box, click Create. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the equipment model or enter coordinates at the desired insertion point. 11 To orient the equipment model, do one of the following: ■

To orient the model to the desired position, enter rotation values or use the compass tool. Press Enter.

■

Press Enter to accept the default position. You can use AutoCAD commands such as move, rotate, or 3drotate to further position the equipment.

382 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

Quick Reference Commands PLANTEQUIPMENTCREATE

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Create Equipment Dialog Box

Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D Equipment You can convert any 3D DWG model to an AutoCAD Plant 3D equipment model. To convert a 3D DWG model to an AutoCAD Plant 3D equipment model 1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the Plant 3D Drawings folder. Click Copy Drawing to Project. 2 In the Select Drawings to Copy to Project dialog box, navigate to and select the DWG file containing the objects you want to convert. Click Open. 3 In the Project Manager, double-click the drawing that contains the 3D model you want to convert. 4 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Convert Equipment. 5 In the drawing area, select the objects you want to convert. 6 When you are finished selecting objects, press Enter.

Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D Equipment | 383

7 In the Convert to Equipment dialog box, click the equipment class you want to assign to the object (for example: Compressor) so that the converted object is identified in the Data Manager, on the Properties palette, and in reports. Click Select. 8 To specify the insertion base point, click to place the item in the drawing area. 9 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Equipment tab, do the following: ■

To create a description for the equipment, in the Long Description box, enter a description.

■

To assign a tag to the equipment, click in the Tag box. In the Assign Tag dialog box, in the Type box, enter a type. In the Expression box, enter a unique numeric identifier. Click Assign.

10 (Optional) To add nozzle metadata to a nozzle you specified in the equipment object you defined, on the Nozzles tab, do the following: ■

Click Add to add a nozzle to the converted object.

384 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

NOTE Nozzles are based on the DIN or ISO nozzle catalogs, which are included in the program. For example, Nozzle 1 (ASME B36.10) for a Vertical Vessel contains the following default values: Nominal value = 4, Nominal unit = inches, Pressure Class = 300, End Type = LFL, and Facing = RF. ■

Under Part Properties, in the Part box, click to select a part. In the Select Part dialog box, add relevant information (nozzle type, end type, and nominal size). Under Description, click a nozzle. Click Select. NOTE If no nozzles are displayed under Description, the combination of nozzle type, end type, and nominal size you defined is not in the parts catalog. Try again.

■

Under Parameters, to the right of Location, click Mark.

11 In the drawing area, click a location on the converted object where you want to place the center of the nozzle. Select a second point. 12 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Data tab, add relevant data for items (such as Manufacturer, Material, Size, and so on).

Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D Equipment | 385

13 (Optional) To use this piece of equipment and its data as a template for other equipment pieces, do the following: ■

Click Templates.

■

In the drop-down list, click Save Current Settings as Template.

■

In the Save Template To dialog box, navigate to the location where you want to save this template. In the File Name box, enter a template name. Click Save.

NOTE The file extension for an equipment template is .peqs. 14 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, click OK.

386 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

Quick Reference Commands PLANTEQUIPMENTCONVERT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Convert to Equipment Dialog Box

Modify Equipment You can modify equipment models created in AutoCAD Plant 3D or converted from another program. When modifying an equipment model, you can change all values except equipment type and equipment class. You can modify custom equipment (equipment converted from another program), but you can change only its tag data and nozzle values. You cannot change dimensions or other geometric parameters. To modify equipment 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Modify Equipment. 2 In the drawing area, click the equipment model you want to modify. 3 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Equipment tab, edit the tag data, description, or dimension values as needed. Add or remove shapes as needed. 4 Click Apply to see the changes reflected in the drawing without closing the dialog box. 5 On the Nozzles tab, edit the nozzle data as needed. 6 Click OK.

Modify Equipment | 387

To modify custom equipment 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Modify Equipment. 2 In the drawing area, click the custom equipment model you want to modify. 3 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Equipment tab, modify the tag data and description as needed. 4 Click the Nozzles tab and modify the nozzle data as needed. 5 When you are finished making changes, click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTEQUIPMENTMODIFY

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Modify Equipment Dialog Box

Position and Manipulate Equipment in a Drawing After you create an equipment model, you define its position and orientation in the drawing.

Reorient Equipment in a Drawing After an equipment model is placed in a drawing, you can reorient the equipment using standard AutoCAD commands (such as MOVE or ROTATE). You can also use grips to reorient equipment. NOTE Nozzles on equipment are fixed and cannot be moved independently of the equipment. To move nozzles, select the equipment item and on the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Modify Equipment.

388 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

To reorient or move equipment in a drawing 1 In the drawing area, click the equipment model you want to move or rotate. 2 Do one of the following: ■

Click the Move grip. Drag the equipment to the desired location.

■

At the Command prompt, enter move. Follow the instructions on the command line.

■

At the Command prompt, enter rotate. Follow the instructions on the command line.

Copy Equipment You can create an equipment model by copying an existing one. All settings for the copied equipment model are the same as the original, except that the tag contains question marks. To copy equipment 1 In the drawing area, select the equipment item you want to copy. 2 At the Command prompt, enter copy, and follow the instructions on the command line.

Attach Graphics to Equipment You can add graphics to equipment, making them part of the equipment. Attached graphics may include objects such as brackets, davits, clips, boots, domes, or integral railings.

Copy Equipment | 389

Once you add a graphic to an equipment model, it becomes part of the model, and is moved, copied, or deleted along with it. To edit an attached graphic, first detach it from the equipment. After editing, you can attach it again. To attach graphics to equipment 1 On the ribbon, click Home ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Attach Equipment. 2 In the drawing area, click the equipment model to which you want to attach objects. 3 Click the objects you want to attach to the equipment. 4 When you are finished selecting objects to attach, press Enter.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTEQUIPMENTATTACH

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Detach Graphics from Equipment You can detach previously attached graphics from equipment. Detach a graphic from an equipment model to either edit the graphic or remove it. To detach a graphic from equipment 1 On the ribbon, click Home ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Detach Equipment. 2 In the drawing, click the equipment model that contains an attached graphic. 3 Click Yes to detach all graphics from the equipment model.

390 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

Quick Reference Commands PLANTEQUIPMENTDETACH

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Create and Modify Equipment Reserve Space Reserve space is empty space that you designate when an open area is needed for service or maintenance of a piece of adjacent equipment. You can define reserve space using standard AutoCAD commands. Then, you can attach the reserve space object to an equipment model. The reserve space object is marked with a special flag and is placed on a separate layer. To add reserve space to a piece of equipment 1 Create an AutoCAD object (such as a box or a sphere) to use as reserve space. 2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Attach Equipment. 3 In the drawing area, click to select the equipment model to which you want to attach reserve space. 4 At the Command prompt, enter S (attach reServe space), and click the object to set it as the equipment reserve space. To modify reserve space 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Detach Equipment. 2 In the drawing area, click to select the equipment model that has reserve space attached to it. 3 Click Yes to detach all objects.

Create and Modify Equipment Reserve Space | 391

4 Change the object being used as the reserve space. 5 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Attach Equipment. 6 In the drawing, click to select the equipment model. 7 At the Command prompt, enter S (attach reServe space), and click the object to set it as the equipment reserve space.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTEQUIPMENTATTACH PLANTEQUIPMENTDETACH

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

392 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

Create and Modify Structure

9

You can create a structural model in your AutoCAD Plant 3D drawing.

Understand Structural Modeling in AutoCAD Plant 3D AutoCAD Plant 3D provides lightweight structural modeling capabilities. You can use AutoCAD Plant 3D to create structural objects. When put together with piping, equipment, and other objects, the structural tools in AutoCAD Plant 3D can help you detect issues such as interference in your plant models. Including structural objects also enables client reviews for hazards and approximates structural design on piping plans and other orthographic drawings.

Set the Structural Model Representation You can set the structural model representation that controls the display of structural objects. The structural model representation applies to all structural objects in a drawing. You can change the model representation at any time.

393

The following list describes model representation options in increasing level of complexity and detail. Model Representation Name

Model Representa- Description tion

Line Model

This model is best for tasks that do not require extensive detail, such as creating a member. In line model, objects are represented as lines, and you can easily select insertion points for new objects.

Symbol Model

This model is best for quickly making small changes or additions to a large project.

Outline Model

This model is best for output files and measuring distances. Insertion points are not easy to see in this model, so it is not the recommended representation for creating objects.

Shape Model

This model displays objects at their original dimensions.

To set the structural model representation 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Line Model drop-down.

394 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

2 Click one of the available model representations: Line Model, Symbol Model, Outline Model, or Shape Model.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELSETREP

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Work With Structural Grids Before placing structural objects, you can create a structural grid in the drawing area. Grids are optional, but make it easier to create a structural model in 3D space. When you create a grid, you specify the grid name, X, Y, and Z positions, and a coordinate system. Structure units default to the base unit (Imperial or Metric) specified for the project.

Work With Structural Grids | 395

You can create a grid using the world coordinate system (WCS), user coordinate system (UCS), or 3 points. If you use the 3 Points option, you specify the origin and direction of the three axes that define the grid. You can specify relative coordinates, which are based on the last point entered. Use relative coordinates when you know the location of a point in relation to the previous point specified. To specify relative coordinates, precede the coordinate values with an @ sign. For example, entering @3,4 specifies a point 3 units along the X axis and 4 units along the Y axis from the last point specified. To create a structural grid 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Grid.

2 In the Create Grid dialog box, in the Grid Name box, enter a name for the grid. 3 Under Coordinate System, click WCS, UCS, or 3 Points to set the coordinate system for creating the grid. If you choose 3 Points, specify the origin and direction of the three axes of the grid. 4 To specify the axis value, do one of the following: ■

In the Axis Value box, enter the desired coordinate values. Use an @ sign to enter point coordinates either relative to the origin or relative to values.

■

Click to specify points in the drawing space. Press Enter when finished.

396 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

5 To specify the row value, do one of the following: ■

In the Row Value box, enter the desired values.

■

Click to specify points in the drawing space. Press Enter when finished.

6 To specify the platform value, do one of the following: ■

In the Platform Value box, enter the desired values.

■

Click to specify points in the drawing space. Press Enter when finished.

7 Click Create. To edit a structural grid 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Structure Edit. 2 In the drawing, click the grid to edit. 3 In the Edit Grid dialog box, modify values as needed. Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELGRID

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Create Grid Dialog Box Edit Grid Dialog Box

Work with Structural Members A structural member is a 3D structural object, such as a beam or column.

Work with Structural Members | 397

You can specify member settings, create and edit structural members, and manipulate structural members in various ways.

Specify Member Settings Member settings are default values for new structural members. You can change these settings as needed. Structural member settings focus mainly on shape, size, and orientation. When you create a new structural member, it derives its properties from the current member settings. For example, if member settings are currently set to ANSI standards, Pipe - Shapes ASTM shape type, and 2” shape size, then all new structural members you create have these settings by default. You can edit individual structural members. Suppose you need several structural members with most of the same properties, but at slightly different sizes. You can specify the member settings, create the structural members, and edit individual members to change the size as needed. To specify member settings 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Settings menu ➤ Member Settings.

398 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

2 If a member exists in your drawing that has the properties you want to use for all new members, click Match Properties and select the member in the drawing area. The Member Settings dialog is populated with the appropriate values. Modify the values if needed, as described in the following steps. When finished modifying values, skip to Step 10. 3 In the Member Settings dialog box, in the Shape Standard list, click a shape standard. 4 Under Shape Type, click the desired shape type in the list. To search for a shape type, enter the entire shape type name or part of the shape type name in the box, and click

.

5 In the Shape Size list, click the desired shape size. The available sizes depend on the currently selected shape type. To search for a shape size, enter the entire shape size or part of the shape size name in the box, and click

.

Specify Member Settings | 399

6 In the Material Standard list, click the desired material standard to use for newly created members. 7 In the Material Code list, click the desired material code to use for newly created members. 8 Under Angle, enter the desired angle value, or click a value in the list.

You can click

to increase the current value by 90 degrees.

9 Optionally, do any of the following to change member orientation: ■

Click a point in the Orientation preview image to define a justification point.

■

Select the Flip About Y Axis check box to orient the Y axis in the opposite direction.

■

Select the Align Y Axis with Z UCS to align the Y axis of the member with the Z UCS.

10 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands No entries

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Member Settings Dialog Box

Create a Structural Member You can create a structural member by specifying its start point and end point, or by aligning the member with a line that you select in your drawing. When you create structural members, you are prompted to specify points on the structure. You can set properties such as shape and size before creating the structure.

400 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

To create a structural member by specifying start and end points 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Member. 2 In the drawing area, specify the start point. 3 In the drawing area, specify the end point. 4 The prompt is redisplayed to enable you to create multiple members. Press Enter when finished creating members. To create a structural member by aligning with a line in the drawing 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Member. 2 At the command prompt, enter l (Line). 3 In the drawing area, click a line to align the member to. 4 The prompt is redisplayed to enable you to create multiple members. Press Enter when finished creating members.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELMEMBER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Edit a Structural Member You can edit an individual structural member to change its settings. When you edit a structural member, you can change the same settings that you specify in member settings. If you want to change settings for all new structural members, use member settings instead. You can also use the Properties palette to edit member properties.

Edit a Structural Member | 401

To edit a structural member 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Structure Edit. 2 In the drawing area, select the member object you want to edit.

3 In the Edit Member dialog box, edit the values as needed. Click OK.

402 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELEDIT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Edit Member Dialog Box

Change the Length of a Structural Member You can make a structural object longer. You can change the length of a member using plantsteellengthen or by dragging the grips. You can use any of the following options when using plantsteellengthen: ■

Delta. Specify the number of increments by which to increase or decrease the length.

■

Total. Specify the total absolute length from the endpoint that is closest to the point where you selected the member.

■

Disregard prompts and click a member in the drawing area to display the current length of the member.

To change the length of a structural member incrementally 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Lengthen Member. 2 In the drawing area, select the member you want to lengthen or shorten. 3 At the Command prompt, enter d to specify the new length in increments. 4 At the Command prompt, enter a positive value to lengthen the member, or a negative value to shorten the member. The distance is measured from the end point that is closest to the selection point.

Change the Length of a Structural Member | 403

To change the length of a structural member using absolute length 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Lengthen Member. 2 In the drawing area, select the member you want to lengthen or shorten. 3 At the Command prompt, enter t to specify the absolute length. 4 At the Command prompt, enter a positive value to indicate the total absolute length of the member, as measured from the end point that is closest to the selection point. To change the length of a structural member using grips 1 In the drawing area, select the member you want to lengthen or shorten. 2 Select a stretch grip on the member. 3 Move the pointing device and click to specify the stretch point.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELLENGTHEN

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Cut a Structural Member You can cut a structural member with respect to the boundaries of another structural member. You can cut a structural member in one of two ways: ■

Cut the member to the boundary of another member.

■

Cut two members to the boundaries of each other.

404 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

After you cut one or more members, you can specify the gap between the cut member and the member boundary. To cut a structural member to the boundary of another member 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Cut Back Member. 2 At the command prompt, enter b (Both). 3 In the drawing area, click the first structural member whose boundaries you want to cut a second member to.

4 Click the other member you want to cut. To cut two structural members to the boundaries of each other 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Cut Back Member. 2 At the command prompt, enter b (Both). 3 At the command prompt, enter o (One). 4 In the drawing area, click the limiting structural member (the member whose boundaries you want to cut another member to). 5 Click the member you want to cut.

Cut a Structural Member | 405

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELCUT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Miter Two Structural Members Together You can fit two structural members together in a miter joint. You can miter two members together in one of two ways: ■

Use a bisector cut.

■

Align the profile edges.

After performing a miter cut, you can select additional members to miter cut and you can specify a gap between members. To miter two structural members together 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Miter Cut Member. 2 In the drawing area, click the first member to miter.

406 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

3 Click the second member to miter together.

To align the edges of two structural members 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Miter Cut Member. 2 (Optional) To specify a gap between the two structural members, at the command prompt, enter g (Gap). Specify a distance or positive value and press Enter.

Miter Two Structural Members Together | 407

3 At the command prompt, enter a (Align edges). 4 In the drawing area, click the first member to align. 5 Click the second member to align. To create a bisector cut between two structural members 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Miter Cut Member. 2 (Optional) To specify a gap between the two structural members, at the command prompt, enter g (Gap). Specify a distance or positive value and press Enter. 3 In the drawing area, click the first member on which to apply a bisector cut. 4 Click the second member on which to apply a bisector cut.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELMITER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Trim or Extend a Structural Member You can trim or extend a structural member to meet a plane. You can specify the intersection plane that defines the boundary for trimming or extending the member. To trim a structural member 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Trim Member.

408 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

2 In the Trim to Plane dialog box, Under Intersection Plane, click a plane to use as the boundary. Click OK. 3 In the drawing area, click the member to trim. NOTE To switch to plantsteelextend, hold down SHIFT and click the member you want to extend. To extend a structural member 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Extend Member.

Trim or Extend a Structural Member | 409

2 In the Extend to Plane dialog box, under Intersection Plane, click a plane to use as the boundary. Click OK. 3 In the drawing area, click the member to extend. NOTE To switch to plantsteeltrim, hold down SHIFT and click the member you want to trim.

410 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELEXTEND PLANTSTEELTRIM

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Trim to Plane Dialog Box Extend to Plane Dialog Box

Edge Cut a Structural Member An edge cut trims multiple structural members according to the edge of another member. You can specify a gap value between the cut member and boundary. To edge cut a structural member 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Cut Member Edges. 2 At the prompt, enter a positive value to indicate the gap between the member you intend to cut and the boundary. 3 In the drawing area, select one or more members. The members are trimmed at both ends.

Edge Cut a Structural Member | 411

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELEDGECUT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Restore a Structural Member You can restore a structural member to its original condition. The endpoint that is closest to the selection point is restored. You can make repeated selections to restore multiple objects. To restore a structural member 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Restore Member. 2 In the drawing area, select the member that you want to restore.

412 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELRESTORE

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Work with Structural Trim You can add structural trim to your 3D models, including railings, stairs, and ladders. Use structural trim in your model for interference detection, client reviews of hazard and other operations, and showing approximate design on piping plans.

Work with Railings You can add railings to your structural models. Specify railing settings to provide default values for all new railings. When you create a railing, its settings come from these railing settings. You can change the railing settings or edit an individual railing. To specify railing settings 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Settings menu ➤ Railing Settings.

Work with Structural Trim | 413

2 In the Railing Settings dialog box, enter the desired geometry values. To change shape values: ■

Under Shape click the [...] button that corresponds with the railing shape (Handrail, 1st Mid Rail, Kick Plate, or Post) you want to change.

414 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

In the Railing Settings dialog box, make desired changes and click Select. ■

To specify a continuous middle rail, under Shape, select the Middle Rail (Continuous) check box.

3 Click OK. To create a railing 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Railing. 2 In the drawing area, click to specify the start point of the railing. 3 Specify the end point of the railing. Press Enter. To create a railing and align it with another object 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Railing. 2 At the command prompt, enter o (Object). 3 In the drawing area, click to specify the object you want to align the railing to. To edit a railing 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Structure Edit. 2 In the drawing area, select the railing to edit.

Work with Railings | 415

3 In the Edit Railing dialog box, modify the geometry values as needed. To edit shape values: ■

Under Shape click the [...] button that corresponds with the railing shape (Handrail, 1st Mid Rail, Kick Plate, or Post) you want to change.

416 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

In the Railing Settings dialog box, make desired changes and click Select. ■

To specify a continuous middle rail, under Shape, select the Middle Rail (Continuos) check box.

4 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELRAILING PLANTSTEELEDIT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Railing Settings Dialog Box Edit Railing Dialog Box

Work with Stairs You can create steps or a staircase in your structural model. Use stair settings to specify default values for all new stairs that you create. After you create stairs, you can edit individual steps or staircases to change the settings as needed. Stairs do not include handrails, but you can add handrails after the stairs have been placed. For more information about handrails, see Work with Railings on page 413. To specify stair settings 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Settings menu ➤ Stair Settings.

Work with Stairs | 417

2 In the Stair Settings dialog box, enter the desired geometry values. 3 To change step data: ■

Under Shape, Step Data click the [...] button, In the Select Step dialog box, make desired changes and click OK.

4 To change stair shape: ■

Under Shape, Stair Shape click the [...] button, In the Select Stair Shape dialog box, make desired changes and click Select.

5 Click OK. To create stairs 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Stairs. 2 To select the first point of the stairs, click in the drawing area.

418 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

3 To select the next point of the stairs, click in the drawing area again. To create a series of contiguous stair segments, continue clicking in the drawing area to specify each segment. Press Enter when finished. To edit stairs 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Structure Edit. 2 In the drawing area, select the stairs you want to edit.

3 In the Edit Stair dialog box, modify the geometry values as needed. 4 To edit step data: ■

Under Shape, Step Data click the [...] button, In the Select Step dialog box, make desired changes and click OK.

Work with Stairs | 419

5 To edit stair shape: ■

Under Shape, Stair Shape click the [...] button, In the Select Stair Shape dialog box, make desired changes and click Select.

6 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELSTAIR PLANTSTEELEDIT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Edit Stair Dialog Box Stair Settings Dialog Box

Work with Ladders You can add ladders to your structural model. Optionally, the ladder can have a cage. Specify ladder settings to control the properties of all new ladders. If needed, you can then edit each individual ladder. To specify ladder settings 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Settings menu ➤ Ladder Settings.

420 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

2 In the Ladder Settings dialog box, Ladder tab, under General, click a type. Under Description, enter the desired description for the ladder. 3 Under Geometry, enter desired geometry values. 4 To change shape values, do any of the following: ■

Under Shape, Ladder Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select Ladder Shape dialog box, make desired changes and click Select.

■

To rotate the ladder shape by 90 degrees, select the Switch X and Y axes check box.

Work with Ladders | 421

■

Under Shape, Rung Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select Rung Shape dialog box, make desired changes and click Select.

5 Click the Cage tab and do any of the following:

■

Under General, click the Draw Cage check box to specify a cage, if desired. Under Description, enter the desired description for the cage.

■

Under Geometry, edit geometry values as needed.

6 Click OK.

422 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

To create a ladder 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Ladder. 2 To specify the bottom point of the ladder, click in the drawing area. 3 To specify the top point of the ladder, click again in the drawing area. 4 To specify the orientation of the ladder, click a third time in the drawing area. Press Enter. To edit a ladder 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Structure Edit. 2 In the drawing area, select the ladder you want to edit. 3 In the Edit Ladder Settings dialog box, Ladder tab, under General, make desired changes. 4 Under Geometry, modify geometry values as needed. 5 To change shape values, do any of the following: ■

Under Shape, Ladder Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select Ladder Shape dialog box, edit values as needed and click Select.

■

To switch X and Y axes, select the Switch X and Y axes check box.

■

Under Shape, Rung Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select Rung Shape dialog box, edit values as needed and click Select.

6 Click the Cage tab, and do any of the following: ■

Under General, modify settings as needed.

■

Under Geometry, edit geometry values as needed

7 Click OK.

Work with Ladders | 423

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELLADDER PLANTSTEELEDIT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Ladder Settings Dialog Box Edit Ladder Dialog Box

Explode Structural Trim Objects You can explode structural trim objects into individual members. Railings, stairs, and ladders are complex structural objects made up of multiple structural members. If you want to edit parts of the object in a way that is not possible by editing the complete object, you can explode the object into individual members. To explode a structural object 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Structural Explode. 2 In the drawing area, click a structural trim object to explode.

424 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELEXPLODE

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Work with Footings When you create a structural footing in your model, you can specify its length, width, and depth. You can specify footing settings to determine the values for all new footings. Then you can customize the settings by editing individual footings as needed. To specify footing settings 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Settings menu ➤ Footing Settings.

2 In the Footing Settings dialog box, enter the values to use for new footings. Click OK.

Work with Footings | 425

To create a footing 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Footing. 2 To specify the insertion point of the footing, click in the drawing area. To edit a footing 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Structure Edit. 2 In the drawing area, click the footing you want to edit.

3 In the Edit Footing dialog box, modify the values as needed. Click OK.

426 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELFOOTING PLANTSTEELEDIT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Footing Settings Dialog Box Edit Footing Dialog Box

Work with Plates You can add a plate or grate to a structural model. When you create a plate, you specify its type, materials, placement, shape, and other information. To create a plate 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Plate. 2 In the Create Plate/Grate dialog box, in the Type list, click Plate or Grating. 3 In the Material Standard list, click the material standard to use. 4 In the Material Code list, click the desired material code. 5 In the Thickness list, click the desired thickness for the plate or grating. 6 For gratings only, in the Hatch Pattern list, click the desired hatch pattern. 7 For gratings only, in the Hatch Scale box, enter the desired hatch scale value. 8 Under Justification, specify the reference point. 9 Under Shape, specify a rectangular or polyline shape. Click Create. 10 To specify the corner of the plate, click the drawing area. 11 To specify the opposite corner of the plate, click the drawing area again.

Work with Plates | 427

To edit a plate ➤

In the drawing area, select the plate to edit. ■

To change plate size, click a stretch grip and move the cursor to increase or decrease size.

■

To change other properties, right-click the plate. In the Property Palette, change properties as needed.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTSTEELPLATE

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Create Plate/Grate Dialog Box

Export Structural Objects to SDNF You can select structural objects in a drawing and export them to Steel Detailing Neutral Format (SDNF). Structural objects you can export to this format are: ■

Structural members

■

Railings

■

Ladders

■

Stairs

■

Plates

When you export railings, ladders, and stairs to SDNF, they are exploded into individual members. Ladder cages are not included in an export.

428 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

To export structural objects to SDNF 1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Export panel ➤ SDNF Export.

Export Structural Objects to SDNF | 429

2 In the SDNF Export dialog box, under Output File, click the [...] button to select a location for export. 3 In the Export SDNF File dialog box, navigate to and select a folder for storing the exported file. In the File Name box, enter a name for the exported file. Click Save. 4 In the SDNF Export dialog box, under Title Packet Information, enter information about the project. 5 To select objects to export, under Objects, click Select Objects. 6 In the drawing area, select the objects to export. 7 Click Export.

Quick Reference Commands SDNFEXPORT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference SDNF Export Dialog Box

430 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

Create and Modify Piping

10

Route piping and place valves in the 3D model. You can also create and place specialty items and instruments, add insulation, and set the pipe spec and line number.

Select a Pipe Spec Use pipe specs when routing pipe, fittings, and valves in the 3D model. When you are routing pipe, pipe fittings, or valves to an AutoCAD Plant 3D model, you start with a pipe spec. A pipe spec indicates which fittings to use when you change pipe size, change pipe direction, or branch. For example: use socket weld fittings for pipe under 3”. A 3D piping model is spec-driven. A spec-driven model references piping components listed in a pipe spec. When you work with piping in a 3D model, the pipe spec provides the material, rating, and connection details. For more information about pipe specs, see Introduction to the Specs and Catalogs Editor.

You can set pipe spec, size, and line number in the ribbon before routing pipe in the model, or change them while routing. In combination with the project’s joint settings, the pipe spec determines which fittings and fasteners are used when connecting and routing pipe. Each pipe segment and fitting in the model originates from a pipe spec, except for custom parts.

431

Before routing pipe in the model, you can select a spec file to be used as the pipe spec. Spec files are created using the Specs and Catalogs Editor. The spec sheets folder is set in the Project Manager. For more information, see Set Plant 3D Paths on page 148. NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D includes sample spec files that are used in the procedures of this guide. To select a pipe spec 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec Selector drop-down list. 2 In the drop-down list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).

To view a pipe spec 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec Viewer. 2 In the Spec Viewer, in the Spec list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).

432 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

Set Line Numbers You can assign a line number to group pipe segments and fittings in the 3D model. Pipe segments and fittings are grouped based on a line number. You can assign a line number before routing pipe. Line numbers are formatted using project manager the same way tags are formatted. Any Plant 3D object can have a tag. Pipe lines and fittings also have line numbers. You can use the P&ID Line List to create pipe using a line number. The line number is assigned in the model if the line number tag formats are compatible. For more information, see Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers on page 351. You can assign line numbers globally, by name, using the Data Manager to rename the line number. You cannot rename to a line number that already exists in the project, and you must have exclusive project access rights. Items do not have to be connected to belong to the same line group. However, some features do not operate if the line group is not connected. You can use the line number to select pipe in the model. For more information, see Select Piping on page 466. When you create pipe that is assigned to a line number you can set the layer name that the pipe is created on to include the line number in the name. For more information, see Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments on page 171. If you remove the last item that is assigned to a line number from the model, the line number is removed from line number lists.

Set Line Numbers | 433

Understand the Line Number Format The default line number format includes only the line number property (for example: 101). You can set the line number format in the P3d Line Group class. For more information, see Set Up Tag Formatting on page 214. If you set the line number format to Spec-Service-Line, you can assign the following line number: CS300-P-101. Pipe lines in a P&ID drawing and a model are independent of each other and are not linked. You can check for property differences by validating matching line numbers, but the values are not linked. For more information, see Validate the 3D Model on page 359.

Compare P&ID Line Groups and Line Numbers in the Model In a P&ID drawing, the line number is a property of the line group. Any pipe line segment or component that belongs to the same line group has the same line number. P&ID line groups are managed as a unit. You can add lines and components to the group (for example: using SLGROUPEDIT). When you change the line number of a group in a P&ID drawing, the line number changes for all lines and components in the group. In a Plant 3D drawing, if you select a single piece of pipe and change its line number, connected pipe and fittings do not change. To help avoid accidentally adding disconnected pipe into the same group, the Properties palette does not allow you to set a line number if selected items are not connected. To change a pipe line number 1 In a Plant 3D drawing, select one or more pipe components that are connected end to end. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D ➤ Tag ➤ Line Number Tag. NOTE The Line Number Tag list cannot be set in the Properties palette if the selected pipe is not connected. 4 In the LineNumber list, click New.

434 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

5 In the Assign Tag dialog box, in the box labeled TargetObject.Number, enter the line number (for example: 105).

6 Click Assign.

Set Line Numbers | 435

To rename a pipe line number 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab > Project panel > Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Current Drawing Data. 3 In the tree view, expand Area. Click Pipe Lines.

4 In the data view, double-click in the Tag column of the line number that you want to change. 5 In the Assign Tag dialog box, in the box labeled Number, enter the line number (for example: 105).

6 Click Assign. NOTE Exclusive project access is required to change the line number using Data Manager. Renaming a line number can modify more than one project drawing.

436 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

Create Piping You can route pipe in a model by specifying the start point and end point of a pipe segment. By default, the points you specify are on the center line of the pipe, but you can choose from a number of alignments (for example: bottom of pipe). For more information about aligning pipes, see Offset Pipe Placement on page 447. Fittings (for example: elbows) are added automatically when you change direction while continuing to route pipe from the previous end point.

In addition to specifying the end point in the model, you can type a distance to specify the position of the next fitting. For more information about the tools and procedures that help you place pipe at exact locations see Precision Location on page 448.

Create Piping | 437

When you change direction, you can pick a point that aligns with the next pipe segment. Pipe length is automatically cut back for the fitting. As you add pipe segments, the pipe spec provides a list of fittings available to make the connection. If more than one fitting is available, a default fitting is selected based on the part use priority. For more information about fitting priority, see Modify a Spec Sheet. You can attach pipe to equipment nozzles using node object snap. Connection hardware (for example: a weldneck flange, gaskets, and bolts) is added from the pipe spec, based on the size and type of the nozzle. You add a pipe using the ribbon, a Continuation grip, the spec viewer, the tool palette, or the plantpipeadd command.

Insert Pipe Using the Ribbon You can use the ribbon to set a pipe spec, pipe size, and set the line number before routing pipe in the model. You can route pipe using either a new or existing line number. For more information, see 3D Piping Home Tab on page 275.

Route Pipe with the Continuation Grip You can continue a route or create a branch using a Continuation grip. Continuation grips are available from pipe, pipe fittings, and nozzles.

438 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

Equipment nozzles have Continuation grips.

When you use a Continuation grip, the initial pipe size and direction are assumed. When continuing from a pipe or pipe fitting, the pipe spec and line number are also assumed. Continuation grips are available at open ports, and at default branch locations (For example: the middle of a pipe segment). A continuation grip does not appear if the port is in an xref, or the port is connected to from another project drawing as an xref. If a nozzle is incompatible with the current pipe spec an error message displays and a connection is not made. When you change the pipe size, a reducer is inserted, if one is listed in the pipe spec.

Place a Piping Component from the Spec Viewer If you want to choose a specific part before adding it to the model you can use the Spec Viewer.

Create Piping | 439

If you connect to a pipe component in the model, you do not pick the part size in the Spec Viewer. The part size is set based on the component that you connect to.

Create a Tool Palette from a Spec You can add frequently used parts to the tool palette. Before you can insert parts from the tool palette, you first add the parts to the tool palette. For information on placing parts, see AutoCAD Plant 3D Tool Palettes on page 284. You add parts to the tool palette using the Spec Viewer or by dragging a part from the model to the tool palette. You can also create a tool palette for the parts by right-clicking an existing tool palette and clicking New Palette. See Work With Spec Files in a Plant 3D Model to add parts to the tool palette.

Route Pipe and Change Settings using the Command Line You can route pipe using the plantpipeadd command.

You can set command options using the shortcut menu when routing pipe. If you do not want to use a fitting when connecting to a branch, you can set Stub-in mode at the command prompt. If you want to switch between horizontal and vertical routing easily, you can change the routing plane. AutoCAD Plant 3D does not support adding valves or fittings from the command line. To create a pipe line 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Pipe Spec list. 2 In the list, click Route New Line.

440 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, do the following: ■

In the box labeled TargetObject.Number, enter the line number (for example: 101). To create an unassigned pipe line, leave this box blank.

■

In the Spec list, click a spec (for example: CS300).

■

In the Size list, click a size (for example: 6”).

■

Click Assign.

4 In the drawing area, click to specify the location for the start point of the pipe. 5 Click to specify the next point of the pipe. 6 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe.

Create Piping | 441

To route pipe using ribbon settings 1 If the pipe spec, size, or line number are not set in the ribbon, do the following: ■

On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec Selector drop-down list.

■

In the drop-down list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).

■

In the Pipe Size Selector drop-down list, click a pipe size (for example: 4”).

■

In the Line Number Selector drop-down list click a line number (for example: 101 or Unassigned).

2 On the ribbon, click Route Pipe. 3 In the drawing area, click to specify a location for the start point of the pipe.

4 Click to specify the next point of the pipe. 5 Continue clicking in the drawing to specify any additional points of the pipe. 6 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe.

442 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

To begin routing from an equipment nozzle 1 If the pipe spec or line number are not set in the ribbon, do the following: ■

On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec Selector drop-down list.

■

In the drop-down list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).

■

In the Line Number Selector drop-down list click a line number (for example: 101 or Unassigned).

2 In the drawing area, select an equipment object that has a nozzle.

3 Click the Continuation grip.

Create Piping | 443

4 In the drawing area, click to specify the next point of the pipe. 5 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPIPEADD

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Route Piping You can position pipe and pipe fittings in your model by choosing precise segment and fitting locations or by setting up the program to calculate the fitting type and location.

444 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

A number of placement tools and settings are available to help you position pipe and pipe fittings, including pipe grips and the compass.

Use Pipe Grips You can route pipe from the open port of selected pipe using a Continuation grip. You can also use a Move grip to locate and stretch pipe. Use the Move grip at the end of a pipe segment to change the length of the selected pipe. In addition to routing pipe, you can use the Continuation grip at an open port to add an elbow. If you use a Continuation grip that is not at an open port, a branch is created. Pipe segments have a branch Continuation grip in the middle of the segment. Pipe fittings also have branch Continuation grips. For example: an elbow has a branch Continuation grip that allows you to convert the elbow into a tee. For more information about grips, see Plant 3D Grips on page 287.

Route Pipes Using the Compass Use the compass to route pipe at precise angles. When you are prompted to indicate a pipe routing direction, the compass is displayed in the drawing area. When the compass is displayed you can snap to the angle indicated on the compass. NOTE The points that you specify using the compass are restricted to the routing plane. You can disable the compass to specify a point that is not on the routing plane.

The compass displays tick marks on a circle. You can set the angle between tick marks, change the size of the compass, or turn off the compass .

Route Piping | 445

The compass helps you specify a precise angle at a specified interval. You can set the compass tick marks and the compass snap angle to different values. NOTE The compass snap increment is also used in response to the Specify Rotation Angle prompt (for example: when using the rotation grip). You can disable the compass angle snap to use the exact rotation specified.

When you add a fitting, the compass tick marks are set to match the available fitting angles in the pipe spec.

446 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

You can set a tolerance angle to allow for slight angle variations when connecting pipe end to end, or adding a fitting. For example: you can specify a 91 degree angle using a 90 degree elbow. If you turn the tolerance angle on, the compass displays tolerance angle tickmarks. By default, the tolerance angle is off.

Offset Pipe Placement When routing pipe, you can specify eight offset directions in addition to the center line. If you set the offset to Bottom of Pipe (BOP), you can then specify support locations directly. Offset is relative to your routing direction: it is not absolute. When you route pipe in a vertical direction, the BOP alignment is relative to a wall. You can ■

Set the alignment and the offset in the ribbon before routing pipe.

■

Set or change alignment from the command line while routing pipe.

Route Piping | 447

If you want to use object snap while offset routing to specify a point on a pipe, but do not want to connect to the pipe, you can turn off plantoffsetconnect.

Precision Location You can specify precise object snap points when Continuation grips are not available or not at a desired location. In general, if you want to connect to pipe when you are routing you use object snap. Use object snap to specify an exact location and indicate that you want to make a connection. You can use node or end object snaps to connect to the end of another pipe. If you want to connect to pipe at a right angle use the perpendicular object snap. Use the near object snap to specify a point that is on the pipe center line. NOTE Use Node object snap to connect to nozzles. For more information on object snaps, see Snap to Locations on Objects (Object Snaps).

You can use tracking to specify a point that aligns with another point. For more information, see Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking). You can enter a distance (pipe length) to specify the next point. For more information, see Enter Direct Distances.

448 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

If you want to snap to an object and maintain your current elevation, you can use Elevation Snap. For example, you can connect to vertical pipe.

Use Routing Solutions If you specify connection and the endpoints are not in-line, AutoCAD Plant 3D can route pipe and add fittings automatically to complete the connection. You can choose from multiple solutions if multiple paths are available. To set node object snap mode for pipe routing

1

On the status bar, right-click Object Snap.

2 In the shortcut menu, click Settings. 3 Check Node.

When you click in the drawing to specify a point near a pipe end or equipment nozzle, you will snap to the center of the port. 4 Click OK. To continue a pipe line 1 In the drawing area, select a pipe that has an open port.

2 Click the Continuation grip at the end of the selected pipe.

Route Piping | 449

3 In the drawing area, click to specify the next point of the pipe. 4 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe.

To finish a route at an open port 1 This procedure begins with pipe routing in-progress. If you are not at the Specify Next Point prompt do the following: ■

On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.

■

In the drawing, click to specify a start point.

450 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

2 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Node. 3 Move your mouse over an open port. Click the Node object snap.

If a path to the open port cannot be found, you cannot continue this procedure. You can use precision placement to align the pipe route with the port (For example: route the pipe to a matching elevation) and start this procedure again. 4 If multiple solutions are available do the following: ■

At the command prompt, enter n (Next).

Route Piping | 451

■

Continue pressing ENTER until the solution that you want to use displays.

■

At the command prompt, enter a (Accept).

To change elevation while routing 1 This procedure begins with pipe routing in-progress. If you are not at the Specify Next Point prompt do the following: ■

On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.

■

In the drawing, click a start point.

452 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

2 On the ribbon, in the Elevation & Routing Line panel, click the down arrow to expand the panel. 3 In the Elevation box, enter an elevation (for example: 36). 4 In the drawing, click to specify a point at the new elevation. 5 Continue clicking in the model to specify any additional points of the pipe. 6 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe.

To route with offset alignment 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Elevation & Routing Line ➤ Center (current alignment).

Route Piping | 453

2 Click a justification from the drop-down list (for example: Bottom Left). 3 On the ribbon, in the horizontal Offset box, enter a horizontal offset (for example: 24). You can use a negative number to offset in the opposite direction. 4 On the ribbon, click Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe. 5 In the drawing, click to specify a start point that is aligned with another object (for example: at a wall). 6 In the drawing, click to specify the next point of the pipe (for example, at a wall corner).

7 At the command prompt enter p (plane). In the drawing, click to specify the next point of the pipe.

454 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

Quick Reference Commands PLANTCOMPASS

System Variables PLANTOFFSETCONNECT

Interface Reference No entries

Route pipe at a slope Apply slope as you route horizontal pipe. When you specify points for a pipe route at the same elevation, AutoCAD Plant 3D can roll or cutback elbows to automatically apply a desired slope. You can apply slope to pipe that is in the model using the plantpipeslope command. To route new pipe at a slope 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Slope panel ➤ Slope Rise. 2 In the Slope Rise box, enter a slope rise (for example: 1). 3 In the Slope Run box, enter a run length (for example: 120).

Route pipe at a slope | 455

4 On the ribbon, click Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe. 5 In the drawing, click to specify a start point. 6 In the drawing, click to specify a point at the same elevation. 7 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPIPESLOPE

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Edit Slope dialog box

Create a Branch Create or connect a branch segment to a header. You can use the Continuation grip in the middle of a header pipe segment to begin routing a branch. You can create a branch using object snap to route into another pipe. For precise placement of the branch segment, you can select and move the branch fitting up or down the header. The connected branch moves with the fitting. The branch table in the pipe spec identifies the fittings (if any) and fasteners that are used when you connect to another pipe. For example: a tee when connecting to a pipe of the same size, or an o-let when branching to a smaller pipe. For more information, see Work with the Branch Table. To create a tee branch 1 In the drawing, select a pipe.

456 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

2 Near the middle of the pipe, click the Continuation grip.

3 In the drawing, click to specify the next point of the branch. 4 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe. To create a stub-in branch 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe. 2 In the drawing, click to specify a start point. 3 At the command prompt, enter st (STub-in). 4 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an object snap (for example: Perpendicular). 5 In the drawing, click to specify a point on the pipe header.

Create a Branch | 457

To create an o-let branch 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec Viewer. 2 In the Spec Sheet, click to select an o-let (for example: sockolet). 3 In the Pipe Spec Viewer, click Insert in Model. 4 If the insertion point is not located at the desired port, press CTRL. 5 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an object snap (for example: Midpoint). 6 Click to specify a point on the pipe line to snap to. 7 Click an o-let rotation or press ENTER for zero. 8 Press Enter. 9 In the drawing area, click the o-let to select it. 10 Click the Continuation grip on to create a branch. 11 In the drawing area, click to specify the next point of the branch.

458 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

12 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe. To branch from fittings 1 In the drawing area, click a fitting (for example: an elbow).

2 Click a branch Continuation grip. A Continuation grip that is not located at an open port is a branch Continuation grip. 3 In the drawing area, click to specify the next point of the branch.

4 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe.

Create a Branch | 459

To branch from a precise distance down a header 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe. 2 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click From.

3 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Node. 4 Click to specify a point at end of a header. 5 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Nearest. 6 Move your mouse over the header to display the osnap glyph (do not click).

You are now tracking down the header. 7 Enter a distance to create the branch (for example: 24). 8 In the drawing area, click to specify the next point of the branch.

460 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

9 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe.

Modify Piping After pipe and pipe fittings have been placed in the drawing, you can move connected pipe and change part properties. If you modify the location, spec, or size of pipe, AutoCAD Plant 3D will attempt to retain pipe connections. If you make a change that cannot be resolved, the connection is marked with a property-mismatch glyph, or it is disconnected. AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a number of tools you can use to modify pipe.

Substitute Parts You can use the Substitution grip to replace compatible parts.

A compatible part has the same size and type (for example: you can substitute a gate valve with a ball valve).

Using Alignment Lines to Help Move Pipe You can use alignment lines as visual tools. When you select pipe in the drawing, alignment lines display along the axis of connected pipe.

Modify Piping | 461

Alignment lines help you to identify connected pipe, and to determine which direction you can move the pipe. When you use a Move grip, you move the pipe axis and all connected parts that share the axis. Conceptually, this is the same as stretching alignment lines with Ortho mode on.

Changing part Properties You can use the properties palette to change pipe and fitting properties. You can change a part in the drawing by modifying the size or spec property. If you change a part, AutoCAD Plant 3D can retain connections by adjusting adjacent fittings. For example: changing the pipe size adds (or removes) reducers. You can change the property value of multiple items at once. Selecting all connected items before you change size or spec allows you to avoid temporary incompatibilities that can add unnecessary fittings or cause disconnections. For more information on selecting connected pipe, see Select Piping on page 466. You can also change properties using the Data Manager.

Update a Pipe Spec You can update the drawing when a change is made to a spec (extension .pspx) file. Fitting geometry, material properties, and connection type (endcode) are set in the pipe spec. If a part is unavailable in a spec, a placeholder part is used.

462 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

For more information, see Update a Spec in a Plant 3D Model. To move pipe using grips 1 In the drawing area, click an elbow to select it. Alignment lines display on connected pipe. 2 Click a move part grip.

3 Specify a location to move the elbow to (for example: to the left).

Modify Piping | 463

You can move the elbow only in a direction that is perpendicular to an alignment line. To connect adjacent piping 1 At the command prompt, enter plantconnectjoint.

2 In the drawing area, select a part with an open port. 3 Select a second part that has an open part at the same location.

The disconnect glyph no longer displays. To change pipe size or spec 1 In the drawing area, select one or more pipe or fitting objects. 2 Right-click in the model. 3 In the shortcut menu, click Properties. 4 If you want to change the pipe spec do the following: ■

In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D group ➤ Spec.

■

In the Spec list, click a pipe spec.

464 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

5 ■ In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D group ➤ General ➤ NominalDiameter. ■

In the NominalDiameter list, click a different size.

Lock Pipe Placement You can lock pipe after it has been positioned to meet your design requirements. If you move pipe, connected pipe that is locked does not move.

Lock Pipe Placement | 465

A locked part displays a lock glyph when the part is selected or highlighted. If you move a connected part the axis of the locked part does not change. Locked pipe can be shortened (or lengthened) to accommodate new fittings, but the axis does not change. Locking a part does not prevent you from making changes directly to the part. For example, you can move a locked part using its Move grip. To lock or unlock piping 1 In the drawing area, click to select one or more Plant 3D objects. 2 Right-click in the model. 3 In the shortcut menu, click Lock/Unlock Placement.

A lock glyph displays or hides in the model.

Select Piping You can select connected pipe, or select pipe using the line number. You can select all parts that have the same line number, or all connected parts that have the same line number. For information on setting a line number, see Set Line Numbers on page 433. To select connected pipe 1 In the drawing area, click to select one or more pipe components. 2 Right-click in the model. 3 In the shortcut menu, click Append to Selection ➤ Connected Parts ➤ All Connected Parts.

Place Pipe Fittings Pipe fittings are added as you route pipe, or you can select and insert a pipe fitting.

466 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

When you route, elbows are automatically added when you change direction. Tees, o-lets, and other fittings are added when a branch is created. Flanges are added to pipe when connecting to another flanged fitting. Fittings are chosen based on current spec file, and the joint settings in the project. The spec file provides the list of available fittings, the priority order in which compatible fittings are selected from the list (if there are multiple options), and the branch table. You can place in-line pipe components such as valves after first selecting the component from the Spec Viewer or the Tool palette. Pipe fittings must belong to the pipe spec or must be created using the Custom Parts dialog box. AutoCAD Plant 3D does not support attaching AutoCAD objects, such as block references, into a pipe line.

Using Fitting Grips Fittings have a flip and rotation grip, in addition to all the grips available on a pipe segment. You can orient a fitting by flipping and rotating using grips. For more information about grips, see Plant 3D Grips on page 287.

Erasing Connected Fittings When you erase pipe or pipe fittings, the fittings and fasteners that were automatically placed are also erased. To delete only the selected fittings, hold the CTRL key when erasing.

Automatic Placement Pipe fittings are selected and placed at joints when routing pipe. The type and placement of fittings are determined by: ■

Geometry

■

Adjacent parts

■

Pipe Spec

■

Project settings - Connections

■

Ribbon values

The pipe spec and project connector settings determine how fittings are selected when routing. The pipe spec provides the part detail (including end type). The connector settings control what joint is used to connect the parts. For more information, see Configure Connectors on page 179.

Place Pipe Fittings | 467

Understand Endcodes and Joint types An endcode describes the open end (port) of piping and equipment nozzles. For example, the endcode of a buttweld elbow is BV (for Beveled). The endcode of an equipment nozzle is typically FL (for Flanged). You can use the Properties Palette to view the endcodes of piping and nozzles in the drawing. You cannot change the endcode using the Properties Palette. In general, you do not manipulate endcodes directly. They are a Read-only property of the part used in the pipe spec or the equipment nozzle. Default Endcodes Endcode

Description

Example Joint (Match)

PL

Plain End, Socket Male

Socket Weld (SWF)

BV

Beveled End

Butt Weld

THDM

Threaded Male

Threaded (THDF)

THDF

Threaded Female

Threaded (THDM)

SW

Socketweld Female

Socket Weld (PL)

FL

Flanged

Flanged

WF

Wafer

Wafer flanged (FL)

LAP

Lap

Collar Lapped (PL)

GRV

Grooved

Grooved (PL)

SO

Slip On

Slip on weld (PL)

PPL

Plastic Plain

Fusionweld

PSW

Plastic Socket Female

Glue (PPL)

LFL

Lined Flange

LLP

Lined Lap

LUG

Lug

468 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

Flanged (FL)

Default Endcodes Endcode

Description

Example Joint (Match)

BELL

Bell

Bell and spigot (SPIG)

SPIG

Spigot

Bell and spigot (BELL)

TAP

Tap

Tap (PL)

Pipe adapts to different end connections. Plain, beveled, threaded male, and grooved end types are all compatible and adjust to match the joint. For example, if a threaded elbow is connected to a pipe that has a Port Property of PL for EndType1, the pipe end type connects as THDM. To add an elbow 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec Viewer. 2 In the Spec Sheet, click to select an elbow (for example: ELL 90 LR). 3 In the Pipe Spec Viewer, click Insert in Model. 4 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Node. 5 If the insertion point is not located at the desired port, press CTRL. 6 In the drawing area, click to specify an open port on a pipe line. 7 Click to specify an elbow rotation or press ENTER for zero. 8 Press ENTER to finish adding elbows.

To roll an elbow while routing 1 In the drawing area, select a pipe that has an open port.

Place Pipe Fittings | 469

2 At the end of the pipe, click a Continuation grip. 3 At the command prompt, enter r (Rollelbow). 4 In the drawing area, click to specify an elbow angle (for example: 90). 5 It the compass angle snap is not set to an increment of the desired roll angle, do the following: ■

On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Compass panel ➤ Snap Increments.

■

In the Snap Increment list, click a snap increment (for example: 15).

6 In the drawing area, click to specify a roll angle (for example: 30).

7 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe.

470 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

Quick Reference Commands PLANTCONNECTJOINT PLANTDISCONNECTJOINT PLANTREMOVEORPHANFASTENERS

System Variables PLANTCONNECTIONMARKER

Interface Reference No entries

Place Valves You can place valves using the Spec Viewer or from the tool palette. You can use the rotation grip to orient the valve after insertion. After you have placed the valve, you can pick an actuator using the Substitution grip on the valve. The pipe spec determines the valve operator that is placed with the valve. To insert a valve 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec Viewer. 2 In the Spec Sheet, click to select a valve (for example: globe valve). 3 In the Pipe Spec Viewer, click Insert in Model. 4 If the insertion point is not located at the desired port, press CTRL. 5 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an object snap (for example: Midpoint). 6 Click to specify a point on the pipe line.

Place Valves | 471

7 Click a valve rotation or press ENTER for zero. 8 Press ENTER to finish adding valves to the model. To change a valve operator 1 In the drawing area, click to select a valve. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Click Properties. 3 In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D ➤ Part Properties ➤ Valve Operator.

4 In the Operator list, click a valve operator (for example: HandWheel). To place a valve at a precise distance from a fitting 1 In the Spec Viewer, in the Spec Sheet, click a valve.

472 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

2 Click Insert in Model. 3 If the insertion point is not located at the desired port, press CTRL. The port aligns with piping flow, regardless of which port you use. 4 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click From.

5 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Node. 6 Click to specify a point on a fitting. 7 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Nearest. 8 Move your mouse over the header to display the osnap glyph (do not click).

You are now tracking down the pipe. 9 Enter a distance to create the branch (for example: 48).

Place Valves | 473

10 Press ENTER to finish adding valves. NOTE You can specify the center of a valve using the mid osnap.

Create Custom and Placeholder Parts You can create and add parts to a pipe line that are not in the pipe spec. Piping components that are not in the pipe spec are either custom parts or placeholder parts. A custom part does not have a relationship with a pipe spec. A placeholder part is added when the pipe spec is not complete. In addition to direct placement, placeholder parts can be created during a spec update if a part is orphaned from a spec. This occurs when an incompatible change is made to the part size, or if the part is removed from the pipe spec. There are three types of components that can be added to a pipe line: ■

Catalog part. A part that is added from a catalog to the pipe spec. Most components are catalog parts.

■

Placeholder. An object that is temporarily used until the part is added to the pipe spec. After the part is added to the pipe spec, you can use the substitution grip to update it.

■

Custom part. A part that is not available in the catalogs, and will not be added to the pipe spec. For example, a specialty item or instrument.

When an item is added to the pipe spec, the part’s geometry (parametric) is copied from the catalog to the pipe spec. Custom and placeholder parts are drawn with simplified geometry.

474 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 does not provide for authoring parametric content for catalog parts. Custom parts allow you to add a part that is not available in the catalogs. To create a custom part 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Custom Parts. 2 In the Custom Parts dialog box, click Custom Part (permanent). 3 In the Size list, click the size of the pipe the part attaches to (for example: 4). 4 In the Part class list, click the class (for example: Inline Instrument). 5 In the Part Display list, click the part shape (for example cylinder). 6 Under Part Geometry, enter the part dimensions (for example: D 6, L 12).

7 Click Place.

Create Custom and Placeholder Parts | 475

8 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an object snap (for example: Nearest). NOTE If the custom part is flanged, you can add a flange to the pipe before attaching the custom part. 9 Click a pipe. 10 Click to specify a rotation or press ENTER for zero. 11 Press ENTER to finish adding custom parts. To create a placeholder part 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Custom Parts. 2 In the Custom Parts dialog box, click Placeholder Part (temporary). 3 In the Size list, click a pipe size (for example: 6”) this part attaches to. 4 In the Part class list, click a part class (for example: Nipple). 5 In the Required from Spec list, click the pipe spec that needs this part (for example: CS300).

476 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

6 Click Place. 7 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an object snap (for example: Node). 8 Click to specify a point on the pipe line. The placeholder part is connected to the pipe line.

Create Custom and Placeholder Parts | 477

9 Press ENTER to finish adding placeholder parts. A glyph appears near placeholder part if plantplaceholderdisplay is on. You can use the substitution grip after the catalog part is added to the spec.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTCUSTOMPARTS PLANTCUSTOMPARTSCLOSE

System Variables PLANTPLACEHOLDERDISPLAY

Interface Reference Custom Parts Window Edit Placeholder Part Geometry dialog box

Assign Tags You can assign tags in the 3D model similar to the way you tag in P&ID drawings. A tag is a unique identifier for a Plant object. In a 3D model, pipe, pipe fittings, pipe supports, and equipment have a tag by default. You can add a tag to structure. Pipe and pipe fittings have a line number tag in addition to the tag that all Plant objects can have. For more information about line numbers, see Set Line Numbers on page 433. Annotation is not supported for the Plant 3D object tags. To tag a plant 3D object 1 In the drawing area, select one Plant 3D object. 2 Right-click in the model. 3 In the shortcut menu, click Properties.

478 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

4 In the Properties palette ➤ Plant 3D group ➤ Tag, click the [...] button.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTTAG

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Insulate Piping You can add insulation to a pipe line by setting insulation properties and use a display command to control insulation visibility. You can assign insulation to a pipe line using Data Manager, or to individual pipe components using the properties palette.

You can display or hide insulation using the plantinsulationdisplay button on the ribbon.

To add insulation to a pipe 1 In the drawing area, select one or more pipe or fitting objects. 2 Right-click in the model. 3 In the shortcut menu, click Properties.

Insulate Piping | 479

4 In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D ➤ Process Line group ➤ Insulation Thickness. 5 In the Insulation Thickness box, enter the thickness. 6 In the Insulation Type box, enter the type. 7 NOTE You can also use Data Manager to assign insulation to Pipe Lines.

Quick Reference Commands No entries

System Variables PLANTINSULATIONDISPLAY

Interface Reference No entries

Work with External Reference (Xref) Drawings You can connect to the open port of pipe, pipe fittings, and equipment nozzles that are in a referenced (xref) drawing. When you connect to an xref, fittings and fasteners are added to the current drawing. The xref drawing must be part of the current project. If the xref drawing is not in your current project DWG folder you can link to it. It is not necessary to copy the drawing first. For more information, see Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders on page 243. Xrefs must be inserted at the world coordinate origin (0,0,0), and cannot be moved, scaled, or rotated. If you select an xref, Continuation grips are not available. You can use a node object snap to connect to the xref port.

Understand Detached Xref Connections If a connection is broken because of changes made to the Xref, no attempt made to reconnect. Fasteners that were used to connect to the separated port are called orphaned fasteners.

480 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

When you first open a drawing that contains Xrefs, the drawing is checked to determine if there are orphaned fasteners. With your permission, they are removed. Orphaned fasteners can also be removed using plantremoveorphanfasteners. To connect to equipment in an Xref 1 If the xref is not already placed in the model, do the following: ■

On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Reference pane ➤ Attach.

■

In the Select Reference File dialog box, browse to select a drawing file that is in the current project.

■

Click Open.

■

Under Insertion Point, clear the Specify On-screen checkbox.

■

In the X, Y and Z box, enter (0, 0, 0).

■

Under Scale, clear the Specify On-screen checkbox.

■

In the X, Y and Z box, enter (1, 1, 1).

■

Under Rotation, clear the Specify On-screen checkbox.

■

In the Angle box, enter 0.

■

Click OK

2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe. 3 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Node. 4 In the drawing area, click to specify a point on an open port (pipe or nozzle) on the xref.

Work with External Reference (Xref) Drawings | 481

Quick Reference Commands PLANTREMOVEORPHANFASTENERS

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Copy Plant 3D objects You can use the clipboard to copy and paste Plant 3D objects. When you copy a Plant 3D object, the tag is assigned a question mark ( ? ). If the object is a pipe component, the line number is set to Unassigned. To connect to existing pipe, you must use a port location as your base point. NOTE If the drawing is not in the current project, you can copy Plant 3D objects only to the clipboard. You cannot modify or create Plant 3D objects in a drawing that is not in the current project. To paste a pipe component into an existing line 1 At the command prompt, enter copybase. 2 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Node. 3 Click to specify a point on the pipe at a port (the port does not have to be open).

482 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

4 In the drawing area, select the pipe components you want to copy. 5 Press ENTER to finish selection. 6 At the command prompt, enter pasteclip. 7 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an object snap (for example: Near). 8 In the drawing area, click to specify a point at the new location.

Copy Plant 3D objects | 483

484

Create and Modify Pipe Supports

11

You can create and connect pipe supports to pipe in a 3D model. Isometric drawings and drawings exported to PCF file format for interference detection include pipe supports. Pipe supports include the following types: ■

Shoes

■

Hangers (with or without springs)

■

Trunnions, dummy legs

■

Pipe stanchions (with or without saddles)

■

Trapeze bars (with or without springs)

■

Ubolts

■

Pipe guides

■

Pipe clamps (including riser clamps)

■

Pipe rolls

You can customize pipe supports by attaching AutoCAD objects to a pipe support. If the support type that you need is not included in the library, you can convert AutoCAD objects into a custom pipe support type.

Add Pipe Supports You can create and connect pipe supports to pipe or components in a 3D model.

485

You create 3D models of pipe supports from a parametric library, as you would create 3D models of mechanical equipment. When you connect pipe supports to pipe, the support orientation and size is set from the pipe line. If you connect a support to sloped piping, the support is oriented along the axis (not the pipe) to align precisely with a structure or foundation. A trapeze bar does not connect to a pipe line because it can support multiple pipe lines. NOTE Pipe supports connect to pipe when the support is created. You can set pipe support dimensions for each type of support. The outside diameter of pipe is used to set dimension default values. If a pipe support contains variable dimensions (for example: shoe height or hanger length), you specify those dimensions after selecting the insertion point and orientation.

Understand Pipe Support Tagging You can assign tags to pipe supports. Like other Plant 3D objects, pipe supports are displayed in the Data Manager. Pipe support position and type are included in a PCF export, which allows pipe supports to be included with the pipe line in isometric drawings, for model stress analysis, and for design checking. To add pipe supports 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Create. 2 In the drawing area, select a pipe or pipe component object. 3 In the Add Pipe Support dialog box, in the drop-down list, click a support type (for example: Slide ➤ Clamped Slide 1). Default support dimensions are provided based on outside diameter. 4 Click Insert. 5 Press and hold SHIFT. In the drawing area, right-click, click an object snap (for example: Nearest).

486 | Chapter 11 Create and Modify Pipe Supports

6 Click a pipe. 7 If the support type requires a rotation, do one of the following: ■

Press ENTER to indicate zero rotation.

■

Click to indicate a rotation.

8 Press ENTER to finish adding pipe supports.

To add a dummy leg support 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Create.

Add Pipe Supports | 487

2 In the drawing area, select a pipe or pipe component object. 3 In the Add Pipe Support dialog box, in the drop-down list, click Dummy Leg ➤ Dummy Legs. 4 Click Insert. 5 Press and hold SHIFT. In the drawing area, right-click, click Node.

6 Click to specify an Elbow connection point. 7 Press ENTER to finish adding dummy legs.

488 | Chapter 11 Create and Modify Pipe Supports

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPIPESUPPORTADD

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Add Pipe Support Dialog Box

Modify Pipe Support Dimensions Modify the dimensions of a pipe support in the 3D model. You can change the dimensions of a pipe support after it has been created, but you cannot change the pipe support type. If you modify a support that has been customized, attached AutoCAD objects are erased. You can first detach AutoCAD objects and reattach them after the support has been modified. To change pipe support dimensions 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Modify. 2 In the drawing area, select a pipe support object (for example: a Spring Hanger).

3 In the Modify Pipe Support dialog box, modify a dimension (for example: change height to 36).

Modify Pipe Support Dimensions | 489

4 Click OK.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPIPESUPPORTMODIFY

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Modify Pipe Support Dialog Box

Edit Pipe Supports You can copy, move, and erase pipe supports. If you copy a pipe support, it adjusts to match the size of the pipe it is copied to. If the pipe support is copied into space, it is disconnected. You can move a pipe support from one pipe line to another. If a pipe support is not attached to pipe, it displays a disconnect glyph.

490 | Chapter 11 Create and Modify Pipe Supports

NOTE Use grips to edit pipe and connected supports. If you use the AutoCAD move command, pipe supports do not move unless pipe and supports are both selected. If pipe is moved using grips, connected pipe supports move with the pipe. If pipe is erased, connected pipe supports are erased by default. To move supports with pipe 1 In the drawing area, select a pipe object that has supports attached. 2 Click the Move Part grip. 3 Specify a new location for the pipe. The pipe and pipe support move together.

Create Custom Supports You can customize supports by attaching AutoCAD objects to a support. You can also create a custom support type by converting AutoCAD objects into a pipe support.

You can create a custom pipe support type such as a pick-up. A custom pipe support type cannot contain other pipe supports, pipe, or pipe components. Only AutoCAD objects can be converted into a custom pipe support type. You can explode a pipe support to obtain AutoCAD objects from a pipe support. If you want to reuse a custom support you can add it to the tool palette. To attach AutoCAD objects to a pipe support 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Attach Support.

Create Custom Supports | 491

2 In the drawing area, select a pipe support object (for example: a Simple Support).

3 Select one or more AutoCAD objects to attach (for example: an AutoCAD cylinder). To detach AutoCAD objects from a pipe support 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Detach Support. 2 In the drawing area, select a customized pipe support object. To create a custom pipe support type 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Convert Support. 2 In the drawing area, select one or more AutoCAD objects. 3 Press and hold SHIFT. In the drawing area, right-click, click an object snap (for example: Nearest). 4 Click a pipe or pipe component.

492 | Chapter 11 Create and Modify Pipe Supports

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPIPESUPPORTATTACH PLANTPIPESUPPORTCONVERT PLANTPIPESUPPORTDETACH

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Work with Sloped Piping You can attach vertically aligned pipe supports to sloped piping.

Pipe supports that attach to a foundation or structure aligns in a precise horizontal or vertical orientation when attached to sloped pipe. To add pipe support to a sloped pipe 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Create. 2 In the drawing area, select a pipe object that has a slope. 3 In the Add Pipe Support dialog box, in the drop-down list, click a support type (for example: Dual Clamp Stanchion).

Work with Sloped Piping | 493

4 Click Insert. 5 Press and hold SHIFT. In the drawing area, right-click, click an object snap (for example: Nearest). 6 Click a pipe. 7 Do one of the following: ■

Press ENTER to indicate zero rotation.

■

Click to indicate a rotation.

8 Press ENTER to finish adding pipe supports.

494 | Chapter 11 Create and Modify Pipe Supports

Control the Plant 3D Model Display

12

You can change the display style to show realistic and wireframe visual styles. You can also show or hide individual plant 3D objects.

Control the Visual Style of the Plant 3D Model When you use a wireframe visual style, you generally configure display settings that are different from those set for a realistic visual style. Configuring visual style settings can benefit display appearance and performance.

Default display settings show isolines when using a wireframe visual style.

495

You can configure the wireframe visual style to display true silhouettes. If you change back to a realistic visual style, you can turn off silhouettes to improve display performance. For more information, see Shade a Model and Use Edge Effects. To turn on silhouettes for wireframe display 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Visual Styles pane ➤ Visual Styles Manager. 2 In the Visual Styles Manager palette, click Available Visual Styles in Drawing ➤ 2D Wireframe. 3 In the Face Settings ➤ Draw True Silhouettes list, click Yes. 4 In the Countour Lines box, enter 0 (zero). 5 At the Command prompt, enter regen. NOTE The 2D wireframe silhouette and isoline display settings also affect the 3D wireframe settings.

Set Visibility of Plant 3D Objects You can set the visibility of all Plant 3D objects, including pipe, equipment, and structure. When you want to work without visual interference from other objects in large drawings, you can hide Plant 3D objects. NOTE Plant 3D visibility control is separate from AutoCAD layer visibility.

496 | Chapter 12 Control the Plant 3D Model Display

To hide Plant 3D objects 1 In the drawing, select the Plant 3D objects you want to hide. 2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Visibility pane ➤ Hide. To display only selected Plant 3D objects 1 In the drawing, select the Plant 3D objects you want to display. 2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Visibility pane ➤ Hide Others.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTISOLATE PLANTHIDE PLANTSHOWALL

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Set Visibility of Plant 3D Objects | 497

498

Manage Data and Generate Reports

13

You can use the Data Manager to view, edit, export, and import data and to generate reports.

Work with the Data Manager You can view, modify, export, and import drawing and project data, and generate reports using the Data Manager. Using the Data Manager, you can export data for drawings and projects, modify the data externally, and import it back into the Data Manager. You can export data and reports to Microsoft® Excel® spreadsheets and comma-separated value (CSV) files. NOTE You can also export Plant 3D data to Piping Component Format (PCF) files. By default, the Data Manager is docked in the drawing area. You can undock it and float it, or anchor it to the top or bottom of the drawing area. You can also make the Data Manager transparent or use auto-hide to conserve desktop space. For more information about how to control the display of the Data Manager, see Control the Display of the Drawing Space on page 293.

Understand Data Views Data views in the Data Manager display hierarchically organized data for the current drawing, project, or report. In the Data Manager drop-down list, you can select various data views, including any customized views.

499

The following table outlines each data view: View

Purpose

Current Drawing Data

Displays data for the current drawing.

P&ID Project Data

Displays data for the current P&ID project.

Plant 3D Project Data

Displays data or the current Plant 3D project.

Project Reports

Displays project reports data.

Customized

Displays customized views for drawings or projects.

Current Drawing and Project Data Views In the Current Drawing Data view, the tree view shows data for the active drawing grouped by nodes. Data for a selected node is displayed in the data table.

The tree view for Current Drawing and Project Data views in Plant 3D is organized differently than the tree view for P&ID drawings. For more information about tree views and nodes, see Understand Tree Views and Nodes in this section. In Project Data view, data is organized and displayed as it is in the Current Drawing Data view. You use Project Data view to view data for all drawings in a project.

Project Reports View In Project Reports view, the tree view lists the project report types that you can use to generate reports. When you select a report, data for the report is displayed in the data table based on the report definition.

500 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

NOTE Check with your system administrator for more information about Plant 3D-specific reports.

Customized Views In a customized view, the tree view lists the properties for each node of the customized view (for example: Manufacturer, Model Number, and Supplier).

For more information about customizing views for P&ID drawings, see Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) on page 53. For more information about customizing views for Plant 3D drawings, see Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) on page 150.

Understand Tree Views and Nodes In a data view, you view data grouped by nodes for the active drawing or project. Data for a selected node is displayed in the data table. By default, the tree displays only nodes that have content, but you can choose to view all nodes. In P&ID drawings and projects, you view tree nodes grouped by object type (class), with Engineering Items and Non-Engineering Items as the primary nodes.

Work with the Data Manager | 501

In Plant 3D drawings and projects, you view tree nodes grouped by Area (a physical area in a model), or by Object type. The default view grouping is Area.

You can specify the Area property when you create a project drawing. Area nodes include equipment, pipe lines, and structural members. For more information about specifying the Area property, see Set Drawing Properties on page 249. For more information about displaying nodes, see Control the Display of the Tree View on page 511. To view current drawing data

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Current Drawing Data.

502 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

To view P&ID project data

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click P&ID Project Data. To view Plant 3D project data

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Plant 3D Project Data. To view Project Reports

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports. To select customized views in the Data Manager

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate customized view. To turn Auto-hide on and off for the Data Manager

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, right-click the title bar. Click Auto-hide. To make the Data Manager transparent 1 Make sure that hardware acceleration is disabled.

Work with the Data Manager | 503

NOTE For information about how to disable hardware acceleration, see To Tune Performance Manually in the AutoCAD Help system.

2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 3 In the Data Manager, right-click the title bar. Click Transparency. 4 In the Transparency dialog box, move the slider to specify the percentage of transparency. Click OK. To synchronize the Data Manager with symbols and annotations in a P&ID drawing

■

In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Synchronize PID Symbols and Annotations.

To refresh data in the Data Manager

■

In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Refresh.

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Zoom To and Scroll To Plant 3D Objects You can zoom to a Plant 3D object in a drawing from the data table.

504 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

When you select a Plant 3D object in a drawing, the data record for the Plant 3D object is displayed and highlighted in the data table. Using the Data Manager, you can also zoom to a Plant 3D object in a drawing from its data table record. You can zoom to a Plant 3D object by clicking the empty cell in the left column that corresponds to the Plant 3D object. If you click a cell for a Plant 3D object that is in an unopened drawing, the drawing opens and zooms to the Plant 3D object. To locate a Plant 3D object in a drawing

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Current Drawing Data. 3 Do one of the following: ■

To locate a record in the Data Manager, on the Data Manager toolbar, click Show Selected Items. Click the Plant 3D object in the drawing area.

■

To locate a Plant 3D object in the drawing area, on the Data Manager toolbar, click Show All Items. Click the row header of the record in the data table.

To turn persistent zoom on or off

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 On the toolbar, click Turn Zoom Toggle On or Zoom Toggle Off. NOTE To zoom to multiple Plant 3D objects, press and hold the CTRL key when clicking the appropriate cells in the Zoom column of the data table.

Zoom To and Scroll To Plant 3D Objects | 505

To display a record in the data table by selecting an item in a drawing

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view.

3

On the toolbar, click Show Selected Items so that it is toggled on.

4 In the drawing, click a Plant 3D object. NOTE The data for the selected Plant 3D object is displayed at the top of the data table. If the selected item was filtered out by a current filter, the filter is removed.

To scroll through records in the data table

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 At the bottom of the data table, click the left and right arrows to scroll through the records. NOTE You can scroll to the first or last record by clicking the arrow buttons with vertical lines.

506 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager You can edit properties in the Data Manager by updating the data table. You can update multiple cells simultaneously and copy and paste data from one cell to another or from other programs. In the data table, read-only cells are displayed with a shaded background and cannot be edited. When you try to edit data for a Plant 3D object in a drawing that is not currently open, the drawing opens. Read-only drawings do not open when you attempt to edit properties. To edit data for a Plant 3D object that spans more than one drawing, all the drawings that contain the Plant 3D object must be editable. If drawings are read-only, you cannot change the data. To edit a property by entering a value

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 In the data table, click in the cell of the property to edit. If the property is in Acquire mode, click the yellow icon in the cell and click Override mode on the list. 5 Enter a new value in the cell.

Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager | 507

NOTE A pencil icon in the row marker indicates that the record is in edit mode. 6 Press ENTER or click in another cell to commit the new value. To edit a property by selecting a listed value

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 In the data table, click the cell of the property to edit. If the property is in Acquire mode, click the yellow icon in the cell and click Override mode in the list. 5 Click the arrow to display the list. 6 Click a value on the list. 7 Press ENTER or click in another cell to commit the new value. To edit a property by copying and pasting

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 In the data table, right-click the cell that contains the value you want to copy. Click Copy. NOTE It is recommended that you copy values from only one column at a time. 5 Click one or more cells where you want to paste the value.

508 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

NOTE To select more than one cell, press and hold the CTRL key while clicking the cells. 6 Right-click and click Paste. To clear a cell value

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 In the data table, click one or more cells where you want to clear the value. NOTE To select more than one cell, press and hold the CTRL key while clicking the cells. 5 Press DELETE.

Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager | 509

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Place Annotations in a P&ID Drawing from the Data Manager You can place annotations in a P&ID drawing by dragging a cell value from the data table. When placing annotation text in a drawing, a temporary line connects the annotation text to the P&ID object. Annotations you place by dragging cell values from the Data Manager are linked annotations. When you move a P&ID object with a linked annotation, the annotation moves with it. When you change annotation data in the data table, the annotations in the drawing are updated accordingly. You can convert a linked annotation into a freestanding annotation. Freestanding annotations do not move with P&ID objects. Annotations you add to a drawing using the Data Manager inherit the default AutoCAD text style. You can change the text style of annotations by changing the AutoCAD text style; however you cannot edit annotations with AutoCAD text editing commands. NOTE You cannot place annotations in Plant 3D drawings from the Data Manager. To place linked annotations in a P&ID drawing from the Data Manager

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view.

510 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 Click the cell you want to use to annotate the P&ID object and drag it from the data table to the drawing area. 5 Release the button and click the drawing area where you want to place the annotation.

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager You can use filters and sorting to organize the data you view in the Data Manager. You can filter and sort data, and manipulate the order and display of the columns in the Data Manager.

Control the Display of the Tree View You can specify the nodes displayed in the tree view. By default, the tree view shows only nodes with content in the current drawing or project. You can change this setting to show all nodes. NOTE When the tree view is displayed by area (the Plant 3D default), you can view only nodes with content.

Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager | 511

To show all nodes or only nodes with content

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, right-click a node. Click Show All Nodes or Show Only Nodes with Content.

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Filter Information in the Data Table In the data table, you can select the information you view by applying filters. You can view all items or only selected items, or filter the data based on specific field values or value ranges. You view only records for Plant 3D objects selected

512 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

in the drawing. Selections you make in the drawing determine what is displayed in the Data Manager. Filters apply to each view, each user, and each AutoCAD Plant 3D session, so when you switch views or open a new drawing, your filters are saved. You can easily remove or apply filters to any view, or apply multiple filters simultaneously. To view only items selected in the data table

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree, click the node you want to display. 4 In the data table, right-click a cell that contains the value whose data you want to filter. Click Filter By Selection. To view all items except items selected in the data table

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 In the data table, right-click a cell that contains the value you want to exclude from the filtered view. Click Filter Excluding Selection. To filter by field values and ranges of values

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display.

Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager | 513

4 In the data table, right-click a cell for the property where you want to set a filter. 5 In the Filter For box, enter a value for the filter. You can use the following conditions individually or concurrently: NOTE Surround a string entry with single quotation marks (‘). Entries are case-sensitive. Conditions (can be used cumulatively)

Purpose

Examples

Angle brackets (< >)

to display values not equal to your entry

■

‘700’ displays only rows with cells containing strings other than 700

■

‘’ displays rows with cell data not equal to an empty string, thus eliminating rows with empty cells

Asterisk (*)

to display any value in its place

Like ‘*SCH40* displays all fields continuing the text “SCH 40” regardless of the characters that come before or after the specified string

Equal signs (=)

to display values that match your entry

= ‘Bosch’ displays only cells containing the string Bosch

IS NULL

to display only empty cells

Displays only rows with empty cells

IS NOT NULL

to exclude empty cells

Displays only rows with data

Question mark (?)

to display any single character in its place

LIKE ‘SCH?0’ displays SCH20, SCH30, SCH40, and so on

514 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

6 Press ENTER. To view data for selected Plant 3D objects in the drawing

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the drawing, select the Plant 3D objects whose data you want to view.

3 In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Show Selected Items. To remove all filters in the current data view

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the data table, click a cell.

4 Click Remove Filter.

Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager | 515

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Sort Records in the Data Table You can sort data by column in the data table. A small arrow in the column header indicates the current sort order. When you view records in the data table, you can freeze columns so they do not move when you scroll the data table. You can also hide columns that have no data. To sort columns in ascending or descending order

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 In the data table, click a column header to change the sort order.

516 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Control the Display of Columns in the Data Table You can control the display and order of columns in the data table. You can arrange column order to reduce the amount of scrolling required to view or edit values in the data table. You can also freeze columns so they do not move as you scroll in the data table, or hide columns you do not want to view. The display and order of columns in the data table for any data view are saved to a project-specific Data Manager Settings (DMS) file. After the display or order of the columns for a project is set, a file with the name .dms is created in the following folder: \Documents and Settings\\Application Data\Autodesk\\\\Support\PnPProjects. The variable is the name of the project file that is opened in the Project Manager. To freeze a column in the data table

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 In the data table, right-click the header of the column to freeze. Click Freeze.

Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager | 517

NOTE When you freeze a column, the column and all columns to the left of it in the data table hold their position when scrolling. You can unfreeze a column by right-clicking its header and clicking Unfreeze.

To hide or show a column in the data table

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 In the data table, right-click the header of the column to hide. Click Hide. 5 To display hidden columns, right-click any column header and click Unhide. To resize a column in the data table

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display. 4 In the data table column header, place your cursor over the separation line between two columns. 5 Drag the separation line to change the column width. To rearrange column order in the data table

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display.

518 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

4 In the data table, click the column header of the column to move and drag it right or left to a new location. NOTE When you close AutoCAD Plant 3D, the column order you specify in this procedure is written to the .dms file, which is saved in the PnPProjects folder. The PnPProjects folder is located under the folder \Documents and Settings\\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010\\\Support.

To copy column order for a project on another workstation 1 In Windows Explorer, browse to the following folder: \Documents and Settings\\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010\\language\Support\PnPProjects. 2 Locate the file .dms and copy it to a shared folder on the network. 3 In Windows Explorer, on the workstation where you want to copy the column order, browse to the shared network folder and copy the file. 4 On the workstation where you want to copy the column order, browse to the following folder: \Documents and Settings\\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010\\\Support\PnPProjects. Paste the .dms file into the folder. To revert to the default data table column order

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, right-click a node whose data table column order you want to reset, and do one of the following: ■

To reset the data table column order for only a selected node, click Reset Node Column Order.

■

To reset the data table column order for a selected node and all child nodes, click Reset All Child Node Column Orders.

Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager | 519

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

View Read-Only Data and Property Acquisition Data You can view read-only and acquisition data from the Data Manager. Acquisition properties in Acquire mode are displayed with a gray background in the data table. You can edit a property in Acquire mode by changing it to Override mode. For more information about Acquire and Override modes, see Set Up Property Acquisition (P&ID) on page 90.

520 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Print Data from the Data Manager You can print the data displayed in the Data Manager. To print Plant 3D object data from the Data Manager

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display.

4 On the toolbar, click Print. 5 In the Print dialog box, specify the printer and other print settings. Click OK.

Print Data from the Data Manager | 521

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Export and Import Data in the Data Manager You can export Plant 3D object data for projects and drawings, modify the data externally, and import it into the Data Manager.

Export Data from the Data Manager You can export data to a Microsoft® Excel® spreadsheet, to a comma-separated values (CSV) file, or to a Piping Component Format (PCF) file. NOTE You cannot use import or export custom settings when importing or exporting in Area view.

Export Active Node and Child Nodes You can export data for the active node and all child nodes under it, or for the active node only. If you include all child nodes, you export a spreadsheet that contains a worksheet for each node, or a CSV file for each node. If you include only the active node, you export a spreadsheet with a single worksheet, or a single CSV file.

522 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

For example: if the Engineering Items node is active, and you export the active node and all child nodes to a spreadsheet, the spreadsheet contains a separate worksheet for each node.

View Exported Data When you export the current data table, the resulting file includes all columns and rows displayed in the Data Manager. An exported file does not include hidden columns and rows. Read-only columns in the data table are write-protected in the exported spreadsheet. The exception to this rule is that properties in Acquire mode can be edited in an exported file. Each worksheet or CSV file contains a row for each Plant 3D object and a column for each property, such as PnPID number, description, and manufacturer.

Export Data from the Data Manager | 523

Name Exported Files You can specify a name for an exported file, or accept the name that the program suggests. The following default file name structures vary by file type and by data table settings in the Data Manager. File Type

Project Data View

Drawing Data View

Spreadsheet

ProjectName-ActiveNodeName.xls (or .xlsx)

DrawingName-ActiveNodeName.xls (or .xlsx)

CSV File

ProjectName-ActiveNodeName-ChildNodeName.csv

DrawingName-ActiveNodeName-ChildNodeName.csv

In an exported spreadsheet, worksheet names are derived from the display names of the nodes being exported. The column headings are derived from the display names of the column headings (properties) in the data table. If the display name is longer than 31 characters, the node name is used to name the worksheet. NOTE To ensure successful export and import, it is recommended that project administrators use node names that are no longer than 31 characters. To export Plant 3D object data

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node to export.

4

On the toolbar, click Export.

524 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

5 In the Export Data dialog box, in the Select Export Settings list, click Displayed Data or a custom setting. NOTE Only Displayed Data is available for area or customized views. 6 Under Include Child Nodes, click the appropriate option to include the active node and all child nodes, or the active node only. 7 Under Enter File Name and Location for Exported Data, do one of the following: ■

To use the default file path and file name, click OK and go to step 9.

■

To select a different file path or file name, click Browse.

Export Data from the Data Manager | 525

8 In the Export To dialog box, do the following: ■

Navigate to and select a folder to store the exported files.

■

In the File Name box, enter a file name or use the default file name provided.

■

In the Files of Type box, select the file format for the exported files: CSV, XLSX, or XLS (the default).

■

Click Save.

9 In the Export Data dialog box, click OK.

526 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Export To Piping Component Format (PCF) You can export to PCF format from the Data Manager. If the Data Manager tree is ordered by area, you can export line number node data to PCF files for use in third-party applications. To export to a PCF file.

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the drawing or project data view. 3 In the tree view, right-click a line number node. Click Export To PCF. 4 In the Save PCF As dialog box, do the following: ■

Navigate to the appropriate folder to save the file.

■

In the File Name box, enter a file name or accept the default file name for the file.

■

Click Save.

Export To Piping Component Format (PCF) | 527

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Modify Exported Data You can add and modify data in an exported Microsoft®Excel®spreadsheet or a comma-separated value (CSV) and import it back into the Data Manager.

Modify Exported Microsoft Excel Spreadsheets In Excel, you modify the worksheet that corresponds to the active node where you plan to import the spreadsheet. If you edit a worksheet that represents a child node, the import process ignores your changes. For example, you export the Engineering Items node and choose to include all child nodes. The exported spreadsheet contains multiple worksheets: Equipment, Tanks, Vessel, Pumps, and so on. If you plan to import the data at the Engineering Items level, you modify only the EngineeringItems worksheet.

It is important not to modify the names of worksheets in an exported Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. The import process uses worksheet names to identify a match with data in the Data Manager.

528 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

Modify Exported CSV Files When you include child nodes in an export to CSV, you create multiple CSV files. You can edit data in the CSV files for import back into the Data manager.

Understand Read-Only Exported Data Some properties, such as PnPID, are read-only in the Data Manager. These read-only properties are also write-protected in an exported Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. While it is possible to edit read-only data in a CSV file, a subsequent import ignores these changes.

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Import Data to the Data Manager You can import data from a Microsoft®Excel®spreadsheet or a comma-separated value (CSV) file to the current data table.

Determine the Node to Import When you import a worksheet or CSV file, you import data for the currently active node. Select the node that corresponds to the worksheet or CSV file containing the data you want to import.

Import Data to the Data Manager | 529

For example, you export the Engineering Items node and include all child nodes. In the resulting spreadsheet, you enter data only in the Equipment node. Before importing data, you select the Equipment node to make it active and to import the correct data. If you select a node that does not correspond directly to the modified worksheet or CSV file, the import ignores the changes. If you change more than one exported worksheet or CSV file, you import each modified node individually. Generally, it is more efficient to edit a worksheet or CSV file that contains all the nodes you plan to edit. You can then import the files at that node level.

Select Import Settings When you import data, you can accept the default import setting or select a custom setting. The default setting is Displayed Data, which is the data currently displayed in the Data Manager. NOTE You cannot use import or export custom settings when importing or exporting in Area view. When a custom setting is configured in Project Setup for this purpose, you can import data from another program. Select this custom setting during import.

Accept and Reject Edits After you import data, the Data Manager displays modified properties in yellow highlighting. You accept or reject edits using the Accept and Reject buttons on the toolbar. You can accept or reject edits all at once, or individually.

530 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

AutoCAD Plant 3D creates log files in My Documents (Windows XP) or Documents (Windows Vista) folder under your Windows user profile. These log files are based on the data that you accept or reject after importing a spreadsheet or CSV file: ■

The log file ACCEPTED_.log contains the imported data that you accepted during the import.

■

The log file REJECTED_.log contains the imported data that you rejected.

The variable in the file name indicates the date when you accepted or rejected the imported data. For example, the file name ACCEPTED_10-16-2007.log contains a record for each accepted edit from an import on October 16, 2007. NOTE You cannot import a spreadsheet exported from an earlier version of AutoCAD Plant 3D. First, migrate the project or drawing to AutoCAD Plant 3D. You can then export and import data as needed. For more information about migrating project data, see Migrate Projects and Drawings on page 575.

Import Modified Acquisition Properties Properties in Acquire mode appear gray in the Data Manager. You can edit these properties in an exported spreadsheet or CSV file, import the modified data, and accept or reject each edit. If you accept a change to an acquired property, the property adopts the new value and changes from Acquire mode to Override mode. For more information about Acquire Mode and Override Mode, see Understand Acquire Mode and Override Mode on page 92. To import Plant 3D object data from Excel

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager. 2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data view. 3 In the tree view, click the node where you want to import data. NOTE Make sure to select the node that corresponds to the worksheet or CSV file containing the data you want to import.

Import Data to the Data Manager | 531

4

On the toolbar, click Import.

5 If the AutoCAD Plant 3D message is displayed, click OK. NOTE The message indicates the location of the log files for accepted and rejected edits from the imported spreadsheet or CSV file. You can click the link in the message to open the folder. After you accept and reject edits, you can access the log file in the folder. 6 In the Import From dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Files of Type list, click the type of files to display (XLS, XLSX, or CSV).

■

Navigate to and select the spreadsheet or CSV file you want to import.

■

Click Open.

7 In the Import Data dialog box, do the following: ■

To select a different file to import, click Browse. Repeat step 6.

■

In the Select Import Settings list, click Displayed Data or a custom setting.

532 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

NOTE To import data from another program, click the appropriate custom setting. (Custom settings are unavailable, however, if you are importing into an area or customized view.) ■

Click OK.

To accept or reject changes in imported data 1 In the Data Manager tree view, click the node that contains the imported changes.

2 Review the imported data in the data table. NOTE Pending changes are displayed with yellow highlighting. 3 Do one of the following:

■

In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Accept or Reject to accept or reject changes one at a time.

Import Data to the Data Manager | 533

■

In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Accept All or Reject All to accept or reject all changes at once.

NOTE Switching data views or closing the Data Manager during this process causes you to lose all changes that you have not yet accepted or rejected. If you lose changes during this process, repeat the import procedure to finish accepting and rejecting imported changes. To view the accepted or rejected logs from imported data 1 Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the My Documents (Windows XP) or Documents (Windows Vista) folder. 2 Double-click the ACCEPTED_.log or REJECTED_.log file.

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager Project Report Selection Dialog Box

Generate Reports in the Data Manager The Data Manager provides several types of reports you can use to view and present data. You can view, print, and export reports that contain both P&ID and Plant 3D data. You can export to Microsoft® Excel®, comma-separated value (CSV), or PCF (Piping Component Format) files. In the Project Reports data view, the tree view shows the reports available for all drawings in the project, listed by report type.

534 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

The following table describes the default reports in Project Reports: Report

Contents

Control Valve List

Data about control valves, the drawing where they are located, the line number, sizes, and so on.

Document Registry

Data about drawings in the project.

Equipment List

Equipment components and the drawing where each component is located. NOTE Your administrator can modify this report to include AutoCAD Plant 3D data.

Instrument Index

Data about instruments, the drawing where they are located, and the object to which they are connected.

Line List

Data about piping segments grouped by line number and the drawing where they are located.

Line Summary List

Data about the pipeline groups and the drawing where they are located. NOTE Your administrator can modify this report to include AutoCAD Plant 3D data.

Nozzle List

Data about nozzles, equipment, the drawing where they are located, and the line (segment and group) to which they are connected, if any.

Generate Reports in the Data Manager | 535

Report

Contents NOTE Your administrator can modify this report to include Plant 3D data.

Valve List

Data about valves, the line segment, or group where they are located, and the drawing location. NOTE Your administrator can modify this report to include AutoCAD Plant 3D data.

The Project Reports data view includes the default report types and any custom report types. Consult your system administrator about available customized AutoCAD Plant 3D reports.

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

View Data in Reports All reports contain a column that lists the project with which the data is associated. When a Plant 3D object is present in more than one drawing, the report contains a separate entry for each drawing that contains the Plant 3D object. You can manipulate what you see in a report by filtering and sorting the report data. For more information about filtering and sorting data in the Data Manager, see Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager on page 511.

536 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

To view data in a report 1 Do one of the following: ■

In the Project Manager, click Reports flyout ➤ Reports.

■

In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports.

2 In the tree, expand the Project Reports node, if it is not already expanded. 3 Click the report node you want to view. NOTE Project report types are preconfigured and cannot be modified.

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Export Reports You can export project reports from the Project Manager or the Data Manager.

Export Reports | 537

You can export one or more report types as a single report. If you export to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, the report contains a separate worksheet for each of the report types you export. If you export to CSV files, you create a separate CSV file for each report type you export. To export a report 1 Do one of the following: ■

In the Project Manager, click Reports flyout ➤ Reports.

■

In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports.

2 In the Data Manager tree view, do one of the following: ■

To export one report, click the report you want to export.

On the toolbar, click Export. Go to step 3. ■

To export multiple reports, click Project Reports.

On the toolbar, click Export. Go to step 4. 3 In the Export To dialog box, do the following:

538 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

■

Navigate to and select a folder to store the exported report file.

■

In the Files of Type list, select a file format for the report: XLS (the default), XLSX, or CSV.

■

In the File Name box, enter a file name or accept the default file name for the report.

■

Click Save.

4 In the Export Report Data dialog box, do the following:

Export Reports | 539

■

Under Reports, select one or more report types to include in the report.

■

Under Export File, review the default report name and file path. Optionally, click Browse to specify a new file name or file path for the report. NOTE By default, AutoCAD Plant 3D exports reports to the My Documents (Windows XP) or Documents (Windows Vista) folder.

■

Click Export. NOTE The Export button only becomes active when you select one or more report types and have specified an export file.

540 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Import Reports You can import a project report from Microsoft® Excel® or comma-separated value (CSV) files. The file you import must use the same report template as the report into which you are importing the report.

Import Microsoft Excel Spreadsheets You can import a spreadsheet to the Project Reports node or to an individual report node. If you import a spreadsheet to the Project Reports node, you choose a worksheet to import. If you import a spreadsheet to an individual report, the spreadsheet must contain a worksheet that matches the report.

Import CSV Files If the report type of the imported CSV file does not match the report type into which you are importing, the import ignores the content. For example, you select a report type for a Valve List. If you import a CSV file containing an Equipment List, the import ignores the Equipment List report because it does not contain valve data. Whether importing a spreadsheet or a CSV file, you can only import primary table files back into AutoCAD Plant 3D. For example, a valve list can only import data into the valve table; however, it cannot import cells from joined tables. To import a report from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet 1 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports.

Import Reports | 541

2 In the Project Reports tree view, click the Project Reports node, or click the report where you want to import data.

3

On the toolbar, click Import.

4 If the AutoCAD Plant 3D message is displayed, click OK. Otherwise, go to the next step. NOTE The message indicates the location of the log files for accepted and rejected edits from the imported spreadsheet or CSV file. You can click the link in the message to open the folder containing the files. After you accept and reject edits, you can access the log files in that folder. 5 In the Import From dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Files of Type list, select the type of spreadsheet files to display (XLS or XLSX).

■

Navigate to the location of the spreadsheet you want to import and select it.

■

Click Open.

6 If you are importing data at the Project Reports level, the Project Report Selection dialog box is displayed. In the Select Project Report to Import list, select the report you want to import. Click OK.

542 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

NOTE Requested changes are displayed in yellow highlighting.

To import a report from a CSV file 1 Do one of the following: ■

In the Project Manager, click Reports flyout ➤ Reports.

■

In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports.

2 In the Data Manager tree view, click the report node where you want to import data.

3

On the toolbar, click Import.

4 If the AutoCAD Plant 3D message box is displayed, click OK. Otherwise, go to the next step. NOTE The message indicates the location of the log files for accepted and rejected edits from the imported spreadsheet or CSV file. You can click the link in the message to open the folder containing the files. After you accept and reject edits, you can access the log files in that folder. 5 In the Import From dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Files of Type list, select CSV.

■

Navigate to the location of the CSV file you want to import and select it.

■

Click Open.

Import Reports | 543

6 If you are importing data at the Project Reports level, the Project Reports Selection dialog box is displayed. In the Select Project Report to Import list, select the file that contains the report data you want to import. Click OK.

To end the current import ■

Do one of the following: ■

In the Data Manager, right-click the active node. Click End Current Import.

■

Close the Data Manager.

544 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER DATAMANAGERCLOSE

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager Project Report Selection Dialog Box

Reconcile Changes To Imported Reports You can review the changes to data made to an imported report. You can accept or reject the requested changes.

View Pending Changes in a Drawing In a drawing, you can graphically view each Plant 3D object that has pending changes before you accept or reject the change. Simply click the row header (the left column) of the Plant 3D object with the pending change in the Data Manager.

Reconcile Changes To Imported Reports From an imported report, modified values and their corresponding row headers are displayed with yellow highlighting. You can accept or reject changes individually or all at once. When you accept all changes in the report and you encounter a problem with a pending change, the acceptance process terminates. Reject the problem change before you continue accepting or rejecting changes either individually or all at once. You cannot accept changes that are from read-only P&ID drawings; you can only reject them. A tooltip shows the original value of a changed field when you place the pointer over the field. You can switch to Project Data or Drawing Data view during data reconciliation for an imported report. When you switch back to Project Reports view, pending

Reconcile Changes To Imported Reports | 545

changes are still yellow and you can continue to accept or reject them. Until you have reconciled all pending changes, you cannot edit any of the fields in the report. To accept or reject changes in an imported report 1 In the Data Manager tree view, select the imported report to view. 2 Do one of the following: ■

On the toolbar, click Accept or Reject to accept or reject specific changes in the selected record.

■

On the toolbar, click Accept All or Reject All to accept or reject all changes in a selected record. NOTE If any files cannot be opened for editing, you are notified after all other changes have been made.

To view the original value of a modified field 1 In the Data Manager tree view, select the report to view. 2 In the data table, place the cursor over the modified field to display the original value.

546 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager Project Report Selection Dialog Box

View Report Logs When you accept or reject requested changes in imported reports, log files store the changes you accept and reject. When you accept or reject any changes made to reports, the program generates the following log files: ■

ACCEPTED_date.log—a list of accepted changes

■

REJECTED_date.log—a list of rejected changes

The log files are tab-delineated files. Each line of the file displays a change. The changed tag number, ID, and drawing are displayed with the file name, date, and time of the report. Log files do not overwrite previous log files; however, you can manually erase them. In AutoCAD Plant 3D, log files are stored in the project directory with the names ACCEPTED_date.log, and REJECTED_date.log. For example, the accepted log file appears as follows, modifying the manufacturer and model for Valve V1234. Valve.Manufacturer=GOULD Valve.tagNo = V1234 Valve.GUID=03832qnjfa3 PID1.DWG V51PROJ.xls 6/6/2006

To view a report log 1 Navigate to the root directory of the appropriate project.

View Report Logs | 547

2 In the root directory folder, double-click ACCEPTED_date.log or REJECTED_date.log to view the appropriate log file.

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Print Reports You can print reports in the Data Manager. The data for the selected data view prints as a spreadsheet. To print a report 1 Do one of the following: ■

In the Project Manager, click Reports flyout ➤ Reports.

■

In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports.

2 In the Data Manager tree view, click the report you want to print.

548 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

3

On the toolbar, click Print.

Quick Reference Commands DATAMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Data Manager

Print Reports | 549

550

Generate Isometric Drawings

14

With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create annotated and dimensioned isometric drawings based on your 3D models.

Understand Isometric Types AutoCAD Plant 3D includes three common isometric types, check, stress, and final, from which you can create isometric drawings. These isometric types differ from each other in the amount of detail included and in the format in which the information is presented. You can also customize the three isometric drawing types included with AutoCAD Plant 3D to create other isometric types.

Check Isometrics You create check isometric drawings to make sure that all necessary components are represented in the model. A check isometric also confirms that the model runs through Isogen without errors when it is time to produce the final deliverable. The details in check isometric drawings facilitate comparison with AutoCAD P&ID.

Stress Isometrics Stress isometrics are drawings that convey geometric data pertinent to stress checking. Typically, you create these isometrics only for pipelines requiring stress analysis, such as high temperature lines, lines with large pipe sizes, critical service lines, and in some cases, high pressure lines.

551

You can also create a piping component file (PCF) to run through a stress analysis application or to create a loose drawing. The stress engineer uses this drawing to analyze the stresses and loading on the pipeline.

Final Isometrics Final isometrics are the key deliverable documents that you create from 3D piping models. You typically produce final isometrics during the last stages of a project. These drawings include a bill of materials (BOM) and become the issued documents of record that are used for fabrication and construction.

Create Isogen Messages and Information Items You can add notes and annotations to your piping model and include them in a generated isometric drawing. You can create Isogen messages with the option of including enclosures. You can also place Isogen information items such as floor symbols, arrows, location points on your drawing. You can edit or delete the contents of the messages or information items.

Messages and information items are typically created while you engage in other modeling tasks. For more information about creating models, see Create and Modify a Plant 3D Model on page 367.

Create an Isogen Message You can create an Isogen message of up to 75 characters in length. You can preview the message before placing it on the piping model. The message is displayed in the generated isometric drawing.

552 | Chapter 14 Generate Isometric Drawings

You have the option of placing messages in the drawing without enclosures or with the following enclosure options: ■

Round ended box

■

Rectangular box

■

Circular enclosure

■

Triangular enclosure

■

Diamond shaped enclosure

■

Double circle

■

Ellipse

■

B.I.P. identifier

To create an Isogen message 1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Isogen panel ➤ Isogen Message. 2 In the Create Isogen Message dialog box, Enclose Message In drop-down list, click the message enclosure. 3 Enter the desired message text in the Message box. 4 To draw the dimension to message, select the Draw Dimension to Message check box. 5 Click OK. 6 In the drawing area, click an insertion point on the center line of a pipe. 7 Press ENTER.

Create an Isogen Message | 553

Quick Reference Commands No entries

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Create Isogen Message Dialog Box

Create an Isogen Information Item You can create Isogen information items such as floor symbols, flow arrows, and break points, and then place them on your 3D model. The information item is displayed on the generated isometric drawing. To create an Isogen information item 1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Isogen panel ➤ Isogen Info. 2 In the Create Isogen Information dialog box, in the Select item type list, click the item type you want to add to the model. 3 Click OK. 4 In the drawing area, click an insertion point on the center line of pipe. 5 Press ENTER.

554 | Chapter 14 Generate Isometric Drawings

Quick Reference Commands No entries

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Create Isogen Information Dialog Box

Generate a Quick Isometric Drawing A quick isometric is a drawing you create to check lines in your drawings. You can create a quick isometric for any isometric type. You can check all or a few of the lines, either by selecting them from a list or by selecting them in the drawing area. Because quick isometrics are not kept as drawings of record, they do not become project documents accessible in the project manager. A designer often generates a quick stress isometric drawing to hand off to the stress engineer. To generate a quick isometric drawing 1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Create Iso ➤ Quick Iso. 2 Do one of the following: ■

In the drawing area, select the objects that you want to include in the Quick Iso.

■

Press L for line list selection. Enter the line numbers you want to include in the Quick Iso.

3 Press ENTER. 4 In the Create Quick Iso dialog box, Iso type list, click the iso type you want to create. 5 To select a different output directory, under Output Directory, click the [...] button and click a folder. click Open.

Generate a Quick Isometric Drawing | 555

6 Do any of the following: ■

To process components in the current drawing only, select the Process Components in Current Drawing Only check box.

■

To create a DWF file, select the Create DWF check box.

■

To stop the isometric creation process when a line fails, select the If a Line Fails to Process, Stop Iso Creation check box.

■

To overwrite previously generated isometric files for current isometric type, click Options. In the Set Quick Iso Options dialog box, select the Overwrite Previous Generated Iso Files check box. Click OK.

■

To specify fields that break the isometric, click Options. In the Set Quick Iso Options dialog box, under Break the Iso When the Following Fields Change, select check boxes for desired fields. Click OK.

7 Click Create.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTQUICKISO

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Set Quick Iso Options Dialog Box Create Quick Iso Dialog Box

Generate a Production Isometric Drawing You create a production isometric when you are ready to create the final deliverable drawings for all lines in all drawings. You can create any of the included (check, stress, and final) or customized isometric drawing types as production isometrics. You have the options of overwriting previously generated isometric files and creating a DWF file from all isometrics created in the process.

556 | Chapter 14 Generate Isometric Drawings

To generate a production isometric drawing 1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Create Iso ➤ Production Iso. 2 In the Select Lines Dialog box, under Display Lines, click entire project or current Drawing. 3 Under Filter Line Numbers, enter the lines numbers you want to filter out of the selection set. 4 Under Select Lines, Create Isos From the Following Lines, select check boxes that correspond to the lines you want to create the drawing from. 5 In the Create Production Iso dialog box, under Iso Type, click an iso type. 6 Under Output Settings, do any of the following: ■

To overwrite previously generated isometric files for current isometric type, select the Overwrite Previous Generated Iso Files check box.

■

To create a DWF file, select the Create DWF check box.

■

To stop the isometric creation process when a line fails, select the If a Line Fails to Process, Stop Iso Creation check box.

7 Click Create.

Generate a Production Isometric Drawing | 557

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPRODUCTIONISO

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Select Lines Dialog Box Create Production Iso Dialog Box

Review Isometric Results Details After you generate an isometric drawing, you review the creation details to check for errors and warnings, and to verify the location and number of Piping Component Files (PCF) created. AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a notification after generation of each isometric drawing has completed. You can review these results immediately after generation or refer to the log file later. By default, isometric drawings that are created are processed in the background, so that you can return immediately to your drawing. While a job is being processed in the background, you can check its status by placing the cursor over the isometric icon on the right side of the status bar. You can also view details about all completed isometric jobs that you have generated from the current session. Isometric details are saved in a log file for future reference. This file is located in the Messages directory that corresponds to the iso type created. The log file takes the default name Isogen Log File, appended with the date of creation. For example: [Project Name]\Isogen\Final\Messages\Isogen Log File_3-15-2009.log. You can use any any text editor, such as Microsoft Notepad, to view the log file. To review isometric results details 1 In the status tray, double-click the isometric icon. 2 In the Isometric Details dialog box, view details about completed isometric jobs.

558 | Chapter 14 Generate Isometric Drawings

NOTE Only isometric details from the current session are accessible by clicking the status tray icon. To view details from a prior session, review the isometric log file. To review an isometric log file 1 In Windows Explorer, navigate to the Messages directory that corresponds to the iso type (check, stress, or final) used to created the isometric drawing. 2 In the Windows Explorer selection box, right-click the log file and click Open.

Quick Reference Commands No entries

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Isometric Details Dialog Box

Export a Piping Component File (PCF) When you generate an isometric drawing, a Piping Component File (PCF) is automatically created behind the scenes. You do not have to create one. If you are not generating an Isometric drawing, you can still export a PCF if you need one for the stress engineer or pipe fabricator. The line number is the default file name for the exported PCF. To export a PCF 1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Create Iso ➤ PCF Export. 2 Right-click the line number you want to export. Click Export to PCF. 3 In the Save PCF As dialog box, do the following: ■

Navigate to and select a folder to store the exported PCF.

Export a Piping Component File (PCF) | 559

■

In the File Name box, enter a file name or accept the default file name for the file.

4 Click Save.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTPCFEXPORT

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

560 | Chapter 14 Generate Isometric Drawings

Generate Orthographic Drawings

15

You can create orthographic drawings that show exact 2D representations of a 3D model.

Overview: Generate Orthographic Drawings You can select Plant 3D models and create custom orthographic views to place in an AutoCAD 2D drawing. Orthographic drawings are AutoCAD DWG files. An orthographic drawing can contain multiple orthographic views with data extracted from Plant 3D drawings. Orthographic drawings display two-dimensional views of piping, valves, equipment, and structural steel in Plant 3D models. In an orthographic drawing, you can create multiple orthographic views from one or more Plant 3D models.

You can copy orthographic drawings into a project or link to orthographic drawings outside of a project.

561

You can set up a customized template for your orthographic drawings with a title block, or you can use the default template. For more information about creating templates, see “Use a Template File to Start a Drawing” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Understand Drawing References (Xrefs) and Overlaid Xrefs Drawings that contain references to other drawings are available for orthographic drawings. However, referenced drawings that are overlaid are not available. For more information about overlaid drawings, see “Nest and Overlay Referenced Drawings” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTORTHOCREATE

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Select Reference Models Dialog Box Select Orthographic View Dialog Box

Create an Orthographic Drawing You can create orthographic drawings from one or more Plant 3D models. When you create orthographic views, you create individual AutoCAD 2D viewports based on specified views of a Plant 3D model. Then, you can add them to an orthographic drawing. A process overview for creating orthographic drawings is as follows (see the procedure tab for detailed instructions): ■

Create or open a drawing in the orthographic paper space.

■

Select the Plant 3D model or models on which to base the orthographic drawing.

■

Specify an area in the model to be displayed in the orthographic drawing.

562 | Chapter 15 Generate Orthographic Drawings

■

Set the scale and orthographic view.

■

Place the generated view on the orthographic drawing.

■

Create and place additional views in the orthographic drawing.

■

Annotate and add dimensions to Plant objects in the orthographic drawing.

Create an Orthographic View Once you have specified the model to use, a temporary drawing containing the model and the Orthocube is displayed.

You use the OrthoCube, a semi-transparent 3D box, to define the boundaries of the orthographic view. The OrthoCube is the only editable object in the temporary drawing. You can use grips on the OrthoCube to adjust the dimensions and placement of the OrthoCube. You can also specify the geometric dimensions of the OrthoCube using the Properties palette. For more information about using grips to modify 3D cubes, see “Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces” in the AutoCAD Help system. After you specify the placement and dimensions of the OrthoCube, you select a standard orthographic view to create, and specify the scale. You can select an orthographic view based on any of six sides of the OrthoCube. The standard orthographic views are Top, Bottom, Right, Left, Front, and Back. You can save an orthographic view and load it in any Plant 3D model to generate views of a consistent size.

Save an Orthographic View When you have completed configuring the orthographic view, you place the view onto your orthographic drawing. The views you save are project-specific

Create an Orthographic Drawing | 563

and stored in a filed named ortho.dcf. You can copy this file and reuse it in other projects. To create an orthographic drawing 1 In the Project Manager, click the Orthographic DWG tab. 2 In the tree view, expand the project node and click the Orthographic Drawings folder. 3 On the Orthos toolbar, click New Ortho DWG. 4 In the New DWG dialog box, under Drawing Properties, do the following: ■

In the DWG Number box, enter a number for the drawing.

■

In the Author box, enter a name for the author.

■

In the DWG Title box, enter a title for the drawing.

■

In the File Name box, enter a name for the ortho drawing.

■

Click OK.

5 On the ribbon, click Orthos tab ➤ Orthos panel ➤ New View. 6 In the Select Reference Models dialog box, under Project Models, select one or more models to use as a reference for the orthographic drawing. Click OK. NOTE Attached DWG references (xrefs), if any, are included in the temporary drawing along with the models you select. However, overlaid xrefs are not included.

564 | Chapter 15 Generate Orthographic Drawings

7 If necessary, move the Select Orthographic View dialog box aside so you can view the temporary drawing. Do the following: ■

(Optional) In the drawing, click the OrthoCube. Drag the size grips on the edges of the OrthoCube to specify the boundaries and placement of your view.

■

In the Orthographic View list, click a view (for example: Front).

■

(Optional) In the drawing, make further adjustments with the OrthoCube as needed.

Create an Orthographic Drawing | 565

NOTE By default, the temporary drawing that is displayed is set to zoom in on all elements currently in the drawing. The ViewCube is set to Top view using WCS (world coordinate system). 8 Again in the Select Orthographic View dialog box, do the following: ■

In the Scale list, click a scale (for example: 1:16). If the scale you want is not in this list, enter a scale at the command prompt when you place the ortho drawing.

■

(Optional) Click Save to save the view. In the Save View dialog box, enter a name for the orthographic view. Click OK.

■

Click OK.

566 | Chapter 15 Generate Orthographic Drawings

9 In the orthographic drawing paper space, specify the position of the lower-left corner of the viewport. NOTE At the Command prompt, you can specify the scale of the viewport before placing the viewport in the drawing. You can also specify the exact coordinates for the drawing. You can now annotate your orthographic drawing. For more information about annotations, see Annotate an Orthographic Drawing on page 569. To load a saved orthographic view 1 In the Project Manager, click the Orthographic DWG tab. 2 In the Orthos tree view, expand the project and the Orthographic Drawings folder. Double-click an orthographic drawing. 3 On the ribbon, click Orthos tab ➤ Orthos panel ➤ New View. 4 In the Select Reference Models dialog box, under Project Models, click one or more models to use as a reference for the orthographic drawing. Click OK. 5 In Select Orthographic View dialog box, click Load. 6 In the Load View dialog box, under View List, click the name of the view you want to load. Click OK. To rename a saved orthographic view 1 In the Project Manager, click the Orthographic DWG tab. 2 In the Orthos tree view, expand the project and the Orthographic Drawings folder. Double-click an orthographic drawing. 3 On the ribbon, click Orthos tab ➤ Orthos panel ➤ New View. 4 In the Select Reference Models dialog box, under Project Models, click one or more models to use as a reference for the orthographic drawing. Click OK. 5 In Select Orthographic View dialog box, click Load. 6 In the Load View dialog box, under View List, double-click the name of the orthographic view you want to rename. Type the new name and click OK.

Create an Orthographic Drawing | 567

NOTE You can also rename an orthographic view in the Save View dialog box.

Quick Reference Commands PLANTORTHOCREATE

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Select Reference Models Dialog Box Select Orthographic View Dialog Box

Link or Copy Orthographic Drawings to a Project Using the Project Manager, you can either link or copy drawings to the project. When you link a file to a project, the file is externally referenced from the project. Any changes you make to the file are saved in the referenced file, and no copy is stored in the project. When you copy a file to a project, any changes you make to the file are saved in the project. The original file is not modified or referenced after you make a copy. Linking is faster than copying, but either method can be used to add drawings to a project. Select the method that best serves your project requirements. To link an orthographic drawing to the current project 1 In the Project Manager, click the Orthographic DWG tab. 2 In the Orthos tree view, expand the project and the Orthographic Drawings folder. 3 On the Orthos toolbar, click Link To Ortho DWG.

568 | Chapter 15 Generate Orthographic Drawings

4 In the Select Drawings To Link To Project dialog box, locate and click the drawing file you want to link to the current project. Click Open. To copy an orthographic drawing to the current project 1 In the Project Manager, click the Orthographic DWG tab. 2 In the Orthos tree view, expand the project and the Orthographic Drawings folder. 3 On the Orthos toolbar, click Copy Ortho DWG To Project. 4 In the Select Drawings To Copy To Project dialog box, locate and click the drawing file you want to copy to the current project. Click Open.

Quick Reference Commands PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Project Manager

Annotate an Orthographic Drawing You can select a Plant object in an orthographic drawing to annotate. In an orthographic drawing, you can annotate valves, equipment, and components as you can in any AutoCAD drawing. The annotation is based on the AutoCAD default text style. For information about adjusting the style of annotation text, see “Work with Annotative Styles” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Annotate an Orthographic Drawing | 569

To add an annotation to an orthographic drawing 1 In the Project Manager, click the Orthographic DWG tab. 2 In the Orthos tree view, expand the project and the Orthographic Drawings folder. Double-click an orthographic drawing. 3 In the orthographic paper space, in an orthographic drawing, double-click the viewport that contains the component you want to annotate.

4 On the ribbon, click Orthos tab ➤ Orthos panel ➤ Plant Annotate. 5 In the drawing, click a component to annotate. 6 In the Specify Annotation Style list, click a value to specify the annotation tag style. 7 Use the cursor to move the annotation in the drawing. Click to set the annotation. NOTE Polar Tracking restricts cursor movement to specified angles. To place annotations at any angle from the component, click Polar Tracking on the

application status bar to free cursor movement.

570 | Chapter 15 Generate Orthographic Drawings

Shortcut menu: Right-click an object in an orthographic drawing and click Annotate. Command entry: PLANTORTHOANNOTATE To move an annotation in an orthographic drawing 1 In the orthographic paper space, in an orthographic drawing, double-click the viewport that contains the Plant object annotation you want to move. 2 Click the annotation. 3 Drag the annotation to any location on the drawing using the move grip.

Annotate an Orthographic Drawing | 571

Quick Reference Commands PLANTORTHOANNOTATE

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Add Dimensions to an Orthographic Drawing You can add dimensions to a selected Plant object in an orthographic drawing. In an orthographic drawing, you can add dimensions in the orthographic viewports as you can in any AutoCAD drawing. For more information about adding dimensions in drawings, see “Create Dimensions” in the AutoCAD Help system.

To add a dimension to an orthographic drawing 1 In the Project Manager, click the Orthographic DWG tab. 2 In the Orthos tree view, expand the project and the Orthographic Drawings folder. Double-click an orthographic drawing.

572 | Chapter 15 Generate Orthographic Drawings

3 In the orthographic paper space, in an orthographic drawing, double-click the viewport that contains the component to which you want to add a dimension. 4 On the ribbon, click Orthos tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension. 5 In the drawing, specify the first and second extension line origins or press ENTER to select an object to dimension. 6 Use the cursor to move the dimension line in the drawing. Click to set the dimension line.

Shortcut menu: Right-click an object in an orthographic drawing and click Annotate.

Quick Reference Commands See “Create Dimensions” in the AutoCAD Help system.

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference No entries

Add Dimensions to an Orthographic Drawing | 573

574

Migrate Projects and Drawings

16

Migrate projects and drawings created in earlier versions of AutoCAD P&ID to ensure data integrity with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

Overview: Migrate Projects and Drawings When you open a project or drawing created in an earlier version of AutoCAD P&ID, the project and drawing migration process starts automatically. AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 starts the Project Migration or Drawing Migration wizard when it detects that a project or drawing requires migration. During migration, the program updates project or drawing-level data. For example, it changes point parameter names to support end-coded valves, or adds To/From properties for pipe line segments. Migration can be time-intensive, depending on how large a project is or how many drawings are associated with the project. Once the migration is complete, you can work on the project and its drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010. NOTE You can migrate files created with AutoCAD P&ID 2008 and AutoCAD P&ID 2009 only. Migrate projects and drawings created in AutoCAD P&ID 2008 first to AutoCAD P&ID 2009 before migrating to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010. NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D does not migrate user profiles, including custom tool palette settings. Instead, you can save the user profile from an earlier version of AutoCAD P&ID and import it to AutoCAD Plant 3D. For more information, see “Save & Restore Interface Settings” in the AutoCAD Help system.

575

Verify Projects and Drawings Before you open AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 to start migrating a project or drawing, verify that the project and its related drawings are not in use. You can migrate only those projects and drawings that are not already locked. If a project or drawing is in use or if files are missing, the File Unavailable page is displayed and lists the invalid files. Once you begin migration, other designers cannot open the project or its associated drawings for editing until migration is complete. Use the version of the product that created the project or drawing to verify that it is not in use. For example, if you used AutoCAD P&ID 2009 to create the project you plan to migrate, open the project with that version. After you open the project in AutoCAD P&ID 2009, you can view the Project Manager to see if any of the related drawings are in use. If someone is editing a drawing that is part of the project, the Locked Drawing icon is displayed in the Project Manager. Save and close the drawing. Once you close all drawings, make sure to close the entire project before exiting AutoCAD P&ID 2009. Now you can safely proceed with migration.

Migrate Projects Migrate projects created in earlier versions of AutoCAD P&ID before opening them with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010. When you open a project created in an earlier version of AutoCAD P&ID, the Project Migration wizard starts. It displays the Project Migration Launch dialog box. During the migration process, you can back up the project and associated drawings. A backup ensures that the project still opens in the earlier version of AutoCAD P&ID. If you cancel the migration process, the project and its related files return to their original state. AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 makes the following changes when migrating a project from AutoCAD P&ID 2009. Project-level changes

Description

Project version number

Updates the project version number from 2009 to 2010

576 | Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings

When migrating a project from 2008 to 2009, the following changes are made. Project-level changes

Description

Project version number

Updates the project version number from 2008 to 2009.

Integrate Property Acquisition data

Adds Property Acquisition rules and triggers to the AutoCAD P&ID 2009 project.xml file and renames the file as PnIDPart.xml.

New project.xml file

Creates a new project.xml file based on the project.xml template in the install directory. The templates are crucial to the migration process.

Update of the ProcessPower.dcf file

Makes the following changes to the ProcessPower.dcf file: ■

Changes the underlying database engine to SQLite.

■

Adds new tables and columns to the database to support AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 features such as Acquisition Properties.

■

Assigns a tag property to the PipeLineGroup. The default value is Line Number.

Replacement of ProcessPower.xsd and ProcessPower.xml

Replaces the ProcessPower.xsd and ProcessPower.xml files with ProcessPower.dcfx.

Update to the projSymbolStyles.dwg and each drawing associated with a project.

Scans all block definitions that have AttachmentPoint1 and AttachmentPoint2 in the right to left (negative x-axis) direction or in the up to down (negative y-axis) direction. Swaps the attachment points, if present, so they are in the positive x or yaxis direction. This change in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 is important because AttachmentPoint1 represents the inlet and AttachmentPoint2

Migrate Projects | 577

Project-level changes

Description represents the outlet of blocks when attaching and aligning them with schematic lines.

Addition of the PnIDMigration.xml file

Adds the PnIDMigration.xml file. Use this file to replace AutoCAD P&ID 2009 blocks with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 blocks manually. Enter the block names that you want to replace.

Understand Conversion to Acquisition Properties When you take the interim step to migrate a project from AutoCAD P&ID 2008 to AutoCAD P&ID 2009 before migrating to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010, the program converts some properties to acquisition properties. In the following table, the Acquisition Property column shows the properties that the migration process converts to acquisition properties. The Source Property column displays the properties from which each acquisition property acquires its value when the acquisition property is in Acquire mode. Acquisition Property

Source Property

HandValves.Size

PipeLines.Size

HandValves.Spec

PipeLines.Spec

InLineInstruments.Size

PipeLines.Size

PipingSpecialtyItems.Size

PipeLines.Size

PipingSpecialtyItems.Spec

PipeLines.Spec

PipingFittings.Size

PipeLines.Size

PipingFittings.Spec

PipeLines.Spec

If a migrated property value from a project is equal to the corresponding source property value, the property converts to an acquisition property in Acquire mode. If the migrated property value is not equal to the corresponding source property value, the property converts to an acquisition property in Override mode.

578 | Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings

NOTE To detect migration errors after you migrate a project, you can validate the project drawings. In the Project Manager, right-click a migrated drawing and click Validate. To migrate a project 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager. 2 In the Project Manager, in the drop-down list, click Open. 3 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the folder that contains the project you want to migrate. 4 Click the project.xml file. Click Open. The Project Migration wizard starts.

5 Verify that the project and its related drawing files are closed. On the Project Migration Launch page, click Next. 6 If the File Unavailable page is displayed, your project has files that are missing or currently in use . Find and close all project files. On the File Unavailable page, click Exit and repeat steps 1-5.

Migrate Projects | 579

7 To back up the files, on the File Available page, select Backup These Files Before Migration (Recommended), if it is not already selected. To add other files to the backup, click Add Files For Backup, find and select the files you want to add, and click Open. (To remove an added file, click Remove.) NOTE It is recommended that you back up your files in case they require further work in AutoCAD P&ID 2009. 8 Click Browse and specify a location to store the backup files. 9 Click Next. The Project Migration Backup page shows the progress of the backup and indicates whether it successfully backs up each file.

580 | Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings

10 Click Migrate. The Project Migration Progress page indicates the progress of the migration.

Migrate Projects | 581

11 Click Finish. The project opens in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

Migrate Drawings Migrate drawings created in earlier versions of AutoCAD P&ID before adding them to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 projects. When you attempt to add an AutoCAD P&ID 2009 drawing to a project you created with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010, the Drawing Migration wizard starts. Migration occurs only for the drawing you are adding to the project. You can create a backup during migration in case the drawing requires further editing in AutoCAD P&ID 2009. If you cancel the drawing migration process, the drawing returns to its original state. AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 makes the following changes occur when migrating a project from AutoCAD P&ID 2009. Drawing-level changes

Description

Drawing version number

Updates the drawing version number from 2009 to 2010.

The following changes occur when migrating a project from AutoCAD P&ID 2008 to AutoCAD P&ID 2009 in preparation for migrating to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010. Drawing-level changes

Description

Drawing version number

Updates the drawing version number from 2008 to 2009.

Update to inline instrument properties

Applies property acquisition to valves and other inline instruments so that they adopt the properties of the schematic line with which they are associated. The properties of inline components are overridden in favor of the schematic line properties.

Update to AttachmentPoint1 and AttachmentPoint2 of all blocks in the drawing

Scans all block definitions that have AttachmentPoint1 and AttachmentPoint2 in the right to left (negative x-axis) direction or in the up to down (negative y-axis) direction. If present, the attachment points are

582 | Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings

Drawing-level changes

Description exchanged so that they are in the positive x or y-axis direction. This change in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 is important because AttachmentPoint1 represents the inlet and AttachmentPoint2 represents the outlet of blocks when attaching and aligning them with schematic lines.

The migration process can change the way drawings look in AutoCAD Plant 3D. Part of the migration process updates the drawing with the symbols and settings of the new project. The drawing may appear different due to changes in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 symbols and settings. NOTE If you try to migrate a drawing that has the same file name as a drawing in the current project, a naming conflict message is displayed. You can either migrate the drawing with an assigned new name or stop migration. NOTE To detect migration errors after you migrate a project, you can validate the project drawings. In the Project Manager, right-click a migrated drawing and click Validate. To migrate a drawing by linking it to the current project 1 If the Project Manager is not already displayed, on the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager. 2 In the Project manager, in the toolbar, click Link to Drawing. 3 In the Select Drawings to Link to Project dialog box, navigate to the folder that contains the drawing you want to migrate. 4 Click the drawing file. Click Open. The Drawing Migration wizard starts.

Migrate Drawings | 583

5 Verify that the drawing file is closed. 6 On the Drawing Migration Launch page, select Backup the Drawing Before Migration (Recommended), if it is not already selected. NOTE It is recommended that you back up your drawing in case it requires further work in AutoCAD P&ID 2009. 7 Click Browse and specify a location to store the backup file. 8 Click Migrate. The Drawing Migration Progress page indicates the progress of the migration.

584 | Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings

9 Click Finish. The drawing opens in your AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 project. To migrate a drawing by copying it to the current project 1 If the Project Manager is not already displayed, on the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager. 2 In the Project manager, in the toolbar, click Copy Drawing to Project. 3 In the Select Drawings to Copy to Project dialog box, navigate to the folder that contains the drawing you want to migrate. 4 Click the drawing file. Click Open. The Drawing Migration wizard starts.

Migrate Drawings | 585

5 Verify that the drawing file is closed. 6 On the Drawing Migration Launch page, select Backup the Drawing Before Migration (Recommended), if it is not already selected. NOTE It is recommended that you back up your drawing in case it requires further work in AutoCAD P&ID 2009. 7 Click Browse and specify a location to store the backup file. 8 Click Migrate. The Drawing Migration Progress page indicates the progress of the migration.

586 | Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings

9 Click Finish. The drawing opens in your AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 project.

Resolve Migration Failure Project and drawing migration failure can occur for several reasons. The following table contains some common migration failure scenarios and their resolutions. Failure scenario

Resolution

Files are in use

If a designer is editing a drawing that is part of the project you want to migrate, AutoCAD Plant 3D cannot place a lock on that file. The File Unavailable dialog box lists files in use with the following status symbol: Resolve this situation by making sure that no one is editing the drawing. Restart the migration process to lock the offending file so migration can proceed.

Resolve Migration Failure | 587

Failure scenario

Resolution

Missing files

If a file residing in your project folder is renamed or moved to another folder, the Migration wizard is unable to lock it. The file is no longer associated with the project and the migration fails. Missing files are displayed in the File Unavailable dialog box. The File Unavailable dialog box lists files that are missing with the following status symbol: Resolve this problem by renaming a misnamed file with its original name or by adding a drawing with the new name back to the project in AutoCAD P&ID 2009. If the File Unavailable dialog box lists missing files, find and move them back to the project folder.

Migrating an AutoCAD Plant 3D 2008 project or drawing

You cannot directly migrate projects and drawings created in AutoCAD P&ID 2008 to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010. Resolve this problem by migrating the project or drawing first to AutoCAD P&ID 2009. When that migration is complete, save the project or drawing and migrate it to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

Platform incompatibility

AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 is available in 32bit and 64-bit versions. AutoCAD P&ID 2009 was available in both 32-bit and 64bit versions, but cross migration does not work. Direct file migration from AutoCAD P&ID 2008 can only be achieved between 32-bit versions. AutoCAD P&ID 2008 was only available in a 32-bit version. You cannot migrate an AutoCAD P&ID 2008 project or drawing to a 64-bit installation of AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010. Resolve this problem by first migrating the AutoCAD P&ID 2008 project or drawing

588 | Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings

Failure scenario

Resolution to the 32-bit version of AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010. After you save the file, you can edit the project or drawing in either platform version of AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

Resolve Migration Failure | 589

590

Validate P&ID Drawings

17

Make sure that your project drawing complies with company standards by validating your drawing regularly.

Overview: Validate P&ID Drawings Validate your drawing and complete the Validation Summary to correct or flag detected errors. Running the validation process for your P&ID project ensures that project drawings comply with industry or company standards. Use the validation tool in AutoCAD P&ID to detect errors as you work rather than waiting until late in a project cycle, when mistakes are more costly and difficult to resolve. For each project, you specify the types of errors that are flagged when you run a validation. After running a validation, you can correct or ignore the detected errors. NOTE For information about validating a 3D model against a P&ID drawing, see Validate the 3D Model on page 359.

Validate Project Drawings You can run validations for an individual drawing, several drawings, or all project drawings at any stage of a project.

Understand the Drawing Validation Process The validation process is as follows: ■

You run validations for individual drawings or for an entire project.

591

■

In the Validation Summary window, you click each error to zoom in to drawing the area you need to check. The description at the bottom of the window helps to identify the problem.

Understand Validation Settings You can configure validation settings to check for potential errors. For example, you can check for the following conditions in a drawing or project: ■

Size mismatches

■

Spec mismatches

■

Non-terminating lines

■

Unconnected components

■

Flow direction conflicts

■

Orphaned annotations

■

Unresolved off-page connectors

■

The presence of base AutoCAD objects, which can be misinterpreted as P&ID objects in plotted output

Before changing these settings, ask your system administrator what the standards are for your company. To specify error types to flag 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel ➤ Validate Config. 2 In the P&ID Validation Settings dialog box, in the Error Reporting tree, expand the P&ID objects and Base AutoCAD objects nodes. Select the check boxes for the error types to be flagged during project validation. 3 Click OK. Command entry: VALIDATECONFIG To validate project drawings 1 Do one of the following: ■

To validate a specific drawing or all the drawings in a specific folder, in the tree view, click the drawing or the drawing folder. On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel ➤ Validate.

592 | Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings

■

To validate all the drawings in a project folder, in the tree view, click the project folder. On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel ➤ Validate.

The Validation Progress dialog box is displayed. NOTE The Validation Progress dialog box displays the validation progress for each drawing being checked for errors and overall progress for all the drawings being validated in the current session (n of n format). 2 When the Validation Progress dialog box closes, do one of the following: ■

If none of the drawings have validation errors, the Validation Complete message is displayed. Click OK.

The drawings are validated and the validation process is complete. ■

If there are errors in one or more drawings, the Validation Summary Window is displayed. The validated drawings are displayed in the tree view. In the Validation Summary window, the Details pane displays the following information about the validation: ■

Number of errors identified

■

Number of errors ignored

■

Total number of errors

Go to the next step. 3 To see information about each error, in the Validation Summary tree, click an error node. The drawing zooms in on the problem object. The Details pane displays the following information about the error: ■

Error type

■

Error action

NOTE For some errors, the Details pane displays additional error-specific information. For information about the Details pane, see Validation Summary Window.

Command entry: VALIDATE For information about correcting specific types of errors, see Correct Validation Errors on page 594.

Validate Project Drawings | 593

Quick Reference Commands VALIDATE VALIDATECONFIG VALIDATESUMMARY

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference P&ID Validation Settings Dialog Box Validation Summary Window

Correct Validation Errors Address the errors that are identified during the validation process. After you validate the drawings in a project, the Validation Summary window is displayed, with a list of flagged errors. Errors are identified by the following symbol:

To zoom in to specific errors, click the name of the error. The Details area displays information about the error and its status. You can ignore the error or fix it manually. Errors flagged as Ignored can be hidden by changing the setting in the Validation Summary window.

594 | Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings

NOTE For information about validating a 3D model against a P&ID drawing, see Validate the 3D Model on page 359.

Error Validation Reference When you validate a drawing or project, you can flag and correct the following errors.

Base AutoCAD Object Example:

Description:

An AutoCAD object or block (instead of an AutoCAD P&ID component) has been inserted in the drawing. Such blocks do not show up in reports or in the Data Manager, even though they may look like a P&ID component.

To Correct:

■

Erase the object.

■

Ignore the error.

Correct Validation Errors | 595

Size Mismatch Example:

Description:

The size of a line and its associated component do not match. This condition is usually caused by manual changes to the component properties.

To Correct:

■

Manually fix Size Mismatch errors. You must change the size of either the line or its associated component at the connection point so that they match.

■

Ignore the error.

Spec Mismatch Example:

Description:

The specification properties (details such as the component material) for lines and inline components do not match. This condition is usually caused by manual changes to the properties.

596 | Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings

To Correct:

■

Manually fix Spec Mismatch errors. To correct the problem, change the specification property of either the line or its associated component so that they match.

■

Ignore the error.

Non-terminating Line Example:

Description:

Process lines do not terminate through a connection to an endline component, or do not end with an endline symbol signifying an air vent, water outline, drain, or other valid terminator.

To Correct:

■

Create a connection with another line or component.

■

Ignore the error.

Correct Validation Errors | 597

Unconnected Component Example:

Description:

No true connection exists for lines and their associated components, even though they appear to be connected. This error may result if a proper connection was never established, or if a component was dragged away from a line.

To Correct:

■

Create a connection with another line or component.

Specific rules apply to the following components: ■

Equipment: All attachment points on must be connected to a schematic line.

■

General instruments: At least one signal line must be connected to a general instrument.

■

Inline instruments and control valves: These components must be placed on a pipe line.

■

Tanks and vessels: Tanks or vessels must be connected to at least one pipe line. Tanks and vessels that have a placement point must be connected to a pipe line at the placement point.

For information about components, see Add Components to a P&ID Drawing on page 302. ■

Ignore the error.

598 | Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings

Flow Direction Conflict Example:

Description:

The flow direction is incorrect for a line or component.

To Correct:

■

Update the flow direction.

■

Ignore the error.

Orphaned Annotation Example:

Description:

An annotation tag has been moved away from the component with which it is associated.

To Correct:

■

Drag the annotation to within the acceptable distance, or tolerance, of its associated object or enter new coordinates.

Correct Validation Errors | 599

■

Ignore the error.

Unresolved Off-page Connectors Example:

Description:

Off-page connectors used to connect the current drawing with another drawing do not specify a valid project location.

To Correct:

■

Specify a valid connector in another drawing.

■

Ignore the error.

To correct Base AutoCAD Object errors 1 Validate the project or drawing following the procedure described in Validate Project Drawings on page 591. 2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Base AutoCAD Objects tree, click the error node. Do one of the following: ■

To convert the Base AutoCAD object to a P&ID component, in the drawing, right-click the object to be converted. Click Convert to P&ID Object. In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, select a component. Click OK. If prompted, in the drawing, specify an insertion base point.

■

To erase the object, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the error node. Click Erase.

■

To ignore the error, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the error node. Click Ignore. The error is moved to the Errors Marked as Ignored folder in the Validation Errors tree.

600 | Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings

NOTE To change the status of an ignored error, in the Errors Marked as Ignored folder, right-click the error node. Click . 3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the Base AutoCAD Object folder. Click Refresh. To correct Size Mismatch errors 1 Validate the project or drawing following the procedure described in Validate Project Drawings on page 591. 2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Size Mismatch error tree, click the error node. Do one of the following: ■

To manually fix size-mismatch errors, in the drawing, change the size of the mismatched component or the size of the line or lines connected to the component to match the other.

■

To ignore the error, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the error node. Click Ignore.

3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the Size Mismatches folder. Click Refresh. To correct Spec Mismatch errors 1 Validate the project or drawing following the procedure described in Validate Project Drawings on page 591. 2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Spec Mismatch error tree, click the error node. Do one of the following: ■

To manually fix Spec Mismatch errors, in the drawing, change the size of the mismatched component or the spec of the line or lines connected to the component to match the other.

■

To ignore the error, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the error node. Click Ignore.

3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the Size Mismatches folder. Click Refresh.

Correct Validation Errors | 601

To correct Non-terminating Line errors 1 Validate the project or drawing following the procedure described in Validate Project Drawings on page 591. 2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Non-terminating Line error tree, click the error node. Do one of the following: ■

To manually create a connection, re-create or move the endpoint of the line so that a connection is established.

■

To ignore the error, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the error node. Click Ignore.

3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the Non-terminating Line folder. Click Refresh. To correct Unconnected Component errors 1 Validate the project or drawing following the procedure described in Validate Project Drawings on page 591. 2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Unconnected Component error tree, click the error node. Do one of the following: ■

To manually create a connection, attach the component to a line at all available attachment points on the component. If the unconnected component has no attachment points, at least one line must be connected to it.

■

To ignore the error, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the error node. Click Ignore.

3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the Size Mismatches folder. Click Refresh. To correct Flow Direction Conflict errors 1 Validate the project or drawing following the procedure described in Validate Project Drawings on page 591. 2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Flow Direction Conflict error tree, click the error node. Do one of the following: ■

To update the flow in the drawing area, correct the flow direction of the line originating or ending at that point.

602 | Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings

■

To ignore the error, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the error node. Click Ignore.

3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the Size Mismatches folder. Click Refresh. To correct Orphaned Annotation errors 1 Validate the project or drawing following the procedure described in Validate Project Drawings on page 591. 2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Orphaned Annotations error tree, click the error node. Do one of the following: ■

To move the annotation closer to its related component, in the drawing, drag the annotation or enter coordinates.

■

To ignore the error, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the error node. Click Ignore.

3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the Orphaned Annotations folder. Click Refresh. To correct Unresolved Off-Page Connector errors 1 Validate the project or drawing following the procedure described in Validate Project Drawings on page 591. 2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Unresolved Off-page Connectors error tree, click the error node. Do one of the following: ■

To specify a connector in another drawing, in the drawing area, right-click the connector. Click Off-Page Connector ➤ Connect. The Create Connection dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, specify the information required to resolve the error.

■

To ignore the error, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the error node. Click Ignore.

3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the Unresolved Off-Page Connectors folder. Click Refresh. To display or hide ignored error flags 1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel ➤ Validate Summary.

Correct Validation Errors | 603

2 In the Validation Summary window, select the check box for Don’t Display Errors Marked as Ignored.

Quick Reference Commands VALIDATE VALIDATESUMMARY

System Variables No entries

Interface Reference Validation Summary Window

604 | Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings

Glossary

Acquire mode The mode in which a property acquires its value from another source (properties for a project, drawing, or class). See also Override mode and Initialization only. Acquisition A property type that acquires its value from another source such as project properties, drawing properties, or class properties. Annotation An AutoCAD object comprised of text and (optional) shapes. In AutoCAD Plant 3D, annotations are used to display data values of P&ID components (including equipment, valves, lines, and so on). These values are displayed as text. Assembly A group of connected components that are commonly placed in a drawing at the same time. For example, a level gauge assembly might contain an instrument and five valves. You can place an assembly from a tool palette instead of selecting each component individually. Assumed nozzle A type of nozzle that is automatically added as a record in the Data Manager when a pipe line is connected to a piece of equipment. Unlike other nozzle types, an assumed nozzle is not visible in the drawing. Automatic annotation A type of annotation that gets automatically inserted when a component is created. See also Annotation and Linked Annotation. Bill of materials (BOM) List of components needed to fabricate a pipeline. Child table See Object table. Class A specific type of a class, as opposed to a class family. For example, Centrifugal Pump is a class from the Pumps class family. Class family A class that is used to categorize other classes and set a starting point for class properties, tags, and annotations for those classes. For example, Pumps and Equipment are class families; Centrifugal Pump and Ball Valve are classes.

Glossary | 605

Class property A property of a class; it reflects a data value. For example, the HandValve class type may have attributes of size, spec, and manufacturer. The Pumps class type may have flow, TDH, and manufacturer. Component A native AutoCAD Plant 3D object type. AutoCAD Plant 3D components include Equipment, Nozzles, Lines, Instruments, and Inline components. Component class See Class. Connection symbol The graphical element in a drawing that indicates an off-page or on-page line connection. You can choose from several symbols. Convert To change an AutoCAD object to an AutoCAD Plant 3D component or line; the converted item is included in data reports. Converted support A pipe support that was created by converting one or more AutoCAD objects. Data Manager An enhanced secondary window in AutoCAD Plant 3D; it displays data in a table. DWF (P&ID) A Design Web Format file; it is a compressed file format created from DWG files in a project. DWF files are easy to publish and view on the Web. Equipment InfoTag An annotation style. A multiline set of attributes that displays selected data values for a placed piece of equipment. One Equipment InfoTag for each equipment component is typically placed at the top of a drawing or in a grid across the bottom of the drawing. Family table A table that contains information about different classes within a class family. For example, the Equipment family table contains information about pumps, tanks, blowers and other classes found under the Equipment class family. Flag A symbol, like an arrow, that indicates the direction of the flow. The flag symbol contains the line number annotation. It is on the Non-engineering tab of the P&ID DIN tool palette. Flip grip A grip that flips an object in the direction shown in the grip arrow. Flow arrow The direction in which a schematic line flows. You can control the direction of the flow arrow using dynamic grips. Freestanding annotation Text that is associated with a component; it does not move when the component moves. However, the data associated with

606 | Glossary

the annotation updates with the component. Just the text gets disconnected. Annotations are either freestanding or linked. See also Linked Annotation. Gap crossing A visual indication on a drawing that a line breaks on either side of a crossing. Initialization only A property setting that limits property acquisition to a one-time event, when a component is first initialized. If the property is set to initialization only, it acquires its value from its designated source and changes immediately to override mode. See also Acquisition and Override mode. Inline component A component with an alignment grip that can be dropped onto a line. Instrument A device or combination of devices used directly or indirectly to measure, display, or control a variable. Isometrics Stylized drawings of parts of a model which convey the information required to build this model section. KKS (Kraftwerk-Kennzeichensystem) A power plant classification system managed and developed by VGP Working Panel. KKS is usually used with the DIN 2481 standard. Line designation table (LDT) List of pipe lines and their properties. Linked annotation Graphic, text, or text with a graphic that labels a component. The text values reflect the data attribute values of a component. Examples of linked annotations are a line ID, a valve size, instrument function symbol, or Equipment InfoTag. Linked annotation moves when the component moves. Loop crossing A visual indication on a drawing that a line loops over another line. Object table A table that contains specific information about a class or a property of a class. For example, Pumps is an object table of the Equipment family table. Off-page connector The graphical representation on a P&ID drawing of the continuance of a line from one project drawing to another. OrthoCube A semi-transparent green 3D solid box that you use to define the boundaries of an orthographic view. Orthogonal connection The default AutoCAD Plant 3D schematic line behavior of connecting at 90-degree increments.

Glossary | 607

Override mode A mode in which an acquired property can be modified. A property that is set up to acquire its value from another source is switched from acquiring mode to override mode in the Properties palette or in the Data Manager. See also Acquiring mode. Pins Symbols that identify a change in a pipe line property. In the KKS tagging standard, pins identify a change in properties (for example, Unit Number or System Code). A pin is either open (no-fill) or closed (black fill). Open pins mark the boundaries of a group with a common property. Closed pins identify a break in piping sub-systems or branches in a pipe line. When using either open or closed pins, drafters must manually change the properties of the lines beyond the open-pin boundary. Pins are located on the Non-engineering tab of the DIN tool palette. Pipe A tube or hollow cylinder for the conveyance of fluid. Pipe support A manufactured component that connects a pipe to a structure. Schematic line A line in AutoCAD Plant 3D that represents pipe lines and signal lines. Spool The section of model represented by an isometric. Typically includes starting & ending at points that are normal breakpoints when constructing the line. Tag A property that uniquely identifies a component. Trim As a verb, to add hardware to a piece of equipment. As a noun, additional information. A pipe trim is additional information (text or graphics) to further define a piping segment. Equipment trim is additional information (text or graphics) to further define a piece of equipment. Validate To check a drawing or a project for errors and inconsistencies such as unconnected components, non-terminating lines, and so on.

608 | Glossary

Index A acquire mode 605 acquisition 605 actuators adding to P&ID drawings 314 adding data to equipment 369 drawing files to projects 300 drawing status notes 258 drawings to folders 248 equipment to drawings 302 existing drawing to projects 244 fittings 467 instruments to P&ID drawings 306 lines to drawings 322 new drawing to projects 245 nozzles to drawings 305 pipe 445 pipe supports 486 read-only drawing to projects 244 valves 471 work history to drawings 259 alignment pipe 447 anchoring windows 293 annotating components 300 lines 300 annotation orthographic drawings 569 annotations 605 automatic 605 setting up for ortho drawings 231 setting up for P&ID 131 application menu 290 arrows, behavior on lines 82 assemblies 605 creating and using 320 assigning tags 335, 339

tags, elevation, and descriptions to equipment 369, 375 assigning tag about 293 assumed nozzles 605 attaching graphics to equipment 389 attachment points 69 audit projects 271 auto-hide for windows 293 AutoCAD exporting P&ID drawings to 344 AutoCAD objects converting to AutoCAD P&ID components 342 AutoCAD P&ID about 1 Help system 1 AutoCAD Plant 3D about 1 automatic numbering of components 249, 251

B bill of materials

605

C changing length structural members 403 child table. See object table 605 class definitions modifying and creating 57 specifying attributes and properties for Plant 3D 193 client information, changing for projects 11 Clipboard (Windows) copying pipe 482

609 | Index

component classes 606 component classes. See object definition 606 components 606 about 302 annotating 300 attachment points 69 automatic numbering 249 converting AutoCAD objects to 342 editing the block geometry of 319 placing 300 scaling 69 setting automatic numbering 251 tagging 300, 335, 339 understanding 297 compress projects 271 configuring drawing behavior settings in P&ID 32 drawing behavior settings in Plant 3D 140 drawing properties 17 end connections in P&ID 33 reports 20 symbols 68 the drawing and modeling environment 7 configuring P&ID validation settings 592 connected pipe 467 connection grips 327 connection symbols 606 connectors, configuring 179 context menus. See shortcut menus continuation grips 327 control valves adding to a P&ID drawing 306 conversion 606 converted support 606 converting equipment from 3D objects 383 copying equipment 389 pipe 482 creating equipment 369

610 | Index

equipment by stacking shapes 375 equipment from 3D objects 383 equipment from patterns 369 footings 425 grids 395 Isogen information item 554 Isogen message 552 ladders 420 members,structural 400 plates 427 production iso 556 Quick Iso 555 railings 413 stairs 417 structural grids 395 structural members 400 customized views 501 customizing pipe supports 491 reports 20 the drawing and modeling environment 7 cutting members 404 structural members 404

D Data Manager 606 about 282 creating a customized view for P&ID 53 creating a customized view for Plant 3D 150 customized views 501 data table filtering data 512 ordering columns 517 sorting data 516 data views 499, 501 Current Drawing data view 500 Project Reports data view 500 editing data 507 exporting data 522 active node and child nodes 522

modifying data using Excel 528 naming exported files 524 read-only exported data 529 understand read-only exported data 529 viewing exported data 523 exporting reports 538 exporting to PCF (Piping Component Format) 527 importing data accept or reject changes on import 530 import settings 530 importing CSV files 541 importing modified acquisition properties 531 importing to tree nodes 529 printing data and reports 548 reports accepting and rejecting changes on import 545 report types 534 viewing pending changes on import 545 viewing report logs 547 viewing reports 536 tree view filtering data 511 working with nodes 501 viewing acquisition property data 520 viewing read-only data 520 zooming to Plant 3D objects 505 defining part properties for equipment 369, 375, 383 detaching graphics from equipment 390 DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.) 5 DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.) standards 297 displaying pipe insulation 479 dockable windows, controlling display of 293

docking windows 293 drawing behavior settings in P&ID 32 in Plant 3D 140 drawing files adding to projects 300 creating 300 drawing properties configuring 17 drawing status, refreshing 260 drawings adding equipment to 302 adding existing to projects 244 adding lines to 322 adding new to projects 245 adding nozzles to 305 adding read-only to projects 244 adding status notes for 258 adding title block information 255 adding to folders 248 adding work history to 259 changing order in tree 248 checking status of 253 grouping in folders 246 including xrefs (referenced drawings) 242 linking or copying 243 linking or copying with xrefs 243 numbering 250 opening 255 organizing in projects 239 previewing 254–255 printing 264 refreshing status of 254 removing from projects 245 saving all in project 261 setting properties 249–250 sharing 264 tracking work history of 261 transmitting 264 viewing read-only 255 viewing work history for 259 DWF P&ID 606 DWF files output settings 266

Index | 611

publishing 266 publishing options

268

E edge cutting members,structural 411 structural members 411 editing grids 395 members,structural 401 pipe 461 structural grids 395 structural members 401 equipment adding data to 369, 375, 383 adding nozzles to 369, 375, 383 adding reserve space to 391 adding to drawings 302 assigning tags, elevation, and descriptions to 369, 375 attaching graphics to 389 converting 3D objects to 383 copying 389 creating 369 creating a template from 369, 375, 383 creating and modifying 369 creating by stacking shapes 375 creating user-fabricated 375 detaching graphics from 390 modifying 387 moving 388 reorienting 388 shapes and dimensions 375 stacking shapes 369 using existing patterns 369 using parametric patterns 369 Equipment InfoTags 606 equipment parameters 369, 375, 383 equipment part properties defining 369, 375, 383 equipment templates creating 369, 375, 383 erasing 467

612 | Index

exploding objects,structural 424 structural trim objects 424 export and import settings external data mapping for P&ID 40 external data mapping for Plant 3D 140 exporting objects,structural 428 P&ID drawings to AutoCAD 344 PCF 559 structural objects 428 extending members 408 structural members 408

F fabricated equipment creating 375 family tables 606 field add field data 256 create a title block 257 insert a title block 257 update a title block 257 update field data 256 file locations P&ID project data 51 Plant 3D project data 148 files linking or copying 243 fittings 467 flags 606 flip grips 606 floating windows 293 flow arrows 606 adding to P&ID drawings 314 folders adding drawings to 248 changing order in tree 248 creating 247 creating nested 248 project drawings in 246 removing 248 renaming 248

footing settings,structural 425 footings creating 425 specifying settings 425 freestanding annotations 606

G gap crossings 607 gaps adding to P&ID drawings 314 general instruments (bubbles) adding to P&ID drawings 306 graphics attaching to equipment 389 detaching from equipment 390 grids,structural 395 grips 287 connection 327 continuation 327, 438 rotation 467 substitution 461, 467

H Help about 1 organization

1

I initialization only mode 607 inline components 607 about 310 end connections and 311 open or closed state 311 inline instruments adding to a P&ID drawing 306 instruments 607 adding to P&ID drawings 306 piping 474 insulation 479 International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 5

ISA (Instrument Society of America) standards 297 ISA symbols license 4 ISO (International Organization for Standardization) standards 297 ISO symbols license 5 Isogen information item creating 554 Isogen message creating 552 isometric drawings dimensions 158 labels 161 paths 154 set up new type 157 settings 153 sloped lines 160 title block area settings 166 title block bill of materials 168 title block layers settings 163 title block settings 163 isometrics 607 check 551 final 552 stress 551 types 551

J JIS symbols

6

K KKS

607

L ladder settings, structural 420 ladders creating 420 specifying settings 420 layer and color assignments configuring automated schemes 171 lengthening structural members 403

Index | 613

line designation table configure 156 line designation table (LDT) 607 line model 393 line numbers 434 selecting 466 line settings, setting up 62 lines adding to drawings 322 annotating 300 connecting to components 327 connecting to each other 327 converting AutoCAD objects to 342 define the directional flow of 329 editing 330 grouping behavior 328 groups and segments 322 placing 300 setting up arrow behavior 82 tagging 300, 335, 339 To and From information 323 understanding 297 linked annotations 607 locking pipe 465 locking windows and toolbars 294 loop crossings 607

M mapping P&ID and 3D sizes 357 mapping Plant objects 182 marking nozzle locations to add metadata 383 member settings, structural 398 members creating 400 cutting 404 edge cutting 411 editing 401 extending 408 lengthening 403 mitering 406 restoring 412

614 | Index

trimming 408 members,structural 398 menus, shortcut 286 migrating P&ID drawings 582 P&ID drawings and projects 576 P&ID projects 576, 587 migration (P&ID) projects 579 mitering members 406 structural members 406 model representation,structural modifying equipment 387 pipe size 462 pipe spec 462 pipe supports 489 monitors, using dual 293 moving equipment 388 nozzles 388

575–

393

N New Status dialog box 261 nozzles adding to drawings 305 adding to equipment 369, 375, 383 marking on a piece of equipment 383 moving 388 numbering drawings 250

O object definition families 605 object definition properties 606 object definitions 605 object snaps pipe 448 object tables 607 objects exploding 424 exporting 428

off-page connectors 607 about 138 adding to P&ID drawings 314 opening projects 254 options file long (OPL) 607 OrthoCube specifying an orthographic view 563 orthogonal connections 607 orthographic drawing adding dimensions 572 annotating 569 copying to a project 568 generating an orthographic view 562 linking to a project 568 overview 561 templates 562 orthographic view copying to another project 563 saving 563 outline model 393 override mode 608

P P&ID drawings adding instruments to 306 migrating 582 validating 591 P&ID drawings and projects migrating 575–576 validating 591 P&ID drawings, exporting to AutoCAD 344 P&ID drawings, using with Plant 3D 349 P&ID Line List 350 P&ID projects migrating 576, 587 parameters for equipment 369, 375, 383 paths configure for P&ID 51 configure for Plant 3D 148 patterns creating equipment from 369 pins 608

PIP (Process Industry Practices) standards 297 PIP symbols license 4 pipe adding 437 aligning 447 connecting 449 connecting to nozzles 438 connecting to xrefs 480 connecting with object snaps 448 connection type 468 copying 482 custom parts 474 erasing 467 fittings 467 formatting line numbers 434 insulation 479 joints 468 line numbers 434 locking 465 modifying 461 modifying size 462 modifying spec 462 placeholder parts 474 precision routing 448 properties 462 routing 445 routing solutions 449 selecting 466 specs 431 supports 485 tagging 478 valves 471 pipe supports 485, 608 customizing 491 modifying 489 placing 486 placing on sloped piping 493 placing components 300 lines 300 Plant 3D objects set up class definitions for 193 plates creating 427

Index | 615

printing drawings 264 Process Industry Practices (PIP) 4 production iso creating 556 project data, changing 11 project location 238 Project Manager about 253, 279 previewing drawings in 255 project setup adding a new property 11 changing details 11 class definitions for Plant 3D 193 configure line designation table 156 configuring connectors 179 configuring layer and color assignments 171 create new isometric drawing type 157 creating a customized view for the Data Manager 150 export and import settings for P&ID 40 export and import settings for Plant 3D 140 isometric drawing paths 154 isometric settings 153 map P&ID and 3D piping classes 182 setting dimensions for isometrics 158 setting isometric labels 161 setting isometric title block 163 setting isometric title block attributes 165 setting isometric title block bill of materials 168 setting isometric title block drawing area 166 setting isometric title block layers 163 setting sloped lines formatting for isometrics 160 Project Setup wizard 8 Project Status Manager 261

616 | Index

project.xml file 261 projects audit 271 auditing 271 compress 271 compressing 271 create new 8 existing drawings in 244 grouping drawings in folders 246 how to audit 271 link or copy files to 243 location of 238 new drawings in 245 opening 253–254 organizing drawings in 239 organizing files in 246 package and transmit 264 pointing users to 238 project.xml file 261 read-only drawings in 244 removing drawings from 245 saving drawings 260 setup process 239 starting 241 tracking progress of 261 properties configuring drawing 17 pipe 462 setting for drawings 249–250 setting up for P&ID 86 setting up for Plant 3D 197 Properties palette about 281 property acquisition acquire and override modes 92, 202 between signal line groups and pipe line groups 93 copy or move components with 92 from multiple sources 93 initialization only 92, 203 rules 90, 202 setting up 90, 201

Q Quick Iso creating 555 Quick Properties panel

285

R railing settings, structural 413 railings creating 413 specifying settings 413 read-only drawings adding to projects 244 viewing 255 relief valves adding to a P&ID drawing 306 removing fittings 467 reorienting equipment 388 reports configuring 20 templates 20 reserve space adding to equipment 391 resizing windows 293 restoring members,structural 412 structural members 412 reviewing isometric results 558 ribbon about 275 ribbon tabs 275 workspaces and 275 right-click menus. See shortcut menus

S saving project drawings 260 schematic lines 608 selecting pipe 466

selection lists setting up 101, 210 setting structural model representation 393 setting up projects 239 settings footing 425 ladder 420 railing 413 stair 417 structural member 398 shape model 393 shortcut menus 286 size mapping 357 sorting work history for drawings 262 spec breaks adding to drawings 314 Spec Viewer 283 specialty item piping 474 specs routing pipe 431 spools 608 stair settings, structural 417 stairs creating 417 specifying settings 417 structural grids 395 structural members 398 creating 400 cutting 404 edge cutting 411 editing 401 extending 408 lengthening 403 mitering 406 restoring 412 specifying settings 398 trimming 408 structural model representation 393 structural modeling in AutoCAD Plant 3D 393 structural objects exploding 424 exporting 428

Index | 617

symbol lists setting up 101 symbol model 393 symbol settings, setting up symbols components and lines

trim 608 trimming members

297

T tag formats setting up 215 tagging components 300, 335, 339 lines 300, 335, 339 tagging prompt, setting up 62 tags 608 assigning 335, 339 default format templates 215 default templates 114 expressions 215 for a pipe line group 114 format expressions 114 format levels 113 formats 214–215 setting formats for 112, 214 setting prompt for in P&ID 62 types of 336 uniqueness 115, 216 using acquiring properties 113, 215 templates creating for equipment 369, 375, 383 reports 20 tool palettes P&ID 284 substitution 286 toolbars controlling display of 293 locking 294 tooltips 289 transmit,projects 264 transmittal packages setting up 265 unpacking 266 transparent windows 293

618 | Index

408

62

V validating a 3D model against a P&ID drawing 359 addressing P&ID errors 594 correcting mismatch errors between a 3D model and a P&ID drawing 362 P&ID drawings 591 P&ID drawings and projects 591 validation 608 valves 467

W windows auto-hiding 293 controlling display of 293 locking 294 resizing 293 transparent 293 work history about 292 adding status and notes to 259 displaying 262 sorting 262 viewing for drawings 259 Work History dialog box 261 workspaces about 273 switching 274

X xrefs 242 linking or copying drawings with 243 xrefs (external references) connecting to pipe 480